# Uradni list L 181/2006

| | ISSN 1725-5155 |
| --- | --- |
| Uradni list
  Evropske unije | L 181 |
| | |
| Slovenska izdaja | Zakonodaja | Zvezek 494. julij 2006 |

ISSN 1725-5155

Uradni list

Evropske unije

L 181

Slovenska izdaja

Zakonodaja

Zvezek 494. julij 2006

---

| Vsebina | | II   Akti, katerih objava ni obvezna | Stran |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | | Svet |
| | * | Sklep Sveta z dne 13. marca 2006 o spremembi sklepov 2001/507/ES in 2001/509/ES za razglasitev pravilnikov št. 109 in št. 108 Gospodarske komisije Združenih narodov za Evropo o obnovljenih gumah za obvezna | 1 |
| | * | Sklep Sveta z dne 13. marca 2006 o pristopu skupnosti k Pravilniku št. 55 Gospodarske komisije Združenih narodov za Evropo o določbah o odobritvi mehanskih elementov za spenjanje med seboj povezanih cestnih vozil
   (
  1
  ) | 53 |

Vsebina

II   Akti, katerih objava ni obvezna

Stran

Svet

*

Sklep Sveta z dne 13. marca 2006 o spremembi sklepov 2001/507/ES in 2001/509/ES za razglasitev pravilnikov št. 109 in št. 108 Gospodarske komisije Združenih narodov za Evropo o obnovljenih gumah za obvezna

1

*

Sklep Sveta z dne 13. marca 2006 o pristopu skupnosti k Pravilniku št. 55 Gospodarske komisije Združenih narodov za Evropo o določbah o odobritvi mehanskih elementov za spenjanje med seboj povezanih cestnih vozil
   (
  1
  )

(
  1

53

| | | Popravek |
| --- | --- | --- |
| | * | Popravsi Uredbe Sveta (ES) št. 1175/2005 z dne 18. julija 2005 o uvedbi dokončne protidampinške dajatve in o dokončnem pobiranju začasne dajatve, uvedene na uvoz barijevega karbonata s poreklom iz Ljudske republike Kitajske (UL L 189 21.7.2005) | 111 |

Popravek

*

Popravsi Uredbe Sveta (ES) št. 1175/2005 z dne 18. julija 2005 o uvedbi dokončne protidampinške dajatve in o dokončnem pobiranju začasne dajatve, uvedene na uvoz barijevega karbonata s poreklom iz Ljudske republike Kitajske (UL L 189 21.7.2005)

111

| | |
| --- | --- |
| | (1)   Besedilo velja za EGP. |

---

(1)   Besedilo velja za EGP.

1

| SL | Akti z rahlo natisnjenimi naslovi so tisti, ki se nanašajo na dnevno upravljanje kmetijskih zadev in so splošno veljavni za omejeno obdobje.
  Naslovi vseh drugih aktov so v mastnem tisku in pred njimi stoji zvezdica. |
| --- | --- |

SL

Akti z rahlo natisnjenimi naslovi so tisti, ki se nanašajo na dnevno upravljanje kmetijskih zadev in so splošno veljavni za omejeno obdobje.

Naslovi vseh drugih aktov so v mastnem tisku in pred njimi stoji zvezdica.

---

II Akti, katerih objava ni obvezna

Svet

| 4.7.2006 | SL | Uradni list Evropske unije | L 181/1 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

4.7.2006

SL

Uradni list Evropske unije

L 181/1

---

SKLEP SVETA

z dne 13. marca 2006

o spremembi sklepov 2001/507/ES in 2001/509/ES za razglasitev pravilnikov št. 109 in št. 108 Gospodarske komisije Združenih narodov za Evropo o obnovljenih gumah za obvezna

(2006/443/ES)

SVET EVROPSKE UNIJE JE –

ob upoštevanju Pogodbe o ustanovitvi Evropske skupnosti,

ob upoštevanju Sklepa Sveta 97/836/ES z dne 27. novembra 1997 v pričakovanju pristopa Evropske skupnosti k Sporazumu Gospodarske komisije Združenih narodov za Evropo o sprejetju enotnih tehničnih predpisov za cestna vozila, opremo in dele, ki se lahko vgradijo v cestna vozila in/ali uporabijo na njih, in pogojih za vzajemno priznanje homologacij, dodeljenih na podlagi teh predpisov („Revidiran sporazum iz leta 1958“) (1), in zlasti člena 3(3), druge alinee člena 4(2) in člena 4(4) Sklepa,

ob upoštevanju predloga Komisije,

ob upoštevanju privolitve Evropskega parlamenta (2),

ob upoštevanju naslednjega:

| (1) | Pravilnika št. 109 in št. 108 Gospodarske komisije Združenih narodov za Evropo (UN/ECE) uvajata usklajene zahteve za obnavljanje gum ter visoko raven varnosti in varstva okolja. Omogočata prost promet obnovljenih gum. |
| --- | --- |

(1)

Pravilnika št. 109 in št. 108 Gospodarske komisije Združenih narodov za Evropo (UN/ECE) uvajata usklajene zahteve za obnavljanje gum ter visoko raven varnosti in varstva okolja. Omogočata prost promet obnovljenih gum.

| (2) | Skupnost je s Sklepom 97/836/ES postala pogodbenica Revidiranega sporazuma UN/ECE iz leta 1958. Skupnost je s sklepoma 2001/507/ES (3) in 2001/509/ES (4) pristopila k pravilnikoma št. 109 in št. 108 UN/ECE. S pristopom k tema pravilnikoma se je Skupnost zavezala, da ju v skladu z določbami členov 2 in 3 Revidiranega sporazuma iz leta 1958 sprejme kot alternativo zakonodaji Skupnosti. Vendar pa je treba v skladu s členom 4(4) Sklepa 97/836/ES v zakonodajo Skupnosti vključiti določbo, s katero postane uporaba teh pravilnikov obvezujoča. |
| --- | --- |

(2)

Skupnost je s Sklepom 97/836/ES postala pogodbenica Revidiranega sporazuma UN/ECE iz leta 1958. Skupnost je s sklepoma 2001/507/ES (3) in 2001/509/ES (4) pristopila k pravilnikoma št. 109 in št. 108 UN/ECE. S pristopom k tema pravilnikoma se je Skupnost zavezala, da ju v skladu z določbami členov 2 in 3 Revidiranega sporazuma iz leta 1958 sprejme kot alternativo zakonodaji Skupnosti. Vendar pa je treba v skladu s členom 4(4) Sklepa 97/836/ES v zakonodajo Skupnosti vključiti določbo, s katero postane uporaba teh pravilnikov obvezujoča.

| (3) | Glede na omejeno naravo potrebnega ukrepanja obvezne uporabe obeh pravilnikov ni primerno uvesti z direktivo, kot to predvidevata sklepa 2001/507/ES in 2001/509/ES. |
| --- | --- |

(3)

Glede na omejeno naravo potrebnega ukrepanja obvezne uporabe obeh pravilnikov ni primerno uvesti z direktivo, kot to predvidevata sklepa 2001/507/ES in 2001/509/ES.

| (4) | Zato je treba sklepa 2001/507/ES in 2001/509/ES ustrezno spremeniti – |
| --- | --- |

(4)

Zato je treba sklepa 2001/507/ES in 2001/509/ES ustrezno spremeniti –

SKLENIL:

Člen 1

Sklep 2001/507/ES se spremeni:

| 1. | edini člen se nadomesti z naslednjim:
  „Edini člen
  Evropska skupnost pristopi k Pravilniku št. 109 Gospodarske komisije ZN za Evropo o homologaciji proizvodnje obnovljenih pnevmatik za gospodarska vozila in njihove priklopnike.
  Od 13. septembra 2006 se priložene določbe Pravilnika št. 109 UN/ECE uporabljajo kot obvezni pogoj za dajanje obnovljenih gum, ki sodijo na področje uporabe tega pravilnika, na trg v Skupnosti.“; |
| --- | --- |

1.

edini člen se nadomesti z naslednjim:

„Edini člen

Evropska skupnost pristopi k Pravilniku št. 109 Gospodarske komisije ZN za Evropo o homologaciji proizvodnje obnovljenih pnevmatik za gospodarska vozila in njihove priklopnike.

Od 13. septembra 2006 se priložene določbe Pravilnika št. 109 UN/ECE uporabljajo kot obvezni pogoj za dajanje obnovljenih gum, ki sodijo na področje uporabe tega pravilnika, na trg v Skupnosti.“;

| 2. | besedilo Pravilnika št. 109 UN/ECE, ki je priloženo Sklepu 2001/507/ES, se nadomesti z besedilom, ki se nahaja v Prilogi I k temu sklepu. |
| --- | --- |

2.

besedilo Pravilnika št. 109 UN/ECE, ki je priloženo Sklepu 2001/507/ES, se nadomesti z besedilom, ki se nahaja v Prilogi I k temu sklepu.

Člen 2

Sklep 2001/509/ES se spremeni:

| 1. | edini člen se nadomesti z naslednjim:
  „Edini člen
  Evropska skupnost pristopi k Pravilniku št. 108 Gospodarske komisije ZN za Evropo o homologaciji proizvodnje obnovljenih pnevmatik za motorna vozila in njihove priklopnike.
  Od 13. septembra 2006 se priložene določbe Pravilnika št. 108 UN/ECE uporabljajo kot obvezni pogoj za dajanje obnovljenih gum, ki sodijo na področje uporabe tega pravilnika, na trg v Skupnosti.“; |
| --- | --- |

1.

edini člen se nadomesti z naslednjim:

„Edini člen

Evropska skupnost pristopi k Pravilniku št. 108 Gospodarske komisije ZN za Evropo o homologaciji proizvodnje obnovljenih pnevmatik za motorna vozila in njihove priklopnike.

Od 13. septembra 2006 se priložene določbe Pravilnika št. 108 UN/ECE uporabljajo kot obvezni pogoj za dajanje obnovljenih gum, ki sodijo na področje uporabe tega pravilnika, na trg v Skupnosti.“;

| 2. | besedilo Pravilnika št. 108 UN/ECE, ki je priloženo Sklepu 2001/509/ES, se nadomesti z besedilom, ki se nahaja v Prilogi II k temu sklepu. |
| --- | --- |

2.

besedilo Pravilnika št. 108 UN/ECE, ki je priloženo Sklepu 2001/509/ES, se nadomesti z besedilom, ki se nahaja v Prilogi II k temu sklepu.

V Bruslju, 13. marca 2006

Za Svet

Predsednik

M. BARTENSTEIN

---

(1)  UL L 346, 17.12.1997, str. 78.

1

(2)  Še ni objavljeno v Uradnem listu.

2

(3)  UL L 183, 6.7.2001, str. 35.

3

(4)  UL L 183, 6.7.2001, str. 37.

4

---

PRILOGA I

PRAVILNIK ECE R 109

ENOTNI PREDPISI O HOMOLOGACIJI PROIZVODNJE OBNOVLJENIH PNEVMATIK ZA GOSPODARSKA VOZILA IN NJIHOVE PRIKLOPNIKE

(Prečiščeno besedilo)

VSEBINA

PRAVILNIK

| 1. | Področje uporabe |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | Opredelitev pojmov |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | Označevanje |
| --- | --- |

3.

| 4. | Vloga za homologacijo |
| --- | --- |

4.

| 5. | Homologacija |
| --- | --- |

5.

| 6. | Zahteve |
| --- | --- |

6.

| 7. | Mere pnevmatik |
| --- | --- |

7.

| 8. | Spremembe homologacije |
| --- | --- |

8.

| 9. | Skladnost proizvodnje |
| --- | --- |

9.

| 10. | Kazni za neskladnost proizvodnje |
| --- | --- |

10.

| 11. | Dokončna prekinitev proizvodnje |
| --- | --- |

11.

| 12. | Imena in naslovi tehničnih služb, pristojnih za homologacijske preskuse, laboratorijev za preskuse in upravnih oddelkov |
| --- | --- |

12.

PRILOGE

| Priloga 1 – | Sporočilo o homologaciji, razširitvi, zavrnitvi ali preklicu homologacije ali dokončne prekinitve proizvodnje v obratu za obnovo pnevmatik po Pravilniku ECE R 109 |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 1 –

| Priloga 2 – | Primer homologacijske oznake |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 2 –

| Priloga 3 – | Primer razporeditve oznak obnovljenih pnevmatik |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 3 –

| Priloga 4 – | Seznam indeksov nosilnosti in ustrezajoče nosilnosti |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 4 –

| Priloga 5 – | Označevanje velikosti in izmer pnevmatik |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 5 –

| Priloga 6 – | Način merjenja pnevmatik |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 6 –

| Priloga 7 – | Postopek za preskuse vzdržljivosti – obremenitev/hitrost |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 7 –

| Dodatek 1 – | Program preskušanja vzdržljivosti |
| --- | --- |

Dodatek 1 –

| Dodatek 2– | Razmerje med indeksom tlaka in enotami za tlak |
| --- | --- |

Dodatek 2–

| Priloga 8 – | Spremembe nosilnosti s hitrostjo: radialne in diagonalne pnevmatike za gospodarska vozila |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 8 –

| Priloga 9 – | Pojasnjevalna slika |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 9 –

1.   PODROČJE VELJAVNOSTI

Ta pravilnik se nanaša na proizvodnjo obnovljenih pnevmatik, namenjenih za vgradnjo na gospodarska vozila in njihove priklopnike, ki se uporabljajo na cesti. Vendar pa se ne uporablja za:

| 1.1 | obnovljene pnevmatike za osebna (potniška) vozila in njihove priklopnike; |
| --- | --- |

1.1

obnovljene pnevmatike za osebna (potniška) vozila in njihove priklopnike;

| 1.2 | obnovljene pnevmatike za hitrosti pod 80 km/h; |
| --- | --- |

1.2

obnovljene pnevmatike za hitrosti pod 80 km/h;

| 1.3 | pnevmatike za kolesa in motorna kolesa; |
| --- | --- |

1.3

pnevmatike za kolesa in motorna kolesa;

| 1.4 | pnevmatike, prvotno izdelane brez simbolov kategorije hitrosti in/ali indeksov nosilnosti; |
| --- | --- |

1.4

pnevmatike, prvotno izdelane brez simbolov kategorije hitrosti in/ali indeksov nosilnosti;

| 1.5 | pnevmatike, prvotno izdelane brez homologacije in brez oznake „E“ ali „e“. |
| --- | --- |

1.5

pnevmatike, prvotno izdelane brez homologacije in brez oznake „E“ ali „e“.

2.   POMEN IZRAZOV – glej tudi sliko v Prilogi 9

Za namene tega pravilnika se uporabljajo naslednje opredelitve:

| 2.1 | „Vrsta obnovljenih pnevmatik“ pomeni vrsto obnovljenih pnevmatik, kot je navedeno v točki 4.1.4. |
| --- | --- |

2.1

„Vrsta obnovljenih pnevmatik“ pomeni vrsto obnovljenih pnevmatik, kot je navedeno v točki 4.1.4.

| 2.2 | „Zgradba“ pnevmatike pomeni tehnične značilnosti karkase pnevmatike. Ločimo predvsem naslednje zgradbe: |
| --- | --- |

2.2

„Zgradba“ pnevmatike pomeni tehnične značilnosti karkase pnevmatike. Ločimo predvsem naslednje zgradbe:

| 2.2.1 | „Diagonalna zgradba“ ali „zgradba s poševnim vložkom“ pomeni zgradbo pnevmatike, pri kateri niti vložkov potekajo od noge do noge, vložki pa so položeni tako, da potekajo niti pod izmeničnim kotom, znatno manjšim od 90o na smer gibanja kolesa. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1

„Diagonalna zgradba“ ali „zgradba s poševnim vložkom“ pomeni zgradbo pnevmatike, pri kateri niti vložkov potekajo od noge do noge, vložki pa so položeni tako, da potekajo niti pod izmeničnim kotom, znatno manjšim od 90o na smer gibanja kolesa.

| 2.2.2 | „Prepasana diagonalna zgradba“ pomeni zgradbo diagonalne pnevmatike (poševni vložek), pri kateri je karkasa učvrščena z obdajajočim pasom, sestavljenim iz dveh ali več vložkov, v katerih so kordne niti zelo neraztegljive. Vložki pasu so izmenično položeni drug na drugega tako, da niti sosednjih vložkov oklepajo kot, ki je primerljiv s kotom niti v vložkih karkase. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2

„Prepasana diagonalna zgradba“ pomeni zgradbo diagonalne pnevmatike (poševni vložek), pri kateri je karkasa učvrščena z obdajajočim pasom, sestavljenim iz dveh ali več vložkov, v katerih so kordne niti zelo neraztegljive. Vložki pasu so izmenično položeni drug na drugega tako, da niti sosednjih vložkov oklepajo kot, ki je primerljiv s kotom niti v vložkih karkase.

| 2.2.3 | „Radialna zgradba“ pomeni zgradbo pnevmatike, pri kateri niti vložkov karkase potekajo od noge do noge, vložki pa so položeni tako, da niti v njih potekajo pod kotom 90o na smer gibanja kolesa. Karkasa je učvrščena z zelo neraztegljivim obdajajočim pasom. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.3

„Radialna zgradba“ pomeni zgradbo pnevmatike, pri kateri niti vložkov karkase potekajo od noge do noge, vložki pa so položeni tako, da niti v njih potekajo pod kotom 90o na smer gibanja kolesa. Karkasa je učvrščena z zelo neraztegljivim obdajajočim pasom.

| 2.3 | „Kategorije uporabe“ |
| --- | --- |

2.3

„Kategorije uporabe“

| 2.3.1 | Normalna pnevmatika je pnevmatika, namenjena za normalno rabo na cestah. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.1

Normalna pnevmatika je pnevmatika, namenjena za normalno rabo na cestah.

| 2.3.2 | Pnevmatika za posebno uporabo je pnevmatika, namenjena za uporabo pri omejeni hitrosti na cesti in izven ceste. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.2

Pnevmatika za posebno uporabo je pnevmatika, namenjena za uporabo pri omejeni hitrosti na cesti in izven ceste.

| 2.3.3 | Zimska pnevmatika je pnevmatika, pri kateri sta tekalna plast ali tekalna plast in zgradba načrtovani predvsem tako, da zagotavljata v blatu in svežem ali topečem se snegu boljšo učinkovitost kot normalna pnevmatika. Tekalna plast zimske pnevmatike je na splošno sestavljena iz kanalov (reber) in blokov tekalne površine, ki so bolj razmaknjeni kot pri normalni pnevmatiki. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.3

Zimska pnevmatika je pnevmatika, pri kateri sta tekalna plast ali tekalna plast in zgradba načrtovani predvsem tako, da zagotavljata v blatu in svežem ali topečem se snegu boljšo učinkovitost kot normalna pnevmatika. Tekalna plast zimske pnevmatike je na splošno sestavljena iz kanalov (reber) in blokov tekalne površine, ki so bolj razmaknjeni kot pri normalni pnevmatiki.

| 2.4 | „Noga“ je del pnevmatike, ki ima takšno obliko in zgradbo, da se prilega platišču in drži pnevmatiko na njem. |
| --- | --- |

2.4

„Noga“ je del pnevmatike, ki ima takšno obliko in zgradbo, da se prilega platišču in drži pnevmatiko na njem.

| 2.5 | „Kord“ so prameni niti v vložkih pnevmatike. |
| --- | --- |

2.5

„Kord“ so prameni niti v vložkih pnevmatike.

| 2.6 | „Vložek“ je plast z gumo obloženih vzporednih kordnih niti. |
| --- | --- |

2.6

„Vložek“ je plast z gumo obloženih vzporednih kordnih niti.

| 2.7 | „Pas“ se uporablja pri radialni ali pri prepasani pnevmatiki in pomeni sloj(-e) materiala pod tekalno plastjo, ki poteka(-jo) v glavnem v smeri središčne črte tekalne plasti, da omeji karkaso v obodni smeri. |
| --- | --- |

2.7

„Pas“ se uporablja pri radialni ali pri prepasani pnevmatiki in pomeni sloj(-e) materiala pod tekalno plastjo, ki poteka(-jo) v glavnem v smeri središčne črte tekalne plasti, da omeji karkaso v obodni smeri.

| 2.8 | „Blažilnik“ se uporablja pri diagonalni pnevmatiki in pomeni vmesni vložek med karkaso in tekalno plastjo. |
| --- | --- |

2.8

„Blažilnik“ se uporablja pri diagonalni pnevmatiki in pomeni vmesni vložek med karkaso in tekalno plastjo.

| 2.9 | „Zaščitni vmesni vložek“ se lahko uporablja pri radialni pnevmatiki in pomeni vmesni vložek med tekalno plastjo in pasom, ki zmanjša poškodbe pasu. |
| --- | --- |

2.9

„Zaščitni vmesni vložek“ se lahko uporablja pri radialni pnevmatiki in pomeni vmesni vložek med tekalno plastjo in pasom, ki zmanjša poškodbe pasu.

| 2.10 | „Zaščita“ je material na področju noge, ki varuje karkaso pred obrabo, da se ne oguli oz. odrgne ob platišče. |
| --- | --- |

2.10

„Zaščita“ je material na področju noge, ki varuje karkaso pred obrabo, da se ne oguli oz. odrgne ob platišče.

| 2.11 | „Karkasa“ je tisti strukturni del pnevmatike, ki ni tekalna plast in zunanji gumijasti del bočnice in ki pri napolnjeni pnevmatiki pomaga prenašati obremenitve. |
| --- | --- |

2.11

„Karkasa“ je tisti strukturni del pnevmatike, ki ni tekalna plast in zunanji gumijasti del bočnice in ki pri napolnjeni pnevmatiki pomaga prenašati obremenitve.

| 2.12 | „Tekalna plast“ je tisti strukturni del pnevmatike, ki ustvari stik s tlemi, varuje karkaso pred mehanskimi poškodbami in omogoča oprijem s podlago. |
| --- | --- |

2.12

„Tekalna plast“ je tisti strukturni del pnevmatike, ki ustvari stik s tlemi, varuje karkaso pred mehanskimi poškodbami in omogoča oprijem s podlago.

| 2.13 | „Bočnica“ je tisti del pnevmatike med tekalno plastjo in površino, ki jo pokrije rob platišča. |
| --- | --- |

2.13

„Bočnica“ je tisti del pnevmatike med tekalno plastjo in površino, ki jo pokrije rob platišča.

| 2.14 | „Spodnji del pnevmatike“ je področje med črto največje širine preseka pnevmatike in področjem, ki ga pokriva rob platišča. |
| --- | --- |

2.14

„Spodnji del pnevmatike“ je področje med črto največje širine preseka pnevmatike in področjem, ki ga pokriva rob platišča.

| 2.15 | „Kanal v tekalni plasti“ je prostor med sosednjima rebroma ali blokoma v dezenu tekalne plasti. |
| --- | --- |

2.15

„Kanal v tekalni plasti“ je prostor med sosednjima rebroma ali blokoma v dezenu tekalne plasti.

| 2.16 | „Širina preseka“ je linearna razdalja med zunanjima površinama bočnic napolnjene pnevmatike, ko je nameščena na določeno merilno platišče, vendar brez upoštevanja debeline napisov (oznak), dekoracij ali zaščitnih trakov ali reber. |
| --- | --- |

2.16

„Širina preseka“ je linearna razdalja med zunanjima površinama bočnic napolnjene pnevmatike, ko je nameščena na določeno merilno platišče, vendar brez upoštevanja debeline napisov (oznak), dekoracij ali zaščitnih trakov ali reber.

| 2.17 | „Celotna širina“ je linearna razdalja med zunanjima površinama bočnic napolnjene pnevmatike, ko je nameščena na predpisano merilno platišče, vključno z debelino napisov (oznak), dekoracij ali zaščitnih trakov ali reber. |
| --- | --- |

2.17

„Celotna širina“ je linearna razdalja med zunanjima površinama bočnic napolnjene pnevmatike, ko je nameščena na predpisano merilno platišče, vključno z debelino napisov (oznak), dekoracij ali zaščitnih trakov ali reber.

| 2.18 | „Višina preseka“ je razdalja, enaka polovični razliki zunanjega premera pnevmatike in nazivnega premera platišča. |
| --- | --- |

2.18

„Višina preseka“ je razdalja, enaka polovični razliki zunanjega premera pnevmatike in nazivnega premera platišča.

| 2.19 | „Nazivno presečno razmerje“ pomeni stokratnik števila, dobljenega z deljenjem nazivne višine preseka z nazivno širino preseka, pri čemer sta obe izmeri izraženi v istih enotah. |
| --- | --- |

2.19

„Nazivno presečno razmerje“ pomeni stokratnik števila, dobljenega z deljenjem nazivne višine preseka z nazivno širino preseka, pri čemer sta obe izmeri izraženi v istih enotah.

| 2.20 | „Zunanji premer“ pomeni celotni premer napolnjene, na novo obnovljene pnevmatike. |
| --- | --- |

2.20

„Zunanji premer“ pomeni celotni premer napolnjene, na novo obnovljene pnevmatike.

| 2.21 | „Oznaka velikosti pnevmatik“ je oznaka, ki kaže: |
| --- | --- |

2.21

„Oznaka velikosti pnevmatik“ je oznaka, ki kaže:

| 2.21.1 | nazivno širino preseka. Ta širina mora biti izražena v mm, razen pri pnevmatikah, katerih oznaka velikosti je navedena v prvem stolpcu tabel v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku; |
| --- | --- |

2.21.1

nazivno širino preseka. Ta širina mora biti izražena v mm, razen pri pnevmatikah, katerih oznaka velikosti je navedena v prvem stolpcu tabel v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku;

| 2.21.2 | nazivno presečno razmerje, razen pri pnevmatikah, katerih oznaka velikosti je navedena v prvem stolpcu tabel v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku; |
| --- | --- |

2.21.2

nazivno presečno razmerje, razen pri pnevmatikah, katerih oznaka velikosti je navedena v prvem stolpcu tabel v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku;

| 2.21.3 | dogovorjeno število „d“ (simbol „d“), ki označuje nazivni premer platišča in ustreza premeru platišča, izraženemu v palcih (števila pod 100) ali v mm (števila nad 100). Za označevanje se lahko uporabijo števila, ki ustrezajo obema načinoma meritev. |
| --- | --- |

2.21.3

dogovorjeno število „d“ (simbol „d“), ki označuje nazivni premer platišča in ustreza premeru platišča, izraženemu v palcih (števila pod 100) ali v mm (števila nad 100). Za označevanje se lahko uporabijo števila, ki ustrezajo obema načinoma meritev.

| 2.21.3.1 | Vrednosti simbolov „d“, izražene v milimetrih, so navedene spodaj:






  Koda nazivnega premera platišča – „d“ | Vrednost simbola „d“, izražena v mm |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 8
  9
  10
  11
  12
  13
  14 | 203
  229
  254
  279
  305
  330
  356 |
| 15
  16
  17
  18
  19 | 381
  406
  432
  457
  483 |
| 20
  21
  22
  24
  25 | 508
  533
  559
  610
  635 |
| 14,5
  16,5
  17,5
  19,5
  20,5
  22,5
  24,5 | 368
  419
  445
  495
  521
  572
  622 |
| 26
  28
  30 | 660
  711
  762 |

2.21.3.1

Vrednosti simbolov „d“, izražene v milimetrih, so navedene spodaj:

Koda nazivnega premera platišča – „d“

Vrednost simbola „d“, izražena v mm

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

203

229

254

279

305

330

356

15

16

17

18

19

381

406

432

457

483

20

21

22

24

25

508

533

559

610

635

14,5

16,5

17,5

19,5

20,5

22,5

24,5

368

419

445

495

521

572

622

26

28

30

660

711

762

| 2.22 | „Nazivni premer platišča (d)“ je premer platišča, na katero se vgradi ustrezna pnevmatika. |
| --- | --- |

2.22

„Nazivni premer platišča (d)“ je premer platišča, na katero se vgradi ustrezna pnevmatika.

| 2.23 | „Platišče“ je opora, na kateri sedita nogi pnevmatike, bodisi pnevmatike z zračnico ali brez nje. |
| --- | --- |

2.23

„Platišče“ je opora, na kateri sedita nogi pnevmatike, bodisi pnevmatike z zračnico ali brez nje.

| 2.24 | „Merilno platišče“ je platišče, ki je določeno z „merilno širino platišča“ ali „konstrukcijsko širino platišča“ za posamezno velikost pnevmatike v poljubni izdaji enega ali več mednarodnih standardov za pnevmatike. |
| --- | --- |

2.24

„Merilno platišče“ je platišče, ki je določeno z „merilno širino platišča“ ali „konstrukcijsko širino platišča“ za posamezno velikost pnevmatike v poljubni izdaji enega ali več mednarodnih standardov za pnevmatike.

| 2.25 | „Preskusno platišče“ je katero koli platišče, ki je odobreno ali priporočeno ali dovoljeno v enem od mednarodnih standardov za pnevmatike za konkretno velikost in tip pnevmatike. |
| --- | --- |

2.25

„Preskusno platišče“ je katero koli platišče, ki je odobreno ali priporočeno ali dovoljeno v enem od mednarodnih standardov za pnevmatike za konkretno velikost in tip pnevmatike.

| 2.26 | „Mednarodni standard za pnevmatike“ je eden od naslednjih dokumentov standardov:






  (a) | The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (Evropska tehnična organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča (1): „Standards Manual (Priročnik za standarde)“ |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.26

„Mednarodni standard za pnevmatike“ je eden od naslednjih dokumentov standardov:

(a)

The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (Evropska tehnična organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča (1): „Standards Manual (Priročnik za standarde)“

| (b) | The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (Evropska tehnična organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča) (1): „Engineering Design Information – obsolete data (Informacije za tehnično projektiranje – zastareli podatki)“ |
| --- | --- |

(b)

The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO) (Evropska tehnična organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča) (1): „Engineering Design Information – obsolete data (Informacije za tehnično projektiranje – zastareli podatki)“

| (c) | The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (Združenje za pnevmatike in platišča) (2): „Year Book (Letna publikacija)“ |
| --- | --- |

(c)

The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (Združenje za pnevmatike in platišča) (2): „Year Book (Letna publikacija)“

| (d) | The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (Združenje japonskih proizvajalcev avtomobilskih pnevmatik) (3): „Year Book (Letna publikacija)“ |
| --- | --- |

(d)

The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (Združenje japonskih proizvajalcev avtomobilskih pnevmatik) (3): „Year Book (Letna publikacija)“

| (e) | The Tire and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (Združenje za pnevmatike in platišča Avstralije) (4): „Standards Manual (Priročnik za standarde)“ |
| --- | --- |

(e)

The Tire and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (Združenje za pnevmatike in platišča Avstralije) (4): „Standards Manual (Priročnik za standarde)“

| (f) | The Associação Brasiliera de Pneus e Aros (ABPA) (5): „Manual de Normal Technicas (Priročnik za tehnične standarde)“ |
| --- | --- |

(f)

The Associação Brasiliera de Pneus e Aros (ABPA) (5): „Manual de Normal Technicas (Priročnik za tehnične standarde)“

| (g) | The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (Skandinavska organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča) (6): „Data Book (Publikacija s podatki)“. |
| --- | --- |

(g)

The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) (Skandinavska organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča) (6): „Data Book (Publikacija s podatki)“.

Standarde za pnevmatike je možno naročiti na naslednjih naslovih:

| 2.27 | „Trganje“ je odletavanje delcev gume s tekalne plasti. |
| --- | --- |

2.27

„Trganje“ je odletavanje delcev gume s tekalne plasti.

| 2.28 | „Ločevanje korda“ je ločevanje kordnih nitk od njihove gumijaste prevleke. |
| --- | --- |

2.28

„Ločevanje korda“ je ločevanje kordnih nitk od njihove gumijaste prevleke.

| 2.29 | „Razslojevanje vložkov“ je ločevanje sosednjih vložkov. |
| --- | --- |

2.29

„Razslojevanje vložkov“ je ločevanje sosednjih vložkov.

| 2.30 | „Ločevanje tekalne plasti“ je trganje tekalne plasti od karkase. |
| --- | --- |

2.30

„Ločevanje tekalne plasti“ je trganje tekalne plasti od karkase.

| 2.31 | „Opis uporabe“ je posebna kombinacija indeksa nosilnosti in simbola kategorije hitrosti pnevmatike. |
| --- | --- |

2.31

„Opis uporabe“ je posebna kombinacija indeksa nosilnosti in simbola kategorije hitrosti pnevmatike.

| 2.32 | „Indeks nosilnosti“ je številska koda, ki kaže nosilnost pnevmatike pri dani hitrosti, kot jo navaja simbol hitrosti, in pri uporabi v skladu s proizvajalčevimi pogoji uporabe. Pnevmatika ima lahko več kot en indeks nosilnosti za navedbo njene nosilnosti, kadar se uporablja posamezno ali kot dvojna pnevmatika, ali alternativne nosilnosti (izredni primer), pri kateri sprememba nosilnosti v skladu s točko 2.35 in Prilogo 8 k temu pravilniku ni dovoljena.
  Seznam indeksov nosilnosti in ustrezajoče obremenitve so prikazani v Prilogi 4 k temu pravilniku. |
| --- | --- |

2.32

„Indeks nosilnosti“ je številska koda, ki kaže nosilnost pnevmatike pri dani hitrosti, kot jo navaja simbol hitrosti, in pri uporabi v skladu s proizvajalčevimi pogoji uporabe. Pnevmatika ima lahko več kot en indeks nosilnosti za navedbo njene nosilnosti, kadar se uporablja posamezno ali kot dvojna pnevmatika, ali alternativne nosilnosti (izredni primer), pri kateri sprememba nosilnosti v skladu s točko 2.35 in Prilogo 8 k temu pravilniku ni dovoljena.

Seznam indeksov nosilnosti in ustrezajoče obremenitve so prikazani v Prilogi 4 k temu pravilniku.

| 2.33 | „Simbol hitrosti“ je: |
| --- | --- |

2.33

„Simbol hitrosti“ je:

| 2.33.1 | črkovni simbol, ki prikazuje kategorijo hitrosti, pri kateri je pnevmatika lahko obremenjena skladno z indeksom nosilnosti;
  Standarde za pnevmatike je možno naročiti na naslednjih naslovih: |
| --- | --- |

2.33.1

črkovni simbol, ki prikazuje kategorijo hitrosti, pri kateri je pnevmatika lahko obremenjena skladno z indeksom nosilnosti;

Standarde za pnevmatike je možno naročiti na naslednjih naslovih:

| 2.33.2 | Simboli hitrosti in ustrezajoče hitrosti so navedene v spodnji tabeli:






  Simbol hitrosti | Ustrezajoča najvišja hitrost (km/h) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| F
  G
  J
  K
  L
  M
  N
  P
  Q
  R
  S
  T
  U
  H | 80
  90
  100
  110
  120
  130
  140
  150
  160
  170
  180
  190
  200
  210 |

2.33.2

Simboli hitrosti in ustrezajoče hitrosti so navedene v spodnji tabeli:

Simbol hitrosti

Ustrezajoča najvišja hitrost (km/h)

F

G

J

K

L

M

N

P

Q

R

S

T

U

H

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

| 2.34 | „Izredni primer“ je dodaten opis uporabe, označen poleg opisa normalne uporabe, ki pa se ne sme uporabiti za izračun spremembe nosilnosti, kot je določeno v točki 2.35 in v Prilogi 8 k temu pravilniku. |
| --- | --- |

2.34

„Izredni primer“ je dodaten opis uporabe, označen poleg opisa normalne uporabe, ki pa se ne sme uporabiti za izračun spremembe nosilnosti, kot je določeno v točki 2.35 in v Prilogi 8 k temu pravilniku.

| 2.35 | „Sprememba nosilnosti s hitrostjo“ je alternativna nosilnost pnevmatik, ki se uporabljajo pri drugih hitrostih, kot jo navaja simbol hitrosti pri opisu normalne uporabe. Dovoljene spremembe navaja tabela v Prilogi 8 k temu pravilniku. |
| --- | --- |

2.35

„Sprememba nosilnosti s hitrostjo“ je alternativna nosilnost pnevmatik, ki se uporabljajo pri drugih hitrostih, kot jo navaja simbol hitrosti pri opisu normalne uporabe. Dovoljene spremembe navaja tabela v Prilogi 8 k temu pravilniku.

| 2.36 | „Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik“ je lokacija s proizvodno enoto ali skupina lokacij, kjer se dokonča proizvodnja obnovljenih pnevmatik. |
| --- | --- |

2.36

„Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik“ je lokacija s proizvodno enoto ali skupina lokacij, kjer se dokonča proizvodnja obnovljenih pnevmatik.

| 2.37 | „Obnovitev pnevmatike“ je splošni izraz za obnovitev rabljene pnevmatike, ko se zamenja obrabljena tekalna plast z novim materialom. Vključuje lahko tudi obnovo zunanje bočnice in zamenjavo temenskih vložkov tekalne plasti ali zaščitnega vmesnega vložka. Vključuje naslednje metode postopkov: |
| --- | --- |

2.37

„Obnovitev pnevmatike“ je splošni izraz za obnovitev rabljene pnevmatike, ko se zamenja obrabljena tekalna plast z novim materialom. Vključuje lahko tudi obnovo zunanje bočnice in zamenjavo temenskih vložkov tekalne plasti ali zaščitnega vmesnega vložka. Vključuje naslednje metode postopkov:

| 2.37.1 | „prekritje zgornje plasti“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti; |
| --- | --- |

2.37.1

„prekritje zgornje plasti“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti;

| 2.37.2 | „razširjeno prekritje“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti z novim materialom, ki sega preko dela bočnice; |
| --- | --- |

2.37.2

„razširjeno prekritje“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti z novim materialom, ki sega preko dela bočnice;

| 2.37.3 | „od noge do noge“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti in obnova bočnice, vključno s celotnim spodnjim delom pnevmatike ali njegovim delom. |
| --- | --- |

2.37.3

„od noge do noge“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti in obnova bočnice, vključno s celotnim spodnjim delom pnevmatike ali njegovim delom.

| 2.38 | „Ogrodje pnevmatike“ je obrabljena pnevmatika, ki obsega karkaso in preostali material tekalne plasti in bočnice. |
| --- | --- |

2.38

„Ogrodje pnevmatike“ je obrabljena pnevmatika, ki obsega karkaso in preostali material tekalne plasti in bočnice.

| 2.39 | „Brušenje“ je postopek odstranitve starega materiala z ogrodja pnevmatike zaradi priprave površine za nanašanje novega materiala. |
| --- | --- |

2.39

„Brušenje“ je postopek odstranitve starega materiala z ogrodja pnevmatike zaradi priprave površine za nanašanje novega materiala.

| 2.40 | „Popravilo“ je delo, ki se opravi na poškodovanih ogrodjih pnevmatike v okviru priznanih meja. |
| --- | --- |

2.40

„Popravilo“ je delo, ki se opravi na poškodovanih ogrodjih pnevmatike v okviru priznanih meja.

| 2.41 | „Material za tekalno plast“ je material v primernem stanju za zamenjavo obrabljene tekalne plasti. Lahko je v več oblikah, na primer: |
| --- | --- |

2.41

„Material za tekalno plast“ je material v primernem stanju za zamenjavo obrabljene tekalne plasti. Lahko je v več oblikah, na primer:

| 2.41.1 | „profilirani trakovi“ (kamelji hrbet) – material narezan na določeno dolžino, ki je bil predhodno ekstrudiran v zahtevani prečni profil in zatem nameščen v hladnem stanju na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran; |
| --- | --- |

2.41.1

„profilirani trakovi“ (kamelji hrbet) – material narezan na določeno dolžino, ki je bil predhodno ekstrudiran v zahtevani prečni profil in zatem nameščen v hladnem stanju na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran;

| 2.41.2 | „naviti trakovi“ – trak materiala za tekalno plast, ki se neposredno ekstrudira in navije na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike in nanaša do potrebnega preseka. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran; |
| --- | --- |

2.41.2

„naviti trakovi“ – trak materiala za tekalno plast, ki se neposredno ekstrudira in navije na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike in nanaša do potrebnega preseka. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran;

| 2.41.3 | „neposredno ekstrudiranje“ – material za tekalno plast, ekstrudiran v potrebnem preseku in neposredno ekstrudiran na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran; |
| --- | --- |

2.41.3

„neposredno ekstrudiranje“ – material za tekalno plast, ekstrudiran v potrebnem preseku in neposredno ekstrudiran na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran;

| 2.41.4 | „predvulkanizirano“ – predhodno oblikovana in vulkanizirana tekalna plast, ki se nanese neposredno na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material se mora prilepiti na ogrodje pnevmatike. |
| --- | --- |

2.41.4

„predvulkanizirano“ – predhodno oblikovana in vulkanizirana tekalna plast, ki se nanese neposredno na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material se mora prilepiti na ogrodje pnevmatike.

| 2.42 | „Obloga bočnic“ je material, uporabljen za pokritje bočnic ogrodja pnevmatike, da se lahko oblikujejo potrebne oznake. |
| --- | --- |

2.42

„Obloga bočnic“ je material, uporabljen za pokritje bočnic ogrodja pnevmatike, da se lahko oblikujejo potrebne oznake.

| 2.43 | „Vmesna guma“ je material, uporabljen kot vezni sloj med novo tekalno plastjo in okvirom, pa tudi za popravilo manjših poškodb. |
| --- | --- |

2.43

„Vmesna guma“ je material, uporabljen kot vezni sloj med novo tekalno plastjo in okvirom, pa tudi za popravilo manjših poškodb.

| 2.44 | „Lepilo“ je lepljiva raztopina, ki pred postopkom vulkanizacije drži nove materiale na predvidenem mestu. |
| --- | --- |

2.44

„Lepilo“ je lepljiva raztopina, ki pred postopkom vulkanizacije drži nove materiale na predvidenem mestu.

| 2.45 | „Vulkanizacija“ je izraz, ki opisuje spremembo fizikalnih lastnosti novega materiala, do katerih običajno pride zaradi delovanja toplote in tlaka za določen čas in v nadzorovanih razmerah. |
| --- | --- |

2.45

„Vulkanizacija“ je izraz, ki opisuje spremembo fizikalnih lastnosti novega materiala, do katerih običajno pride zaradi delovanja toplote in tlaka za določen čas in v nadzorovanih razmerah.

3.   OZNAČEVANJE

| 3.1 | Primer razmestitve oznak na obnovljenih pnevmatikah je naveden v Prilogi 3 k temu pravilniku. |
| --- | --- |

3.1

Primer razmestitve oznak na obnovljenih pnevmatikah je naveden v Prilogi 3 k temu pravilniku.

| 3.2 | Obnovljene pnevmatike morajo pri simetričnih pnevmatikah imeti na obeh bočnicah, pri asimetričnih pa vsaj na zunanji strani: |
| --- | --- |

3.2

Obnovljene pnevmatike morajo pri simetričnih pnevmatikah imeti na obeh bočnicah, pri asimetričnih pa vsaj na zunanji strani:

| 3.2.1 | ime blagovne znamke ali registrirane blagovne znamke; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1

ime blagovne znamke ali registrirane blagovne znamke;

| 3.2.2 | oznako velikosti pnevmatik, kot je določeno v točki 2.21; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2

oznako velikosti pnevmatik, kot je določeno v točki 2.21;

| 3.2.3 | navedbo zgradbe, kot sledi: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3

navedbo zgradbe, kot sledi:

| 3.2.3.1 | na diagonalnih pnevmatikah: brez navedbe ali črka „D“ pred oznako za premer platišča; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.1

na diagonalnih pnevmatikah: brez navedbe ali črka „D“ pred oznako za premer platišča;

| 3.2.3.2 | na radialnih pnevmatikah: črka „R“ pred oznako za premer platišča, in po izbiri, beseda „RADIAL“; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.2

na radialnih pnevmatikah: črka „R“ pred oznako za premer platišča, in po izbiri, beseda „RADIAL“;

| 3.2.3.3 | na pnevmatikah s poševnim vložkom: črka „B“ pred oznako za premer platišča in dodatno besedi „BIAS-BELTED“; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.3

na pnevmatikah s poševnim vložkom: črka „B“ pred oznako za premer platišča in dodatno besedi „BIAS-BELTED“;

| 3.2.4 | opis uporabe, ki zajema: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4

opis uporabe, ki zajema:

| 3.2.4.1 | navedbo nazivne nosilnosti pnevmatike v obliki indeksa/indeksov nosilnosti, ki je predpisan v točki 2.32; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.1

navedbo nazivne nosilnosti pnevmatike v obliki indeksa/indeksov nosilnosti, ki je predpisan v točki 2.32;

| 3.2.4.2 | navedbo največje nazivne hitrosti pnevmatike v obliki simbola, kot je predpisan v točki 2.33; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.2

navedbo največje nazivne hitrosti pnevmatike v obliki simbola, kot je predpisan v točki 2.33;

| 3.2.5 | če je primerno, en alternativen opis uporabe, „poseben primer“, ki zajema: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5

če je primerno, en alternativen opis uporabe, „poseben primer“, ki zajema:

| 3.2.5.1 | navedbo nosilnosti pnevmatike v obliki indeksa nosilnosti, ki je predpisan v točki 2.32; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.1

navedbo nosilnosti pnevmatike v obliki indeksa nosilnosti, ki je predpisan v točki 2.32;

| 3.2.5.2 | navedbo največje hitrosti pnevmatike v obliki simbola, kot je predpisan v točki 2.33; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.2

navedbo največje hitrosti pnevmatike v obliki simbola, kot je predpisan v točki 2.33;

| | 3.2.6 besedo „TUBELESS“ (brez zračnice), če je pnevmatika namenjena za uporabo brez notranje zračnice; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6 besedo „TUBELESS“ (brez zračnice), če je pnevmatika namenjena za uporabo brez notranje zračnice;

| 3.2.7 | napis M+S ali MS ali M.S. ali M & S, če gre za zimsko pnevmatiko; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.7

napis M+S ali MS ali M.S. ali M & S, če gre za zimsko pnevmatiko;

| 3.2.8 | datum obnove, kot sledi: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.8

datum obnove, kot sledi:

| 3.2.8.1 | do 31. decembra 1999; kot predpisuje točka 3.2.8.2 ali v obliki skupine treh številk, pri čemer prvi dve pomenita številko tedna, tretja pa leto izdelave v posameznem desetletju. Datumska oznaka lahko zajema obdobje proizvodnje od tedna, označenega z ustrezno številko, pa vse do tri tedne zatem (številka tedna povečana za tri). Na primer, oznaka „253“ bi lahko pomenila pnevmatiko, ki je bila obnovljena v tednih 25, 26, 27 ali 28 v letu 1993.
  Datumska oznaka je lahko označena le na eni strani; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.8.1

do 31. decembra 1999; kot predpisuje točka 3.2.8.2 ali v obliki skupine treh številk, pri čemer prvi dve pomenita številko tedna, tretja pa leto izdelave v posameznem desetletju. Datumska oznaka lahko zajema obdobje proizvodnje od tedna, označenega z ustrezno številko, pa vse do tri tedne zatem (številka tedna povečana za tri). Na primer, oznaka „253“ bi lahko pomenila pnevmatiko, ki je bila obnovljena v tednih 25, 26, 27 ali 28 v letu 1993.

Datumska oznaka je lahko označena le na eni strani;

| 3.2.8.2 | po 1. januarju 2000; v obliki skupine štirih številk, pri čemer prvi dve pomenita številko tedna, zadnji dve pa leto, v katerem je bila pnevmatika obnovljena. Datumska oznaka lahko zajema obdobje proizvodnje od tedna, označenega z ustrezno številko, pa vse do tri tedne zatem (številka tedna povečana za tri). Na primer, oznaka „2503“ bi lahko pomenila pnevmatiko, ki je bila obnovljena v tednih 25, 26, 27 ali 28 v letu 2003.
  Datumska oznaka je lahko označena le na eni strani; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.8.2

po 1. januarju 2000; v obliki skupine štirih številk, pri čemer prvi dve pomenita številko tedna, zadnji dve pa leto, v katerem je bila pnevmatika obnovljena. Datumska oznaka lahko zajema obdobje proizvodnje od tedna, označenega z ustrezno številko, pa vse do tri tedne zatem (številka tedna povečana za tri). Na primer, oznaka „2503“ bi lahko pomenila pnevmatiko, ki je bila obnovljena v tednih 25, 26, 27 ali 28 v letu 2003.

Datumska oznaka je lahko označena le na eni strani;

| 3.2.9 | pri pnevmatikah, na katerih je mogoče ponovno vrezati kanale, simbol „

  “ v krogu najmanj 20 mm premera, ali beseda „REGROOVABLE“, ki je nalita na vsako bočnico ali vtisnjena vanjo; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.9

Image

| 3.2.10 | navedba, z indeksom „PSI“, o tlaku v pnevmatiki, ki se uporabi pri preskusih vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost, kot je razloženo v Dodatku 2 Priloge 7 k temu pravilniku.
  Ta oznaka se lahko namesti samo na eno bočnico; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.10

navedba, z indeksom „PSI“, o tlaku v pnevmatiki, ki se uporabi pri preskusih vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost, kot je razloženo v Dodatku 2 Priloge 7 k temu pravilniku.

Ta oznaka se lahko namesti samo na eno bočnico;

| 3.2.11 | izraz „RETREAD“ ali „REMOULD“ (OBNOVLJENO ali PREOBLIKOVANO, po 1. januarju 1999 se uporablja samo beseda „RETREAD“). Na prošnjo izvajalca obnove se lahko doda ustrezni izraz tudi v drugih jezikih; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.11

izraz „RETREAD“ ali „REMOULD“ (OBNOVLJENO ali PREOBLIKOVANO, po 1. januarju 1999 se uporablja samo beseda „RETREAD“). Na prošnjo izvajalca obnove se lahko doda ustrezni izraz tudi v drugih jezikih;

| 3.2.12 | napis „ET“ ali „ML“ ali „MPT“ za pnevmatike „za posebno rabo“ (7). |
| --- | --- |

3.2.12

napis „ET“ ali „ML“ ali „MPT“ za pnevmatike „za posebno rabo“ (7).

| 3.3 | Pred homologacijo mora biti na pnevmatikah dovolj velik prostor za namestitev homologacijske oznake, kot določa točka 5.8 in je prikazano v Prilogi 2 k temu pravilniku. |
| --- | --- |

3.3

Pred homologacijo mora biti na pnevmatikah dovolj velik prostor za namestitev homologacijske oznake, kot določa točka 5.8 in je prikazano v Prilogi 2 k temu pravilniku.

| 3.4 | Po homologaciji se oznake iz točke 5.8 in Priloge 2 k temu pravilniku namestijo na ustrezen prostor, kot določa točka 3.3. Ta oznaka se lahko namesti samo na eno bočnico. |
| --- | --- |

3.4

Po homologaciji se oznake iz točke 5.8 in Priloge 2 k temu pravilniku namestijo na ustrezen prostor, kot določa točka 3.3. Ta oznaka se lahko namesti samo na eno bočnico.

| 3.5 | Oznake iz točke 3.2 in homologacijska oznaka, ki je predpisana v točkah 3.4 in 5.8, morajo biti dobro čitljive in se ulijejo na pnevmatiko oziroma vtisnejo vanjo, ali pa se trajno označijo na pnevmatiki. |
| --- | --- |

3.5

Oznake iz točke 3.2 in homologacijska oznaka, ki je predpisana v točkah 3.4 in 5.8, morajo biti dobro čitljive in se ulijejo na pnevmatiko oziroma vtisnejo vanjo, ali pa se trajno označijo na pnevmatiki.

| 3.6 | Če so izvorne specifikacije proizvajalca še vedno čitljive tudi po postopku obnove, se štejejo kot specifikacije izvajalca obnove za obnovljeno pnevmatiko. Če pa te izvorne specifikacije ne veljajo po opravljenem postopku obnove, jih je treba v celoti odstraniti. |
| --- | --- |

3.6

Če so izvorne specifikacije proizvajalca še vedno čitljive tudi po postopku obnove, se štejejo kot specifikacije izvajalca obnove za obnovljeno pnevmatiko. Če pa te izvorne specifikacije ne veljajo po opravljenem postopku obnove, jih je treba v celoti odstraniti.

| 3.7 | Če originalna homologacijska oznaka „E“ ali „e“ in homologacijska številka in katera koli druga oznaka ali homologacijska številka obrata za obnovo pnevmatik ne velja več, jo je treba odstraniti. |
| --- | --- |

3.7

Če originalna homologacijska oznaka „E“ ali „e“ in homologacijska številka in katera koli druga oznaka ali homologacijska številka obrata za obnovo pnevmatik ne velja več, jo je treba odstraniti.

4.   VLOGA ZA HOMOLOGACIJO

Naslednji postopki veljajo za izdajo homologacije obrata za obnovo pnevmatik:

| 4.1 | Vlogo za homologacijo proizvodnega obrata za obnovo pnevmatik vloži imetnik (imena) blagovne znamke, ki se uporablja za pnevmatiko, ali njegov pravilno pooblaščen zastopnik. Navesti je treba: |
| --- | --- |

4.1

Vlogo za homologacijo proizvodnega obrata za obnovo pnevmatik vloži imetnik (imena) blagovne znamke, ki se uporablja za pnevmatiko, ali njegov pravilno pooblaščen zastopnik. Navesti je treba:

| 4.1.1 | prikaz sestave družbe, ki proizvaja obnovljene pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.1

prikaz sestave družbe, ki proizvaja obnovljene pnevmatike;

| 4.1.2 | kratek opis sistema upravljanja kakovosti, ki zagotavlja učinkovit nadzor nad postopki obnavljanja pnevmatik, tako da ustrezajo zahtevam tega pravilnika; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.2

kratek opis sistema upravljanja kakovosti, ki zagotavlja učinkovit nadzor nad postopki obnavljanja pnevmatik, tako da ustrezajo zahtevam tega pravilnika;

| 4.1.3 | imena ali oznake blagovne znamke, ki se uporabljajo za obnovljene pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.3

imena ali oznake blagovne znamke, ki se uporabljajo za obnovljene pnevmatike;

| 4.1.4 | naslednje informacije v zvezi s serijo pnevmatik, ki se obnavljajo: |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4

naslednje informacije v zvezi s serijo pnevmatik, ki se obnavljajo:

| 4.1.4.1 | obseg velikosti pnevmatik; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.1

obseg velikosti pnevmatik;

| 4.1.4.2 | zgradbo pnevmatik (diagonalne ali prepasane diagonalne, ali radialne); |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.2

zgradbo pnevmatik (diagonalne ali prepasane diagonalne, ali radialne);

| 4.1.4.3 | kategorijo uporabe pnevmatik (normalne ali zimske pnevmatike itd.); |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.3

kategorijo uporabe pnevmatik (normalne ali zimske pnevmatike itd.);

| 4.1.4.4 | sistem obnavljanja in način uporabe novih materialov, kot določata točki 2.37 in 2.41; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.4

sistem obnavljanja in način uporabe novih materialov, kot določata točki 2.37 in 2.41;

| 4.1.4.5 | simbol največje hitrosti pnevmatik za obnavljanje; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.5

simbol največje hitrosti pnevmatik za obnavljanje;

| 4.1.4.6 | indeks največje nosilnosti pnevmatik za obnavljanje; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.6

indeks največje nosilnosti pnevmatik za obnavljanje;

| 4.1.4.7 | imenovani mednarodni standard za pnevmatike, s katerim je serija pnevmatik skladna. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.7

imenovani mednarodni standard za pnevmatike, s katerim je serija pnevmatik skladna.

5.   HOMOLOGACIJA

| 5.1 | Za obnavljanje pnevmatik je potrebna homologacija obrata za obnovo pnevmatik, ki jo izdajo homologacijski organi, v skladu z zahtevami tega pravilnika. Homologacijski organ ukrene vse potrebno, kot je opisano v tem pravilniku, da zagotovi ustreznost pnevmatik, obnovljenih v konkretnem obratu, z zahtevami tega pravilnika. Obrat je v celoti odgovoren, da bodo obnovljene pnevmatike izpolnile zahteve iz tega pravilnika in imele ustrezne lastnosti pri normalni rabi. |
| --- | --- |

5.1

Za obnavljanje pnevmatik je potrebna homologacija obrata za obnovo pnevmatik, ki jo izdajo homologacijski organi, v skladu z zahtevami tega pravilnika. Homologacijski organ ukrene vse potrebno, kot je opisano v tem pravilniku, da zagotovi ustreznost pnevmatik, obnovljenih v konkretnem obratu, z zahtevami tega pravilnika. Obrat je v celoti odgovoren, da bodo obnovljene pnevmatike izpolnile zahteve iz tega pravilnika in imele ustrezne lastnosti pri normalni rabi.

| 5.2 | Poleg normalnih zahtev za začetno oceno obrata za obnovo pnevmatik se mora homologacijski organ prepričati, da so vsi postopki, delovanje, navodila in dokumentacija s specifikacijami, ki jo priskrbijo dobavitelji materiala, opisani v razumljivem jeziku za operativno osebje v obratu za obnovo pnevmatik. |
| --- | --- |

5.2

Poleg normalnih zahtev za začetno oceno obrata za obnovo pnevmatik se mora homologacijski organ prepričati, da so vsi postopki, delovanje, navodila in dokumentacija s specifikacijami, ki jo priskrbijo dobavitelji materiala, opisani v razumljivem jeziku za operativno osebje v obratu za obnovo pnevmatik.

| 5.3 | Homologacijski organ mora zagotoviti, da postopki in proizvodna dokumentacija za vsak obrat za obnovo pnevmatik vsebujejo podatke o uporabljenih materialih in postopkih za popravila, o mejah popravljivih poškodb ali predrtja do karkase pnevmatike, ne glede na to, če takšna poškodba že obstaja ali nastane med postopki priprave za obnovo. |
| --- | --- |

5.3

Homologacijski organ mora zagotoviti, da postopki in proizvodna dokumentacija za vsak obrat za obnovo pnevmatik vsebujejo podatke o uporabljenih materialih in postopkih za popravila, o mejah popravljivih poškodb ali predrtja do karkase pnevmatike, ne glede na to, če takšna poškodba že obstaja ali nastane med postopki priprave za obnovo.

| 5.4 | Pred podelitvijo homologacije se mora organ prepričati, da obnovljene pnevmatike ustrezajo temu pravilniku in da so predpisani preskusi iz točk 6.5 in 6.6 uspešno opravljeni na najmanj 5 in načeloma ne več kot 20 vzorcih obnovljenih pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo serijo pnevmatik, kakršne izdeluje obrat za obnovo pnevmatik. |
| --- | --- |

5.4

Pred podelitvijo homologacije se mora organ prepričati, da obnovljene pnevmatike ustrezajo temu pravilniku in da so predpisani preskusi iz točk 6.5 in 6.6 uspešno opravljeni na najmanj 5 in načeloma ne več kot 20 vzorcih obnovljenih pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo serijo pnevmatik, kakršne izdeluje obrat za obnovo pnevmatik.

| 5.5 | V primeru vsake napake, odkrite med preskusi, je treba preskusiti še dva nadaljnja vzorca pnevmatik z isto specifikacijo.
  Če kateri koli od le-teh, ali oba, ne ustrezata, je treba preskusiti še končna dva vzorca.
  Če kateri koli od končnih vzorcev, ali oba, ne ustrezata, se vloga za homologacijo obrata za obnovo pnevmatik zavrne. |
| --- | --- |

5.5

V primeru vsake napake, odkrite med preskusi, je treba preskusiti še dva nadaljnja vzorca pnevmatik z isto specifikacijo.

Če kateri koli od le-teh, ali oba, ne ustrezata, je treba preskusiti še končna dva vzorca.

Če kateri koli od končnih vzorcev, ali oba, ne ustrezata, se vloga za homologacijo obrata za obnovo pnevmatik zavrne.

| 5.6 | Če so izpolnjene vse zahteve tega pravilnika, se izda homologacija in dodeli številka homologacije vsakemu homologiranemu obratu za obnovo pnevmatik. Prvi dve števki te številke pomenita zaporedje sprememb, ki vključujejo najnovejše tehnične spremembe tega pravilnika ob času izdaje homologacije. Pred številko homologacije je „109 R“, ki pomeni, da se homologacija nanaša na pnevmatiko, ki je obnovljena v skladu z zahtevami tega pravilnika.
  Isti organ ne sme dodeliti iste številke drugemu obratu za obnovo pnevmatik, za katero velja ta pravilnik. |
| --- | --- |

5.6

Če so izpolnjene vse zahteve tega pravilnika, se izda homologacija in dodeli številka homologacije vsakemu homologiranemu obratu za obnovo pnevmatik. Prvi dve števki te številke pomenita zaporedje sprememb, ki vključujejo najnovejše tehnične spremembe tega pravilnika ob času izdaje homologacije. Pred številko homologacije je „109 R“, ki pomeni, da se homologacija nanaša na pnevmatiko, ki je obnovljena v skladu z zahtevami tega pravilnika.

Isti organ ne sme dodeliti iste številke drugemu obratu za obnovo pnevmatik, za katero velja ta pravilnik.

| 5.7 | Obvestilo o homologaciji ali razširitvi, zavrnitvi ali preklicu homologacije, ali o dokončni prekinitvi proizvodnje po tem pravilniku se sporoči strankam Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, v obliki, ki je skladna z vzorcem v Prilogi 1 k temu pravilniku. |
| --- | --- |

5.7

Obvestilo o homologaciji ali razširitvi, zavrnitvi ali preklicu homologacije, ali o dokončni prekinitvi proizvodnje po tem pravilniku se sporoči strankam Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, v obliki, ki je skladna z vzorcem v Prilogi 1 k temu pravilniku.

| 5.8 | Na vsako obnovljeno pnevmatiko v skladu s tem pravilnikom, in sicer na prostor za oznako iz točke 3.3, in poleg oznak, ki jih predpisuje točka 3.2, je treba vidno namestiti mednarodno oznako za homologacijo, ki vsebuje: |
| --- | --- |

5.8

Na vsako obnovljeno pnevmatiko v skladu s tem pravilnikom, in sicer na prostor za oznako iz točke 3.3, in poleg oznak, ki jih predpisuje točka 3.2, je treba vidno namestiti mednarodno oznako za homologacijo, ki vsebuje:

| 5.8.1 | krog, ki obkroža črko „E“, ki ji sledi številčna oznaka države, ki je podelila homologacijo (8); in |
| --- | --- |

5.8.1

krog, ki obkroža črko „E“, ki ji sledi številčna oznaka države, ki je podelila homologacijo (8); in

| 5.8.2 | številko homologacije, kakor je opisana v točki 5.6. |
| --- | --- |

5.8.2

številko homologacije, kakor je opisana v točki 5.6.

| 5.9 | V Prilogi 2 k temu pravilniku je primer razporeditve oznake za homologacijo. |
| --- | --- |

5.9

V Prilogi 2 k temu pravilniku je primer razporeditve oznake za homologacijo.

6.   ZAHTEVE

| 6.1 | Pnevmatike ne morejo biti sprejete v prvo obnovo, če niso bile homologirane in ne nosijo oznake „E“ ali „e“, s tem, da ta zahteva ne bo obvezujoča najpozneje do 1. januarja 2000. |
| --- | --- |

6.1

Pnevmatike ne morejo biti sprejete v prvo obnovo, če niso bile homologirane in ne nosijo oznake „E“ ali „e“, s tem, da ta zahteva ne bo obvezujoča najpozneje do 1. januarja 2000.

| 6.2 | Pogoji, ki morajo biti izpolnjeni pred obnovo: |
| --- | --- |

6.2

Pogoji, ki morajo biti izpolnjeni pred obnovo:

| 6.2.1 | pnevmatike morajo biti pred pregledom čiste in suhe; |
| --- | --- |

6.2.1

pnevmatike morajo biti pred pregledom čiste in suhe;

| 6.2.2 | pred „brušenjem“ je treba vsako pnevmatiko popolnoma pregledati tako znotraj kot zunaj, da bi zagotovili njeno primernost za obnovo; |
| --- | --- |

6.2.2

pred „brušenjem“ je treba vsako pnevmatiko popolnoma pregledati tako znotraj kot zunaj, da bi zagotovili njeno primernost za obnovo;

| 6.2.3 | pnevmatik z vidnimi poškodbami zaradi prekomerne obremenitve ali nezadostne napolnjenosti ni dovoljeno obnavljati; |
| --- | --- |

6.2.3

pnevmatik z vidnimi poškodbami zaradi prekomerne obremenitve ali nezadostne napolnjenosti ni dovoljeno obnavljati;

| 6.2.4 | pnevmatik, ki kažejo naslednje poškodbe, ni mogoče sprejeti v obnovo: |
| --- | --- |

6.2.4

pnevmatik, ki kažejo naslednje poškodbe, ni mogoče sprejeti v obnovo:

| 6.2.4.1 | Splošno:






  (a) | nepopravljive razpoke v gumi, ki segajo vse do karkase |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.2.4.1

Splošno:

(a)

nepopravljive razpoke v gumi, ki segajo vse do karkase

| (b) | prelom karkase |
| --- | --- |

(b)

prelom karkase

| (c) | precejšnja poškodba zaradi olj ali kemikalij |
| --- | --- |

(c)

precejšnja poškodba zaradi olj ali kemikalij

| (d) | poškodovana ali počena noga |
| --- | --- |

(d)

poškodovana ali počena noga

| (e) | predhodna popravila poškodb zunaj navedenih omejitev poškodb – glej točko 5.3; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

predhodna popravila poškodb zunaj navedenih omejitev poškodb – glej točko 5.3;

| 6.2.4.2 | pogoji izven določenih posebnih omejitev za popravljivost – glej točko 5.3:






  (a) | predrtje karkase ali poškodba po pripravi za popravilo |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.2.4.2

pogoji izven določenih posebnih omejitev za popravljivost – glej točko 5.3:

(a)

predrtje karkase ali poškodba po pripravi za popravilo

| (b) | več poškodb preblizu skupaj |
| --- | --- |

(b)

več poškodb preblizu skupaj

| (c) | znatno poslabšanje notranje obloge |
| --- | --- |

(c)

znatno poslabšanje notranje obloge

| (d) | poškodba noge |
| --- | --- |

(d)

poškodba noge

| (e) | izpostavljen kord karkase |
| --- | --- |

(e)

izpostavljen kord karkase

| (f) | ohlapen kord |
| --- | --- |

(f)

ohlapen kord

| (g) | odstopanje vložka |
| --- | --- |

(g)

odstopanje vložka

| (h) | trajno deformiran ali prepognjen (jekleni) kord karkase |
| --- | --- |

(h)

trajno deformiran ali prepognjen (jekleni) kord karkase

| (i) | razpoke nad nogo vzdolž oboda |
| --- | --- |

(i)

razpoke nad nogo vzdolž oboda

| (j) | korodiran jekleni kord ali žica noge |
| --- | --- |

(j)

korodiran jekleni kord ali žica noge

| 6.3 | Priprava: |
| --- | --- |

6.3

Priprava:

| 6.3.1 | po „brušenju“ in pred nanosom novega materiala je treba vsako pnevmatiko temeljito znova pregledati, vsaj od zunaj, da bi se prepričali, če je še primerna za obnovo; |
| --- | --- |

6.3.1

po „brušenju“ in pred nanosom novega materiala je treba vsako pnevmatiko temeljito znova pregledati, vsaj od zunaj, da bi se prepričali, če je še primerna za obnovo;

| 6.3.2 | celotna površina, na katero se nanese novi material, mora biti pripravljena brez pregrevanja. Obrušena površinska tekstura ne sme kazati globokih raztrganin ali prostih koncev materiala; |
| --- | --- |

6.3.2

celotna površina, na katero se nanese novi material, mora biti pripravljena brez pregrevanja. Obrušena površinska tekstura ne sme kazati globokih raztrganin ali prostih koncev materiala;

| 6.3.3 | kjer se uporabi predvulkanizirani material, morajo obrisi pripravljene površine ustrezati zahtevam proizvajalca materiala; |
| --- | --- |

6.3.3

kjer se uporabi predvulkanizirani material, morajo obrisi pripravljene površine ustrezati zahtevam proizvajalca materiala;

| 6.3.4 | poškodba, nastala med brušenjem, ne sme presegati določenih omejitev za popravilo, glej točko 5.3, in jo je treba popraviti; |
| --- | --- |

6.3.4

poškodba, nastala med brušenjem, ne sme presegati določenih omejitev za popravilo, glej točko 5.3, in jo je treba popraviti;

| 6.3.5 | poškodba zaradi brušenja na diagonalnih pnevmatikah ne sme segati dlje od zunanjega vložka karkase na površini temena pnevmatike. Predpostavlja se, da je prvi vložek, na katerega naletimo, vložek karkase, razen če ni mogoče z gotovostjo prepoznati blažilnika. Če obstaja blažilnik, je dovoljena lokalizirana poškodba; |
| --- | --- |

6.3.5

poškodba zaradi brušenja na diagonalnih pnevmatikah ne sme segati dlje od zunanjega vložka karkase na površini temena pnevmatike. Predpostavlja se, da je prvi vložek, na katerega naletimo, vložek karkase, razen če ni mogoče z gotovostjo prepoznati blažilnika. Če obstaja blažilnik, je dovoljena lokalizirana poškodba;

| 6.3.6 | dovoljena je tudi lokalizirana poškodba pasu radialnih pnevmatik zaradi brušenja. Pri večji poškodbi je dovoljeno zamenjati celoten pas ali njegove dele. Kjer je nameščen zaščitni blažilnik in ga je moč zanesljivo prepoznati, se ga lahko odstrani, če je poškodovan, in ga ni treba obnoviti; |
| --- | --- |

6.3.6

dovoljena je tudi lokalizirana poškodba pasu radialnih pnevmatik zaradi brušenja. Pri večji poškodbi je dovoljeno zamenjati celoten pas ali njegove dele. Kjer je nameščen zaščitni blažilnik in ga je moč zanesljivo prepoznati, se ga lahko odstrani, če je poškodovan, in ga ni treba obnoviti;

| 6.3.7 | izpostavljene jeklene dele je treba, takoj ko je mogoče, obdelati z ustreznim materialom, ki ga določi proizvajalec tega konkretnega materiala. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.7

izpostavljene jeklene dele je treba, takoj ko je mogoče, obdelati z ustreznim materialom, ki ga določi proizvajalec tega konkretnega materiala.

| 6.4 | Obnova: |
| --- | --- |

6.4

Obnova:

| 6.4.1 | izvajalec obnove mora zagotoviti, da bodisi proizvajalec ali dobavitelj materialov za popravila, vključno z zaplatami, prevzame odgovornost za naslednje:






  (a) | opredeli način uporabe in hrambe, če to zaprosi izvajalec obnove, v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bo material uporabil; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.4.1

izvajalec obnove mora zagotoviti, da bodisi proizvajalec ali dobavitelj materialov za popravila, vključno z zaplatami, prevzame odgovornost za naslednje:

(a)

opredeli način uporabe in hrambe, če to zaprosi izvajalec obnove, v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bo material uporabil;

| (b) | določi omejitve poškodb, za katere so materiali namenjeni, če to zaprosi izvajalec obnove, v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bo material uporabil; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

določi omejitve poškodb, za katere so materiali namenjeni, če to zaprosi izvajalec obnove, v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bo material uporabil;

| (c) | zagotovi, da so ojačene zaplate za pnevmatike primerne za predvideno uporabo, če se pravilno uporabljajo pri popravilih karkase; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

zagotovi, da so ojačene zaplate za pnevmatike primerne za predvideno uporabo, če se pravilno uporabljajo pri popravilih karkase;

| (d) | zagotovi, da zaplate vzdržijo v napolnjenih pnevmatikah, dvakratni največji tlak kot ga navede proizvajalec pnevmatik; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

zagotovi, da zaplate vzdržijo v napolnjenih pnevmatikah, dvakratni največji tlak kot ga navede proizvajalec pnevmatik;

| (e) | zagotovi primernost vseh drugih materialov za popravila za predvideno uporabo; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

zagotovi primernost vseh drugih materialov za popravila za predvideno uporabo;

| 6.4.2 | izvajalec obnove je odgovoren tudi za pravilno uporabo materialov za popravilo in mora zagotoviti, da je popravilo brezhibno in ne vsebuje nobenih napak, ki bi lahko vplivale na zadostno življenjsko dobo pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.2

izvajalec obnove je odgovoren tudi za pravilno uporabo materialov za popravilo in mora zagotoviti, da je popravilo brezhibno in ne vsebuje nobenih napak, ki bi lahko vplivale na zadostno življenjsko dobo pnevmatike;

| 6.4.3 | področje, ki obkroža mesto popravila bočnice ali ramena radialne pnevmatike z ojačanim materialom, se lahko nekoliko izboči, ko je pnevmatika nameščena in napolnjena na priporočeni delovni tlak. Uporabljajo naj se ojačeni materiali za popravila s fizikalnimi lastnostmi, ki omejujejo višino izbokline na največ 4 mm; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.3

področje, ki obkroža mesto popravila bočnice ali ramena radialne pnevmatike z ojačanim materialom, se lahko nekoliko izboči, ko je pnevmatika nameščena in napolnjena na priporočeni delovni tlak. Uporabljajo naj se ojačeni materiali za popravila s fizikalnimi lastnostmi, ki omejujejo višino izbokline na največ 4 mm;

| 6.4.4 | izvajalec obnove mora zagotoviti, da bodisi proizvajalec ali dobavitelj materialov za tekalno plast in bočnico izda specifikacije, ki veljajo za pogoje hrambe in uporabe materiala, in tako zagotovi kakovost materialov. Če izvajalec obnove tako zaprosi, morajo biti te informacije v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bodo materiali uporabili; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.4

izvajalec obnove mora zagotoviti, da bodisi proizvajalec ali dobavitelj materialov za tekalno plast in bočnico izda specifikacije, ki veljajo za pogoje hrambe in uporabe materiala, in tako zagotovi kakovost materialov. Če izvajalec obnove tako zaprosi, morajo biti te informacije v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bodo materiali uporabili;

| 6.4.5 | izvajalec obnove mora tudi zagotoviti, da je material za popravila ali njegova zmes dokumentirana v potrdilu proizvajalca ali dobavitelja. Zmes materiala mora biti primerna za predvideno uporabo pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.5

izvajalec obnove mora tudi zagotoviti, da je material za popravila ali njegova zmes dokumentirana v potrdilu proizvajalca ali dobavitelja. Zmes materiala mora biti primerna za predvideno uporabo pnevmatike;

| 6.4.6 | obdelana pnevmatika mora biti čimprej po zaključenem popravilu in nanosu materiala vulkanizirana, najkasneje v skladu s specifikacijami proizvajalca materiala; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.6

obdelana pnevmatika mora biti čimprej po zaključenem popravilu in nanosu materiala vulkanizirana, najkasneje v skladu s specifikacijami proizvajalca materiala;

| 6.4.7 | pnevmatiko je treba vulkanizirati toliko časa pri ustrezni temperaturi in tlaku, ki sta predpisana za uporabljene materiale in opremo za obdelavo. Mere kalupa morajo ustrezati debelini novega materiala in velikosti obrušene pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.7

pnevmatiko je treba vulkanizirati toliko časa pri ustrezni temperaturi in tlaku, ki sta predpisana za uporabljene materiale in opremo za obdelavo. Mere kalupa morajo ustrezati debelini novega materiala in velikosti obrušene pnevmatike;

| 6.4.8 | debelina izvornega materiala po brušenju in povprečna debelina novega materiala pod tekalno plastjo mora biti po obnovi takšna kot določata točki 6.4.8.1 in 6.4.8.2; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.8

debelina izvornega materiala po brušenju in povprečna debelina novega materiala pod tekalno plastjo mora biti po obnovi takšna kot določata točki 6.4.8.1 in 6.4.8.2;

| 6.4.8.1 | za radialne pnevmatike (mm):
  3 ≤ (A+B) ≤ 13 (najmanj 3,0 mm; največ 13,0 mm)
  A ≥ 2 (najmanj 2,0 mm)
  B ≥ 0 (najmanj 0,0 mm)










  P.D. | = | Globina profila |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| X | = | Ločnica obrušenja |
| A | = | Povprečna debelina novega materiala pod profilom |
| B | = | Najmanjša debelina izvornega materiala nad pasom po brušenju |

6.4.8.1

za radialne pnevmatike (mm):

3 ≤ (A+B) ≤ 13 (najmanj 3,0 mm; največ 13,0 mm)

A ≥ 2 (najmanj 2,0 mm)

B ≥ 0 (najmanj 0,0 mm)

Image

P.D.

=

Globina profila

X

=

Ločnica obrušenja

A

=

Povprečna debelina novega materiala pod profilom

B

=

Najmanjša debelina izvornega materiala nad pasom po brušenju

| 6.4.8.2 | za diagonalne pnevmatike:
  debelina izvornega materiala nad blažilnikom mora biti ≥ 0,80 mm;
  povprečna debelina novega materiala nad ločnico obrušenega ogrodja pnevmatike mora biti ≥ 2,00 mm;
  skupna debelina izvornega in novega materiala pod dnom kanalov v tekalni plasti mora biti ≥ 3,00 mm in ≤ 13,00 mm; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.8.2

za diagonalne pnevmatike:

debelina izvornega materiala nad blažilnikom mora biti ≥ 0,80 mm;

povprečna debelina novega materiala nad ločnico obrušenega ogrodja pnevmatike mora biti ≥ 2,00 mm;

skupna debelina izvornega in novega materiala pod dnom kanalov v tekalni plasti mora biti ≥ 3,00 mm in ≤ 13,00 mm;

| 6.4.9 | opis uporabe obnovljene pnevmatike ne sme vsebovati niti simbola za večjo hitrost niti višjega indeksa nosilnosti kot so pri originalni pnevmatiki za prvo življenjsko dobo, razen če je bila proizvajalcu podeljena homologacija za originalno pnevmatiko (za prvo življenjsko dobo) za to isto karkaso, ki se uporabi v posodobljenem opisu uporabe.
  Informacija, da je bila originalna karkasa na ta način posodobljena, mora biti vsakemu obratu za obnovo pnevmatik prosto dostopna s strani organa za homologacije, ki jo sporoči tudi drugim pogodbenim strankam Sporazuma iz leta 1958 (glej člen 5 Sporazuma ZN/ECE iz leta 1958 o sprejetju enotnih tehničnih predpisov za cestna vozila, opremo in dele, ki se lahko vgradijo v cestna vozila in/ali uporabijo na njih, in o pogojih za vzajemno priznanje homologacij, podeljenih na podlagi teh predpisov – dokument št. E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2).
  Za posredovanje te informacije se uporabi standardni obrazec iz Priloge 9 k Pravilniku R 54; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.9

opis uporabe obnovljene pnevmatike ne sme vsebovati niti simbola za večjo hitrost niti višjega indeksa nosilnosti kot so pri originalni pnevmatiki za prvo življenjsko dobo, razen če je bila proizvajalcu podeljena homologacija za originalno pnevmatiko (za prvo življenjsko dobo) za to isto karkaso, ki se uporabi v posodobljenem opisu uporabe.

Informacija, da je bila originalna karkasa na ta način posodobljena, mora biti vsakemu obratu za obnovo pnevmatik prosto dostopna s strani organa za homologacije, ki jo sporoči tudi drugim pogodbenim strankam Sporazuma iz leta 1958 (glej člen 5 Sporazuma ZN/ECE iz leta 1958 o sprejetju enotnih tehničnih predpisov za cestna vozila, opremo in dele, ki se lahko vgradijo v cestna vozila in/ali uporabijo na njih, in o pogojih za vzajemno priznanje homologacij, podeljenih na podlagi teh predpisov – dokument št. E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2).

Za posredovanje te informacije se uporabi standardni obrazec iz Priloge 9 k Pravilniku R 54;

| 6.4.10 | posodobitev opisa uporabe, kot je navedena v točki 6.4.9, je dovoljena le za prvo obnovo originalne pnevmatike.
  Pnevmatike, ki so že bile obnovljene, ne smejo imeti vtisnjenega simbola za hitrost ali indeksa nosilnosti nad tistim, ki je naveden na uporabljenem ogrodju pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.10

posodobitev opisa uporabe, kot je navedena v točki 6.4.9, je dovoljena le za prvo obnovo originalne pnevmatike.

Pnevmatike, ki so že bile obnovljene, ne smejo imeti vtisnjenega simbola za hitrost ali indeksa nosilnosti nad tistim, ki je naveden na uporabljenem ogrodju pnevmatike;

| 6.5 | Pregled: |
| --- | --- |

6.5

Pregled:

| 6.5.1 | po vulkaniziranju, vendar dokler pnevmatika zadrži določeno raven toplote, je treba vsako obnovljeno pnevmatiko pregledati zaradi zagotovitve, da ni nobenih očitnih napak. Med obnovo ali po njem je treba pnevmatiko napolniti najmanj do 1,5 bara in jo pregledati. Če se odkrije kakšno očitno napako v profilu pnevmatike (npr. mehur, usad, itd.), je treba pnevmatiko posebej pregledati, da se določi vzrok za to napako; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.1

po vulkaniziranju, vendar dokler pnevmatika zadrži določeno raven toplote, je treba vsako obnovljeno pnevmatiko pregledati zaradi zagotovitve, da ni nobenih očitnih napak. Med obnovo ali po njem je treba pnevmatiko napolniti najmanj do 1,5 bara in jo pregledati. Če se odkrije kakšno očitno napako v profilu pnevmatike (npr. mehur, usad, itd.), je treba pnevmatiko posebej pregledati, da se določi vzrok za to napako;

| 6.5.2 | pred ali med obnovo, ali pa po njem, je treba pnevmatiko najmanj enkrat pregledati glede celovitosti zgradbe z ustrezno metodo pregleda; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.2

pred ali med obnovo, ali pa po njem, je treba pnevmatiko najmanj enkrat pregledati glede celovitosti zgradbe z ustrezno metodo pregleda;

| 6.5.3 | za namene kontrole kakovosti je treba na določenem številu obnovljenih pnevmatik opraviti preskus s porušnimi ali neporušnimi metodami ali pregled. Število tako pregledanih pnevmatik in rezultate je treba zapisati; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.3

za namene kontrole kakovosti je treba na določenem številu obnovljenih pnevmatik opraviti preskus s porušnimi ali neporušnimi metodami ali pregled. Število tako pregledanih pnevmatik in rezultate je treba zapisati;

| 6.5.4 | po obnovi morajo biti mere obnovljene pnevmatike pri merjenju, kot ga določa Priloga 6 k temu pravilniku, skladne z merami, izračunanimi po postopkih iz točke 7 ali tistih, ki so navedeni v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku.
  Upoštevati je treba, da je največji zunanji premer obnovljene pnevmatike lahko največ do 1,5 % večji od največjega zunanjega premera nove, originalne pnevmatike, katerega dovoljuje Pravilnik R 54. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.4

po obnovi morajo biti mere obnovljene pnevmatike pri merjenju, kot ga določa Priloga 6 k temu pravilniku, skladne z merami, izračunanimi po postopkih iz točke 7 ali tistih, ki so navedeni v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku.

Upoštevati je treba, da je največji zunanji premer obnovljene pnevmatike lahko največ do 1,5 % večji od največjega zunanjega premera nove, originalne pnevmatike, katerega dovoljuje Pravilnik R 54.

| 6.6 | Preskus zmogljivosti: |
| --- | --- |

6.6

Preskus zmogljivosti:

| 6.6.1 | pnevmatike, ki so obnovljene v skladu s tem pravilnikom, morajo prestati preskus vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost, kot določa Priloga 7 k temu pravilniku; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.1

pnevmatike, ki so obnovljene v skladu s tem pravilnikom, morajo prestati preskus vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost, kot določa Priloga 7 k temu pravilniku;

| 6.6.2 | šteje se, da je obnovljena pnevmatika, pri kateri po preskusu vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost ne pride do ločevanja tekalne plasti, vložka, korda, trganja ali loma korda, uspešno prestala preskus; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.2

šteje se, da je obnovljena pnevmatika, pri kateri po preskusu vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost ne pride do ločevanja tekalne plasti, vložka, korda, trganja ali loma korda, uspešno prestala preskus;

| 6.6.3 | zunanji premer pnevmatike, izmerjen šest ur po preskusu vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost, ne smejo odstopati za več kot ± 3,5 odstotka od zunanjega premera, izmerjenega pred preskusom. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3

zunanji premer pnevmatike, izmerjen šest ur po preskusu vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost, ne smejo odstopati za več kot ± 3,5 odstotka od zunanjega premera, izmerjenega pred preskusom.

7.   MERE OBNOVLJENIH PNEVMATIK

| 7.1 | Pnevmatike, obnovljene po zahtevah tega pravilnika, morajo biti skladne s spodaj navedenimi merami: |
| --- | --- |

7.1

Pnevmatike, obnovljene po zahtevah tega pravilnika, morajo biti skladne s spodaj navedenimi merami:

| 7.1.1 | širina preseka: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.1

širina preseka:

| 7.1.1.1 | širina preseka se izračuna po naslednji enačbi:
  S = S1 + K (A – A1)
  pri čemer je:






  S: | dejanska širina preseka v mm, kot je izmerjena na preskusnem platišču; |
| --- | --- | --- |
| S1: | vrednost „konstrukcijske širine preseka“, ki se nanaša na merilno platišče, kot je navedeno v mednarodnem standardu za pnevmatike, ki jo navede izvajalec obnove za konkretno velikost pnevmatike; |
| A: | širina preskusnega platišča v milimetrih; |
| A 1: | širina merilnega platišča v milimetrih, kot je navedeno v mednarodnem standardu za pnevmatike, ki jo navede izvajalec obnove za konkretno velikost pnevmatike; |
| K: | je faktor z vrednostjo 0,4; |

7.1.1.1

širina preseka se izračuna po naslednji enačbi:

S = S1 + K (A – A1)

pri čemer je:

S:

dejanska širina preseka v mm, kot je izmerjena na preskusnem platišču;

S1:

vrednost „konstrukcijske širine preseka“, ki se nanaša na merilno platišče, kot je navedeno v mednarodnem standardu za pnevmatike, ki jo navede izvajalec obnove za konkretno velikost pnevmatike;

A:

širina preskusnega platišča v milimetrih;

A 1:

širina merilnega platišča v milimetrih, kot je navedeno v mednarodnem standardu za pnevmatike, ki jo navede izvajalec obnove za konkretno velikost pnevmatike;

K:

je faktor z vrednostjo 0,4;

| 7.1.2 | zunanji premer: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2

zunanji premer:

| 7.1.2.1 | teoretični zunanji premer obnovljene pnevmatike se izračuna po enačbi:
  D = d + 2H
  pri čemer je:






  D: | je teoretični zunanji premer v milimetrih; |
| --- | --- | --- |
| d: | je dogovorjeno število, ki ga določa točka 2.21.3, v milimetrih; |
| H: | je nazivna višina preseka v mm in je enaka Sn, pomnožena z 0,01 Ra |

7.1.2.1

teoretični zunanji premer obnovljene pnevmatike se izračuna po enačbi:

D = d + 2H

pri čemer je:

D:

je teoretični zunanji premer v milimetrih;

d:

je dogovorjeno število, ki ga določa točka 2.21.3, v milimetrih;

H:

je nazivna višina preseka v mm in je enaka Sn, pomnožena z 0,01 Ra

pri čemer je:

| Sn: | nazivna širina preseka v milimetrih; |
| --- | --- |
| Ra: | nazivno presečno razmerje; |

Sn:

nazivna širina preseka v milimetrih;

Ra:

nazivno presečno razmerje;

Vsi zgoraj navedeni simboli so takšni, kot so navedeni v označbi velikosti pnevmatike na bočnici pnevmatike, v skladu z zahtevami iz točke 3.2.2 in kot je določeno v točki 2.21;

| 7.1.2.2 | pri Pravilniku ECE R št. 54, pa mora biti zunanji premer takšen, kot je naveden v navedenih tabelah; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2.2

pri Pravilniku ECE R št. 54, pa mora biti zunanji premer takšen, kot je naveden v navedenih tabelah;

| 7.1.3 | način merjenja obnovljenih pnevmatik: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.3

način merjenja obnovljenih pnevmatik:

| 7.1.3.1 | mere obnovljenih pnevmatik morajo biti ugotovljene v skladu s postopki, navedenimi v Prilogi 6 k temu pravilniku; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.3.1

mere obnovljenih pnevmatik morajo biti ugotovljene v skladu s postopki, navedenimi v Prilogi 6 k temu pravilniku;

| 7.1.4 | zahteve za širino preseka: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4

zahteve za širino preseka:

| 7.1.4.1 | dejanska celotna širina je lahko manjša od širine ali širin preseka, določenih v točki 7.1; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.1

dejanska celotna širina je lahko manjša od širine ali širin preseka, določenih v točki 7.1;

| 7.1.4.2 | dejanska celotna širina je lahko večja od vrednosti, določenih v točki 7.1 za: | 4 odstotke pri radialnih pnevmatikah, in |
| --- | --- | --- |

7.1.4.2

dejanska celotna širina je lahko večja od vrednosti, določenih v točki 7.1 za:

4 odstotke pri radialnih pnevmatikah, in

| | 8 odstotkov pri diagonalnih pnevmatikah in pnevmatikah s poševnim vložkom. |
| --- | --- |

8 odstotkov pri diagonalnih pnevmatikah in pnevmatikah s poševnim vložkom.

Pri pnevmatikah širine preseka nad 305 mm, namenjenih za namestitev v paru, pa se nazivne vrednosti ne smejo preseči za več kot:

| | 2 odstotka pri radialnih pnevmatikah, in |
| --- | --- |

2 odstotka pri radialnih pnevmatikah, in

| | 4 odstotke pri diagonalnih pnevmatikah in prepasanih diagonalnih pnevmatikah: |
| --- | --- |

4 odstotke pri diagonalnih pnevmatikah in prepasanih diagonalnih pnevmatikah:

| 7.1.5 | zahteve za zunanji premer: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5

zahteve za zunanji premer:

| 7.1.5.1 | dejanski zunanji premer obnovljene pnevmatike ne sme biti izven vrednosti Dmin in Dmax, izračunanih po enačbah:
  Dmin = d + (2H x a)
  Dmax = 1,015 x [d + (2H x b)]
  pri čemer je: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1

dejanski zunanji premer obnovljene pnevmatike ne sme biti izven vrednosti Dmin in Dmax, izračunanih po enačbah:

Dmin = d + (2H x a)

Dmax = 1,015 x [d + (2H x b)]

pri čemer je:

| 7.1.5.1.1 | za velikosti, ki niso navedene v tabelah v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku, ustrezata „H“ in „d“, določbam iz točke 7.1.2.1; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.1

za velikosti, ki niso navedene v tabelah v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku, ustrezata „H“ in „d“, določbam iz točke 7.1.2.1;

| 7.1.5.1.2 | za velikosti, navedene v točki 7.1.2.2 zgoraj:
  H = 0,5 (D – d)
  kjer je „D“ zunanji premer in „d“ nazivni premer platišča, naveden v zgoraj navedenih tabelah za konkretno velikost; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.2

za velikosti, navedene v točki 7.1.2.2 zgoraj:

H = 0,5 (D – d)

kjer je „D“ zunanji premer in „d“ nazivni premer platišča, naveden v zgoraj navedenih tabelah za konkretno velikost;

| 7.1.5.1.3 | koeficient „a“ = 0,97; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.3

koeficient „a“ = 0,97;

| 7.1.5.1.4 | koeficient „b“ je: | Radialne pnevmatike | Diagonalne pnevmatike, in prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| normalne pnevmatike | 1,04 | 1,07 |
| za pnevmatike za posebno uporabo | 1,06 | 1,09 |

7.1.5.1.4

koeficient „b“ je:

Radialne pnevmatike

Diagonalne pnevmatike, in prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike

normalne pnevmatike

1,04

1,07

za pnevmatike za posebno uporabo

1,06

1,09

| 7.1.5.2 | za zimske pnevmatike, je lahko največji zunanji premer (Dmax), izračunan v točki 7.1.4.1 večji za največ 1 odstotek. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.2

za zimske pnevmatike, je lahko največji zunanji premer (Dmax), izračunan v točki 7.1.4.1 večji za največ 1 odstotek.

8.   SPREMEMBE HOMOLOGACIJE

| 8.1 | Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik mora vsako spremembo katere koli informacije, ki jih je obrat navedel v vlogi za homologacijo (glej točko 4), sporočiti homologacijskemu organu, ki je homologiral obrat za obnovo pnevmatik. Ta organ lahko potem: |
| --- | --- |

8.1

Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik mora vsako spremembo katere koli informacije, ki jih je obrat navedel v vlogi za homologacijo (glej točko 4), sporočiti homologacijskemu organu, ki je homologiral obrat za obnovo pnevmatik. Ta organ lahko potem:

| 8.1.1 | upošteva, da opravljene spremembe po vsej verjetnosti ne bodo imele opaznega neugodnega učinka in da obrat za obnovo pnevmatik v vsakem primeru izpolnjuje vse zahteve; ali |
| --- | --- |

8.1.1

upošteva, da opravljene spremembe po vsej verjetnosti ne bodo imele opaznega neugodnega učinka in da obrat za obnovo pnevmatik v vsakem primeru izpolnjuje vse zahteve; ali

| 8.1.2 | zahteva dopolnilno preiskavo homologacije. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.2

zahteva dopolnilno preiskavo homologacije.

| 8.2 | Potrditev ali zavrnitev homologacije, z navedbo sprememb, je treba sporočiti po postopku, določenem v točki 5.7 strankam Sporazuma, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik. |
| --- | --- |

8.2

Potrditev ali zavrnitev homologacije, z navedbo sprememb, je treba sporočiti po postopku, določenem v točki 5.7 strankam Sporazuma, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik.

9.   SKLADNOST PROIZVODNJE

Zagotovljena mora biti skladnost proizvodnih postopkov s postopki, navedenimi v Sporazumu, Dodatek 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev. 2), ob naslednjih zahtevah:

| 9.1 | Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik, ki je homologiran po tem pravilniku, mora biti skladen z zahtevami iz točke 6. |
| --- | --- |

9.1

Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik, ki je homologiran po tem pravilniku, mora biti skladen z zahtevami iz točke 6.

| 9.2 | Imetnik homologacije mora zagotoviti, da se v vsakem letu proizvodnje in preko vsega leta pregleda in preskusi najmanj naslednje število pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo celotni obseg proizvodnje, kot predpisuje ta pravilnik: |
| --- | --- |

9.2

Imetnik homologacije mora zagotoviti, da se v vsakem letu proizvodnje in preko vsega leta pregleda in preskusi najmanj naslednje število pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo celotni obseg proizvodnje, kot predpisuje ta pravilnik:

| 9.2.1 | 0,01 odstotka skupne letne proizvodnje, vendar v nobenem primeru manj kot 2 in ne več kot 10. |
| --- | --- |

9.2.1

0,01 odstotka skupne letne proizvodnje, vendar v nobenem primeru manj kot 2 in ne več kot 10.

| 9.3 | Če je preverjanje iz točke 9.2 opravil sam homologacijski organ ali so bile opravljene pod njegovim nadzorom, se lahko rezultati uporabijo kot del ali namesto rezultatov preverjanj, ki jih predpisuje točka 9.4. |
| --- | --- |

9.3

Če je preverjanje iz točke 9.2 opravil sam homologacijski organ ali so bile opravljene pod njegovim nadzorom, se lahko rezultati uporabijo kot del ali namesto rezultatov preverjanj, ki jih predpisuje točka 9.4.

| 9.4 | Organ, ki je obratu za obnovo pnevmatik podelil homologacijo, lahko kadar koli preveri metode nadzora skladnosti, ki se uporabljajo v vsaki proizvodni enoti. Za vsako proizvodno enoto mora homologacijski organ vzeti naključne vzorce med vsakim letom proizvodnje in pregledati ter preskusiti vsaj naslednje število pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo celotni obseg proizvodnje, kot predpisuje ta pravilnik: |
| --- | --- |

9.4

Organ, ki je obratu za obnovo pnevmatik podelil homologacijo, lahko kadar koli preveri metode nadzora skladnosti, ki se uporabljajo v vsaki proizvodni enoti. Za vsako proizvodno enoto mora homologacijski organ vzeti naključne vzorce med vsakim letom proizvodnje in pregledati ter preskusiti vsaj naslednje število pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo celotni obseg proizvodnje, kot predpisuje ta pravilnik:

| 9.4.1 | 0,01 odstotka skupne letne proizvodnje, vendar v nobenem primeru manj kot 2 in ne več kot 10. |
| --- | --- |

9.4.1

0,01 odstotka skupne letne proizvodnje, vendar v nobenem primeru manj kot 2 in ne več kot 10.

| 9.5 | Preskusi in pregledi iz točke 9.4 lahko nadomestijo tiste, ki jih zahteva točka 9.2. |
| --- | --- |

9.5

Preskusi in pregledi iz točke 9.4 lahko nadomestijo tiste, ki jih zahteva točka 9.2.

10.   KAZNI ZA NESKLADNOST PROIZVODNJE

| 10.1 | Homologacija, podeljena obratu za obnovo pnevmatik po tem pravilniku, se lahko prekliče, če niso izpolnjene zahteve iz točke 9, ali če obrat za obnovo pnevmatik ali obnovljene pnevmatike, proizvedene v tem obratu, ne izpolnjujejo zahtev, ki jih predpisuje točka 9. |
| --- | --- |

10.1

Homologacija, podeljena obratu za obnovo pnevmatik po tem pravilniku, se lahko prekliče, če niso izpolnjene zahteve iz točke 9, ali če obrat za obnovo pnevmatik ali obnovljene pnevmatike, proizvedene v tem obratu, ne izpolnjujejo zahtev, ki jih predpisuje točka 9.

| 10.2 | Če stranka Sporazuma, ki uporablja ta pravilnik, prekliče homologacijo, ki jo je pred tem podelila, mora takoj obvestiti druge stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, s sporočilom na obrazcu, skladnem z vzorcem iz Priloge 1 k temu pravilniku. |
| --- | --- |

10.2

Če stranka Sporazuma, ki uporablja ta pravilnik, prekliče homologacijo, ki jo je pred tem podelila, mora takoj obvestiti druge stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, s sporočilom na obrazcu, skladnem z vzorcem iz Priloge 1 k temu pravilniku.

11.   DOKONČNA PREKINITEV PROIZVODNJE

Organ, ki je dodelil homologacijo obratu za obnovo pnevmatik, mora biti obveščen, če poslovanje in proizvodnja homologiranih obnovljenih pnevmatik v okviru tega pravilnika prenehata. Ob prejemu te informacije mora organ o tem obvestiti druge stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, s sporočilom na obrazcu, skladnem z vzorcem iz Priloge 1 k temu pravilniku.

12.   IMENA IN NASLOVI TEHNIČNIH SLUŽB, PRISTOJNIH ZA HOMOLOGACIJSKE PRESKUSE, PRESKUSNIH LABORATORIJEV IN ADMINISTRATIVNIH ORGANOV

| 12.1 | Stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, morajo sporočiti Sekretariatu Združenih narodov imena in naslove tehničnih služb, ki so pristojne za izvedbo preskusov za homologiranje in, če je potrebno, pooblaščenih preskusnih laboratorijev in administrativnih organov, ki podeljujejo homologacije in katerim je treba poslati sporočila o podelitvi, zavrnitvi ali preklicu homologacije ali dokončne prekinitve proizvodnje, izdane v drugih državah. |
| --- | --- |

12.1

Stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, morajo sporočiti Sekretariatu Združenih narodov imena in naslove tehničnih služb, ki so pristojne za izvedbo preskusov za homologiranje in, če je potrebno, pooblaščenih preskusnih laboratorijev in administrativnih organov, ki podeljujejo homologacije in katerim je treba poslati sporočila o podelitvi, zavrnitvi ali preklicu homologacije ali dokončne prekinitve proizvodnje, izdane v drugih državah.

| 12.2 | Stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, lahko uporabljajo laboratorije proizvajalcev pnevmatik ali obratov za obnovo pnevmatik in lahko določijo kot odobrene preskusne laboratorije tiste laboratorije, ki so na ozemlju konkretne stranke ali na ozemlju druge stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, s pogojem, da je ta postopek predhodno sprejet s strani pristojnega administrativnega organa slednje. |
| --- | --- |

12.2

Stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, lahko uporabljajo laboratorije proizvajalcev pnevmatik ali obratov za obnovo pnevmatik in lahko določijo kot odobrene preskusne laboratorije tiste laboratorije, ki so na ozemlju konkretne stranke ali na ozemlju druge stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, s pogojem, da je ta postopek predhodno sprejet s strani pristojnega administrativnega organa slednje.

| 12.3 | Kjer stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958 uporabljajo točko 12.2, so na svojo željo lahko prisotne pri preskusih. |
| --- | --- |

12.3

Kjer stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958 uporabljajo točko 12.2, so na svojo željo lahko prisotne pri preskusih.

PRILOGA 1

SPOROČILO

(največji format: A 4 (210 x 297 mm))

Image

PRILOGA 2

PRIMER HOMOLOGACIJSKE OZNAKE

Image

Zgornja homologacijska oznaka, nameščena na obnovljeno pnevmatiko, pomeni, da je bil ta obrat za obnovo pnevmatik homologiran na Nizozemskem (E4) pod številko homologacije 109 R 002439, ki izpolnjuje zahteve tega pravilnika v izvirniku (00).

Homologacijska številka mora biti nameščena tik ob krogu in nad ali pod črko „E“, ali levo ali desno od te črke. Števke v homologacijski številki morajo biti na isti strani kot simbol „E“ in obrnjene v isto smer. Uporaba rimskih številk v homologacijski številki ni priporočljiva, da ne pride do zamenjave z drugimi simboli.

PRILOGA 3

PRIMER RAZPOREDITVE OZNAK OBNOVLJENIH PNEVMATIK

Image

| | NAJMANJŠA VIŠINA OZNAK (mm) |
| --- | --- |
| | Pnevmatike za premer platišča
  ≤ oznaka 20 ali
  ≤ 508 mm
  ali širino preseka
  ≤ 235 mm ali ≤ 9" | Pnevmatike za premer platišča
  > oznaka 20 ali
  > 508 mm
  ali širino preseka
  > 235 mm ali > 9" |
| b | 6 | 9 |
| c | 4 |
| d | 6 |

NAJMANJŠA VIŠINA OZNAK (mm)

Pnevmatike za premer platišča

≤ oznaka 20 ali

≤ 508 mm

ali širino preseka

≤ 235 mm ali ≤ 9"

Pnevmatike za premer platišča

> oznaka 20 ali

> 508 mm

ali širino preseka

> 235 mm ali > 9"

b

6

9

c

4

d

6

Zgornji primer določa obnovljeno pnevmatiko:

z nazivno širino preseka 295;

z nazivnim presečnim razmerjem 80;

z radialno zgradbo (R);

z nazivnim premerom platišča 572 mm z oznako 22,5;

z nosilnostjo 3 550 kg (posamična vgradnja) in 3 150 kg (dvojna vgradnja), ki ustreza indeksom nosilnosti 152 in 148, navedenim v Prilogi 4 k temu pravilniku;

s simbolom za nazivno hitrost K (referenčna hitrost 110 km/h);

s sposobnostjo uporabe v posebnem primeru, simbol za hitrost L (referenčna hitrost 120 km/h); z nosilnostjo 3 350 kg (posamična vgradnja) in 3 000 kg (dvojna vgradnja), ki ustreza indeksom nosilnosti 150 in 146, navedenim v Prilogi 4 k temu pravilniku;

za uporabo brez notranje zračnice („TUBELESS“) in tipom zimske pnevmatike (M+S);

obnovljena v tednih 25, 26, 27 ali 28 leta 2003;

ki jo je za preskuse vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost treba napolniti na 620 kPa, katerih simbol PSI je 90.

Namestitev in vrstni red oznak, ki tvorijo oznako pnevmatike, mora biti naslednji:

| (a) | oznaka velikosti, ki zajema nazivno širino preseka, nazivno presečno razmerje, simbol vrste zgradbe (kjer je primerno) in nazivni premer platišča, morajo biti skupaj, kot prikazuje gornji primer, t.j.: 295/80 R 22,5; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

oznaka velikosti, ki zajema nazivno širino preseka, nazivno presečno razmerje, simbol vrste zgradbe (kjer je primerno) in nazivni premer platišča, morajo biti skupaj, kot prikazuje gornji primer, t.j.: 295/80 R 22,5;

| (b) | opis uporabe, ki obsega indeks nosilnosti in simbol za hitrost, mora biti skupaj blizu oznake velikosti. Lahko je pred oznako velikosti ali za njo, ali pa je postavljen nad ali pod njo; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

opis uporabe, ki obsega indeks nosilnosti in simbol za hitrost, mora biti skupaj blizu oznake velikosti. Lahko je pred oznako velikosti ali za njo, ali pa je postavljen nad ali pod njo;

| (c) | simbola„TUBELESS“ in „M+S“ sta lahko oddaljena od oznake velikosti; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

simbola„TUBELESS“ in „M+S“ sta lahko oddaljena od oznake velikosti;

| (d) | beseda „RETREAD“ je lahko oddaljena od oznake velikosti; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

beseda „RETREAD“ je lahko oddaljena od oznake velikosti;

| (e) | če se uporabi odstavek 3.2.5 tega pravilnika, mora biti naveden dodaten opis uporabe (poseben primer), ki obsega indekse nosilnosti in simbol za hitrost, znotraj kroga blizu opisa nazivne uporabe, ki se nahaja na bočnici. |
| --- | --- |

(e)

če se uporabi odstavek 3.2.5 tega pravilnika, mora biti naveden dodaten opis uporabe (poseben primer), ki obsega indekse nosilnosti in simbol za hitrost, znotraj kroga blizu opisa nazivne uporabe, ki se nahaja na bočnici.

PRILOGA 4

SEZNAM INDEKSOV NOSILNOSTI IN USTREZAJOČE NOSILNOSTI

| Indeks nosilnosti (LI) in nosilnost – kg |
| --- |
| LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg |
| 0 | 45 | 40 | 140 | 80 | 450 | 120 | 1 400 | 160 | 4 500 | 200 | 14 000 | 240 | 45 000 |
| 1 | 46,2 | 41 | 145 | 81 | 462 | 121 | 1 450 | 161 | 4 625 | 201 | 14 500 | 241 | 46 250 |
| 2 | 47,5 | 42 | 150 | 82 | 475 | 122 | 1 500 | 162 | 4 750 | 202 | 15 000 | 242 | 47 500 |
| 3 | 48,7 | 43 | 155 | 83 | 487 | 123 | 1 550 | 163 | 4 875 | 203 | 15 500 | 243 | 48 750 |
| 4 | 50 | 44 | 160 | 84 | 500 | 124 | 1 600 | 164 | 5 000 | 204 | 16 000 | 244 | 50 000 |
| 5 | 51,5 | 45 | 165 | 85 | 515 | 125 | 1 650 | 165 | 5 150 | 205 | 16 500 | 245 | 51 500 |
| 6 | 53 | 46 | 170 | 86 | 530 | 126 | 1 700 | 166 | 5 300 | 206 | 17 000 | 246 | 53 000 |
| 7 | 54,5 | 47 | 175 | 87 | 545 | 127 | 1 750 | 167 | 5 450 | 207 | 17 500 | 247 | 54 500 |
| 8 | 56 | 48 | 180 | 88 | 560 | 128 | 1 800 | 168 | 5 600 | 208 | 18 000 | 248 | 56 000 |
| 9 | 58 | 49 | 185 | 89 | 580 | 129 | 1 850 | 169 | 5 800 | 209 | 18 500 | 249 | 58 000 |
| 10 | 60 | 50 | 190 | 90 | 600 | 130 | 1 900 | 170 | 6 000 | 210 | 19 000 | 250 | 60 000 |
| 11 | 61,5 | 51 | 195 | 91 | 615 | 131 | 1 950 | 171 | 6 150 | 211 | 19 500 | 251 | 61 500 |
| 12 | 63 | 52 | 200 | 92 | 630 | 132 | 2 000 | 172 | 6 300 | 212 | 20 000 | 252 | 63 000 |
| 13 | 65 | 53 | 206 | 93 | 650 | 133 | 2 060 | 173 | 6 500 | 213 | 20 600 | 253 | 65 000 |
| 14 | 67 | 54 | 212 | 94 | 670 | 134 | 2 120 | 174 | 6 700 | 214 | 21 200 | 254 | 67 000 |
| 15 | 69 | 55 | 218 | 95 | 690 | 135 | 2 180 | 175 | 6 900 | 215 | 21 800 | 255 | 69 000 |
| 16 | 71 | 56 | 224 | 96 | 710 | 136 | 2 240 | 176 | 7 100 | 216 | 22 400 | 256 | 71 000 |
| 17 | 73 | 57 | 230 | 97 | 730 | 137 | 2 300 | 177 | 7 300 | 217 | 23 000 | 257 | 73 000 |
| 18 | 75 | 58 | 236 | 98 | 750 | 138 | 2 360 | 178 | 7 500 | 218 | 23 600 | 258 | 75 000 |
| 19 | 77,5 | 59 | 243 | 99 | 775 | 139 | 2 430 | 179 | 7 750 | 219 | 24 300 | 259 | 77 500 |
| 20 | 80 | 60 | 250 | 100 | 800 | 140 | 2 500 | 180 | 8 000 | 220 | 25 000 | 260 | 80 000 |
| 21 | 82,5 | 61 | 257 | 101 | 825 | 141 | 2 575 | 181 | 8 250 | 221 | 25 750 | 261 | 82 500 |
| 22 | 85 | 62 | 265 | 102 | 850 | 142 | 2 650 | 182 | 8 500 | 222 | 26 500 | 262 | 85 000 |
| 23 | 87,5 | 63 | 272 | 103 | 875 | 143 | 2 725 | 183 | 8 750 | 223 | 27 250 | 263 | 87 500 |
| 24 | 90 | 64 | 280 | 104 | 900 | 144 | 2 800 | 184 | 9 000 | 224 | 28 000 | 264 | 90 000 |
| 25 | 92,5 | 65 | 290 | 105 | 925 | 145 | 2 900 | 185 | 9 250 | 225 | 29 000 | 265 | 92 500 |
| 26 | 95 | 66 | 300 | 106 | 950 | 146 | 3 000 | 186 | 9 500 | 226 | 30 000 | 266 | 95 000 |
| 27 | 97,5 | 67 | 307 | 107 | 975 | 147 | 3 075 | 187 | 9 750 | 227 | 30 750 | 267 | 97 500 |
| 28 | 100 | 68 | 315 | 108 | 1 000 | 148 | 3 150 | 188 | 10 000 | 228 | 31 500 | 268 | 100 000 |
| 29 | 103 | 69 | 325 | 109 | 1 030 | 149 | 3 250 | 189 | 10 300 | 229 | 32 500 | 269 | 103 000 |
| 30 | 106 | 70 | 335 | 110 | 1 060 | 150 | 3 350 | 190 | 10 600 | 230 | 33 500 | 270 | 106 000 |
| 31 | 109 | 71 | 345 | 111 | 1 090 | 151 | 3 450 | 191 | 10 900 | 231 | 34 500 | 271 | 109 000 |
| 32 | 112 | 72 | 355 | 112 | 1 120 | 152 | 3 550 | 192 | 11 200 | 232 | 35 500 | 272 | 112 000 |
| 33 | 115 | 73 | 365 | 113 | 1 150 | 153 | 3 650 | 193 | 11 500 | 233 | 36 500 | 273 | 115 000 |
| 34 | 118 | 74 | 375 | 114 | 1 180 | 154 | 3 750 | 194 | 11 800 | 234 | 37 500 | 274 | 118 000 |
| 35 | 121 | 75 | 387 | 115 | 1 215 | 155 | 3 875 | 195 | 12 150 | 235 | 38 750 | 275 | 121 500 |
| 36 | 125 | 76 | 400 | 116 | 1 250 | 156 | 4 000 | 196 | 12 500 | 236 | 40 000 | 276 | 125 000 |
| 37 | 128 | 77 | 412 | 117 | 1 285 | 157 | 4 125 | 197 | 12 850 | 237 | 41 250 | 277 | 128 500 |
| 38 | 132 | 78 | 425 | 118 | 1 320 | 158 | 4 250 | 198 | 13 200 | 238 | 42 500 | 278 | 132 000 |
| 39 | 136 | 79 | 437 | 119 | 1 360 | 159 | 4 375 | 199 | 13 600 | 239 | 43 750 | 279 | 136 000 |

Indeks nosilnosti (LI) in nosilnost – kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

0

45

40

140

80

450

120

1 400

160

4 500

200

14 000

240

45 000

1

46,2

41

145

81

462

121

1 450

161

4 625

201

14 500

241

46 250

2

47,5

42

150

82

475

122

1 500

162

4 750

202

15 000

242

47 500

3

48,7

43

155

83

487

123

1 550

163

4 875

203

15 500

243

48 750

4

50

44

160

84

500

124

1 600

164

5 000

204

16 000

244

50 000

5

51,5

45

165

85

515

125

1 650

165

5 150

205

16 500

245

51 500

6

53

46

170

86

530

126

1 700

166

5 300

206

17 000

246

53 000

7

54,5

47

175

87

545

127

1 750

167

5 450

207

17 500

247

54 500

8

56

48

180

88

560

128

1 800

168

5 600

208

18 000

248

56 000

9

58

49

185

89

580

129

1 850

169

5 800

209

18 500

249

58 000

10

60

50

190

90

600

130

1 900

170

6 000

210

19 000

250

60 000

11

61,5

51

195

91

615

131

1 950

171

6 150

211

19 500

251

61 500

12

63

52

200

92

630

132

2 000

172

6 300

212

20 000

252

63 000

13

65

53

206

93

650

133

2 060

173

6 500

213

20 600

253

65 000

14

67

54

212

94

670

134

2 120

174

6 700

214

21 200

254

67 000

15

69

55

218

95

690

135

2 180

175

6 900

215

21 800

255

69 000

16

71

56

224

96

710

136

2 240

176

7 100

216

22 400

256

71 000

17

73

57

230

97

730

137

2 300

177

7 300

217

23 000

257

73 000

18

75

58

236

98

750

138

2 360

178

7 500

218

23 600

258

75 000

19

77,5

59

243

99

775

139

2 430

179

7 750

219

24 300

259

77 500

20

80

60

250

100

800

140

2 500

180

8 000

220

25 000

260

80 000

21

82,5

61

257

101

825

141

2 575

181

8 250

221

25 750

261

82 500

22

85

62

265

102

850

142

2 650

182

8 500

222

26 500

262

85 000

23

87,5

63

272

103

875

143

2 725

183

8 750

223

27 250

263

87 500

24

90

64

280

104

900

144

2 800

184

9 000

224

28 000

264

90 000

25

92,5

65

290

105

925

145

2 900

185

9 250

225

29 000

265

92 500

26

95

66

300

106

950

146

3 000

186

9 500

226

30 000

266

95 000

27

97,5

67

307

107

975

147

3 075

187

9 750

227

30 750

267

97 500

28

100

68

315

108

1 000

148

3 150

188

10 000

228

31 500

268

100 000

29

103

69

325

109

1 030

149

3 250

189

10 300

229

32 500

269

103 000

30

106

70

335

110

1 060

150

3 350

190

10 600

230

33 500

270

106 000

31

109

71

345

111

1 090

151

3 450

191

10 900

231

34 500

271

109 000

32

112

72

355

112

1 120

152

3 550

192

11 200

232

35 500

272

112 000

33

115

73

365

113

1 150

153

3 650

193

11 500

233

36 500

273

115 000

34

118

74

375

114

1 180

154

3 750

194

11 800

234

37 500

274

118 000

35

121

75

387

115

1 215

155

3 875

195

12 150

235

38 750

275

121 500

36

125

76

400

116

1 250

156

4 000

196

12 500

236

40 000

276

125 000

37

128

77

412

117

1 285

157

4 125

197

12 850

237

41 250

277

128 500

38

132

78

425

118

1 320

158

4 250

198

13 200

238

42 500

278

132 000

39

136

79

437

119

1 360

159

4 375

199

13 600

239

43 750

279

136 000

PRILOGA 5

OZNAČEVANJE VELIKOSTI IN IZMER PNEVMATIK (V SKLADU S PRAVILNIKOM ECE R 54)

GLEJ PRILOGO 5 K PRAVILNIKU ECE R 54

Upoštevati je treba, da je po točki 6.5.4 tega pravilnika zunanji premer obnovljene pnevmatike lahko v vseh primerih večji od navedenega v tabelah priloge 5 k Pravilniku ECE R 54, vendar ne več kot za 1,5 odstotka.

PRILOGA 6

NAČIN MERJENJA PNEVMATIK

| 1. | Pnevmatika mora biti nameščena na preskusno platišče, kot določa izvajalec obnove, in napolnjena do nazivnega tlaka, ki je naveden v imenovanem mednarodnem standardu za pnevmatike (glej točko 4.1.4.7 tega pravilnika), glede na največjo nosilnost za takšno velikost in indeks nosilnosti. |
| --- | --- |

1.

Pnevmatika mora biti nameščena na preskusno platišče, kot določa izvajalec obnove, in napolnjena do nazivnega tlaka, ki je naveden v imenovanem mednarodnem standardu za pnevmatike (glej točko 4.1.4.7 tega pravilnika), glede na največjo nosilnost za takšno velikost in indeks nosilnosti.

| 2. | Pnevmatika, nameščena na ustrezno platišče, se mora prilagajati na notranjo temperaturo okolice najmanj 24 ur, razen če ni drugače navedeno v točki 6.8.3 tega pravilnika. |
| --- | --- |

2.

Pnevmatika, nameščena na ustrezno platišče, se mora prilagajati na notranjo temperaturo okolice najmanj 24 ur, razen če ni drugače navedeno v točki 6.8.3 tega pravilnika.

| 3. | Tlak je treba ponovno nastaviti na vrednost, navedeno v točki 1 te priloge. |
| --- | --- |

3.

Tlak je treba ponovno nastaviti na vrednost, navedeno v točki 1 te priloge.

| 4. | Celotno širino se zmeri na šestih enako razmaknjenih točkah na obodu pnevmatike, ob upoštevanju debeline zaščitnih reber ali pasov. Najvišji dobljeni odčitek se upošteva kot celotna širina. |
| --- | --- |

4.

Celotno širino se zmeri na šestih enako razmaknjenih točkah na obodu pnevmatike, ob upoštevanju debeline zaščitnih reber ali pasov. Najvišji dobljeni odčitek se upošteva kot celotna širina.

| 5. | Zunanji premer se izračuna iz meritve največjega oboda napolnjene pnevmatike. |
| --- | --- |

5.

Zunanji premer se izračuna iz meritve največjega oboda napolnjene pnevmatike.

PRILOGA 7

POSTOPEK PRESKUSOV VZDRŽLJIVOSTI OBREMENITEV/HITROST

(Načelno v skladu s pravilnikom ECE R 54)

| 1. | Priprava pnevmatike |
| --- | --- |

1.

Priprava pnevmatike

| 1.1 | Obnovljena pnevmatika se namesti na preskusno platišče, kot določi izvajalec obnove. |
| --- | --- |

1.1

Obnovljena pnevmatika se namesti na preskusno platišče, kot določi izvajalec obnove.

| 1.2 | Pri preskušanju pnevmatik z notranjo zračnico se uporabi nova notranja zračnica ali kombinacija notranje zračnice, ventila in ščitnika (kot je potrebno). |
| --- | --- |

1.2

Pri preskušanju pnevmatik z notranjo zračnico se uporabi nova notranja zračnica ali kombinacija notranje zračnice, ventila in ščitnika (kot je potrebno).

| 1.3 | Pnevmatika se napolni do tlaka, ki ustreza indeksu tlaka iz točke 3.2.10 tega pravilnika. |
| --- | --- |

1.3

Pnevmatika se napolni do tlaka, ki ustreza indeksu tlaka iz točke 3.2.10 tega pravilnika.

| 1.4 | Pnevmatika in sestav kolesa naj se prilagaja temperaturi v preskusnem prostoru najmanj 3 ure. |
| --- | --- |

1.4

Pnevmatika in sestav kolesa naj se prilagaja temperaturi v preskusnem prostoru najmanj 3 ure.

| 1.5 | Ponovno se nastavi tlak pnevmatike na vrednost, ki je navedena v točki 1.3 te priloge. |
| --- | --- |

1.5

Ponovno se nastavi tlak pnevmatike na vrednost, ki je navedena v točki 1.3 te priloge.

| 2. | Postopek preskusa |
| --- | --- |

2.

Postopek preskusa

| 2.1 | Pnevmatiko in sestavljeno kolo se namesti na preskusno os in jo pritisne ob zunanjo stran gladke površine preskusnega bobna s pogonom, s premerom 1,70 m ± 1 %, tako da bo površina najmanj tako široka kot je tekalna plast. V nekaterih primerih se lahko uporabi boben premera 2,00 m ± 1 %. |
| --- | --- |

2.1

Pnevmatiko in sestavljeno kolo se namesti na preskusno os in jo pritisne ob zunanjo stran gladke površine preskusnega bobna s pogonom, s premerom 1,70 m ± 1 %, tako da bo površina najmanj tako široka kot je tekalna plast. V nekaterih primerih se lahko uporabi boben premera 2,00 m ± 1 %.

| 2.2 | Preskusno os se obremeni s serijo preskusnih obremenitev, ki so enake odstotku obremenitve, navedenem v Prilogi 4 k temu pravilniku, ustrezno indeksu nosilnosti, označenem na pnevmatiki, in v skladu s spodaj navedenim preskusnim programom. Kjer ima pnevmatika indekse nosilnosti navedene za enojno vgradnjo in tudi dvojno vgradnjo, se za preskus uporabi obremenitev, skladna z indeksom nosilnosti za enojno vgradnjo. |
| --- | --- |

2.2

Preskusno os se obremeni s serijo preskusnih obremenitev, ki so enake odstotku obremenitve, navedenem v Prilogi 4 k temu pravilniku, ustrezno indeksu nosilnosti, označenem na pnevmatiki, in v skladu s spodaj navedenim preskusnim programom. Kjer ima pnevmatika indekse nosilnosti navedene za enojno vgradnjo in tudi dvojno vgradnjo, se za preskus uporabi obremenitev, skladna z indeksom nosilnosti za enojno vgradnjo.

| 2.2.1 | Če ima pnevmatika indeks obremenitve ≤ 121 in simbol za hitrost ≥ Q (160 km/h), je preskusni postopek takšen, kot je določen v točki 3 te priloge. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1

Če ima pnevmatika indeks obremenitve ≤ 121 in simbol za hitrost ≥ Q (160 km/h), je preskusni postopek takšen, kot je določen v točki 3 te priloge.

| 2.2.2 | Za vse ostale pnevmatike je preskusni postopek tak, kot je navedeno v Dodatku 1 k tej prilogi. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2

Za vse ostale pnevmatike je preskusni postopek tak, kot je navedeno v Dodatku 1 k tej prilogi.

| 2.3 | Program preskušanja vzdržljivosti – glej tudi Dodatek 1 k tej prilogi. |
| --- | --- |

2.3

Program preskušanja vzdržljivosti – glej tudi Dodatek 1 k tej prilogi.

| 2.3.1 | Med preskusom se tlaka v pnevmatikah ne sme popravljati, preskusna obremenitev mora biti stalna v vseh treh fazah preskusa. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.1

Med preskusom se tlaka v pnevmatikah ne sme popravljati, preskusna obremenitev mora biti stalna v vseh treh fazah preskusa.

| 2.3.2 | Med preskusom je treba vzdrževati temperaturo preskusnega prostora med 20 oC in 30 oC, razen če proizvajalec pnevmatik ali izvajalec obnove pnevmatik soglaša z višjo temperaturo. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.2

Med preskusom je treba vzdrževati temperaturo preskusnega prostora med 20 oC in 30 oC, razen če proizvajalec pnevmatik ali izvajalec obnove pnevmatik soglaša z višjo temperaturo.

| 2.4 | Program preskusa vzdržljivosti mora potekati poteka brez prekinitve. |
| --- | --- |

2.4

Program preskusa vzdržljivosti mora potekati poteka brez prekinitve.

| 3. | Preskusni postopek obremenitev/hitrost za pnevmatike z indeksom nosilnosti ≤ 121 in s simbolom za hitrost ≥ Q (160 km/h): |
| --- | --- |

3.

Preskusni postopek obremenitev/hitrost za pnevmatike z indeksom nosilnosti ≤ 121 in s simbolom za hitrost ≥ Q (160 km/h):

| 3.1 | Obremenitev kolesa in pnevmatike je enaka odstotnemu deležu indeksa nosilnosti pnevmatike: |
| --- | --- |

3.1

Obremenitev kolesa in pnevmatike je enaka odstotnemu deležu indeksa nosilnosti pnevmatike:

| 3.1.1 | 90 odstotkov pri preskusu na bobnu premera 1,70 m ± 1 %; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.1

90 odstotkov pri preskusu na bobnu premera 1,70 m ± 1 %;

| 3.1.2 | 92 odstotkov pri preskusu na bobnu premera 2,00 m ± 1 %. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2

92 odstotkov pri preskusu na bobnu premera 2,00 m ± 1 %.

| 3.2 | Preskusna hitrost v začetni fazi je za 20 km/h manjša, kot jo označuje simbol hitrosti pnevmatike. |
| --- | --- |

3.2

Preskusna hitrost v začetni fazi je za 20 km/h manjša, kot jo označuje simbol hitrosti pnevmatike.

| 3.2.1 | potrebni čas, da se od nič doseže začetna preskusno hitrost je 10 minut. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1

potrebni čas, da se od nič doseže začetna preskusno hitrost je 10 minut.

| 3.2.2 | Prva faza traja 10 minut. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2

Prva faza traja 10 minut.

| 3.3 | Preskusna hitrost v drugi fazi je za 10 km/h manjša, kot jo označuje simbol hitrosti pnevmatike. |
| --- | --- |

3.3

Preskusna hitrost v drugi fazi je za 10 km/h manjša, kot jo označuje simbol hitrosti pnevmatike.

| 3.3.1 | Druga faza traja 10 minut. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.1

Druga faza traja 10 minut.

| 3.4 | Preskusna hitrost v sklepni fazi je za 20 km/h manjša, kot je navedeno na simbolu za hitrost pnevmatike. |
| --- | --- |

3.4

Preskusna hitrost v sklepni fazi je za 20 km/h manjša, kot je navedeno na simbolu za hitrost pnevmatike.

| 3.4.1 | Sklepna faza traja 30 minut. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.1

Sklepna faza traja 30 minut.

| 3.5 | Celotni preskus traja 1 uro. |
| --- | --- |

3.5

Celotni preskus traja 1 uro.

| 4. | Enakovredni preskusni postopki:
  Pri uporabi drugačnega preskusnega postopka, kot je opisan v točkah 2 ali 3 te priloge, je treba dokazati njegovo enakovrednost. |
| --- | --- |

4.

Enakovredni preskusni postopki:

Pri uporabi drugačnega preskusnega postopka, kot je opisan v točkah 2 ali 3 te priloge, je treba dokazati njegovo enakovrednost.

PRILOGA 7

Dodatek 1

PROGRAM PRESKUŠANJA VZDRŽLJIVOSTI

| Indeks nosilnosti | Simbol hitrosti | Hitrost preskusnega bobna [min-1] | Obremenitev kolesa kot odstotek obremenitve, ki ustreza indeksu nosilnosti |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Radialne pnevmatike | Diagonalne in prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike | 7 h | 16 h | 24 h |
| 122 ali več | F | 100 | 100 | | | |
| G | 125 | 100 |
| J | 150 | 125 | | | |
| K | 175 | 150 | | | |
| L | 200 | – | | | |
| M | 225 | – | 66 % | 84 % | 101 % |
| 121 ali manj | F | 100 | 100 | | | |
| G | 125 | 125 | | | |
| J | 150 | 150 | | | |
| K | 175 | 175 | | | |
| L | 200 | 175 | 70 % | 88 % | 106 % |
| | | | 4 h | 6 h | |
| M | 250 | 200 | 75 % | 97 % | 114 % |
| N | 275 | – | 75 % | 97 % | 114 % |
| P | 300 | – | 75 % | 97 % | 114 % |
| Opombe:

  Pnevmatike „za posebno uporabo“ (glej točko 2.3.2 tega pravilnika) se preskušajo pri hitrosti, ki znaša 85 odstotkov predpisane hitrosti za enakovredne normalne pnevmatike |

Indeks nosilnosti

Simbol hitrosti

Hitrost preskusnega bobna [min-1]

Obremenitev kolesa kot odstotek obremenitve, ki ustreza indeksu nosilnosti

Radialne pnevmatike

Diagonalne in prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike

7 h

16 h

24 h

122 ali več

F

100

100

G

125

100

J

150

125

K

175

150

L

200

–

M

225

–

66 %

84 %

101 %

121 ali manj

F

100

100

G

125

125

J

150

150

K

175

175

L

200

175

70 %

88 %

106 %

4 h

6 h

M

250

200

75 %

97 %

114 %

N

275

–

75 %

97 %

114 %

P

300

–

75 %

97 %

114 %

Opombe:

Pnevmatike „za posebno uporabo“ (glej točko 2.3.2 tega pravilnika) se preskušajo pri hitrosti, ki znaša 85 odstotkov predpisane hitrosti za enakovredne normalne pnevmatike

PRILOGA 7

Dodatek 2

RAZMERJE MED INDEKSOM TLAKA IN ENOTAMI ZA TLAK

| Indeks tlaka
  („PSI“) | bar | kPa |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 20 | 1,4 | 140 |
| 25 | 1,7 | 170 |
| 30 | 2,1 | 210 |
| 35 | 2,4 | 240 |
| 40 | 2,8 | 280 |
| 45 | 3,1 | 310 |
| 50 | 3,4 | 340 |
| 55 | 3,8 | 380 |
| 60 | 4,1 | 410 |
| 65 | 4,5 | 450 |
| 70 | 4,8 | 480 |
| 75 | 5,2 | 520 |
| 80 | 5,5 | 550 |
| 85 | 5,9 | 590 |
| 90 | 6,2 | 620 |
| 95 | 6,6 | 660 |
| 100 | 6,9 | 690 |
| 105 | 7,2 | 720 |
| 110 | 7,6 | 760 |
| 115 | 7,9 | 790 |
| 120 | 8,3 | 830 |
| 125 | 8,6 | 860 |
| 130 | 9,0 | 900 |
| 135 | 9,3 | 930 |
| 140 | 9,7 | 970 |
| 145 | 10,0 | 1 000 |
| 150 | 10,3 | 1 030 |
| ... | ... | ... |

Indeks tlaka

(„PSI“)

bar

kPa

20

1,4

140

25

1,7

170

30

2,1

210

35

2,4

240

40

2,8

280

45

3,1

310

50

3,4

340

55

3,8

380

60

4,1

410

65

4,5

450

70

4,8

480

75

5,2

520

80

5,5

550

85

5,9

590

90

6,2

620

95

6,6

660

100

6,9

690

105

7,2

720

110

7,6

760

115

7,9

790

120

8,3

830

125

8,6

860

130

9,0

900

135

9,3

930

140

9,7

970

145

10,0

1 000

150

10,3

1 030

...

...

...

PRILOGA 8

SPREMEMBE NOSILNOSTI V ODVISNOSTI OD HITROSTI: PNEVMATIKE ZA GOSPODARSKA VOZILA RADIALNE IN DIAGONALNE PNEVMATIKE

(v skladu s pravilnikom UN/ECE R 54)

| Sprememba nosilnosti (%) |
| --- |
| Hitrost
  (km/h) | Vsi indeksi nosilnosti | Indeksi nosilnosti
  ≥ 122 (9) | Indeksi nosilnosti
  ≤ 121 (9) |
| Simbol hitrosti | Simbol hitrosti | Simbol hitrosti |
| | F | G | J | K | L | M | L | M | N | P (10) |
| 0 | +150 | +150 | +150 | +150 | +150 | +150 | +110 | +110 | +110 | +110 |
| 5 | +110 | +110 | +110 | +110 | +110 | +110 | + 90 | + 90 | + 90 | + 90 |
| 10 | + 80 | + 80 | + 80 | + 80 | + 80 | + 80 | + 75 | + 75 | + 75 | + 75 |
| 15 | + 65 | + 65 | + 65 | + 65 | + 65 | + 65 | + 60 | + 60 | + 60 | + 60 |
| 20 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 | + 50 |
| 25 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 | + 42 | + 42 | + 42 | + 42 |
| 30 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 | + 35 |
| 35 | + 19 | + 19 | + 19 | + 19 | + 19 | + 19 | + 29 | + 29 | + 29 | + 29 |
| 40 | + 15 | + 15 | + 15 | + 15 | + 15 | + 15 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 | + 25 |
| 45 | + 13 | + 13 | + 13 | + 13 | + 13 | + 13 | + 22 | + 22 | + 22 | + 22 |
| 50 | + 12 | + 12 | + 12 | + 12 | + 12 | + 12 | + 20 | + 20 | + 20 | + 20 |
| 55 | + 11 | + 11 | + 11 | + 11 | + 11 | + 11 | +17,5 | +17,5 | +17,5 | +17,5 |
| 60 | + 10 | + 10 | + 10 | + 10 | + 10 | + 10 | +15,0 | +15,0 | +15,0 | +15,0 |
| 65 | +7,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +13,5 | +13,5 | +13,5 | +13,5 |
| 70 | +5,0 | +7,0 | +7,0 | +7,0 | +7,0 | +7,0 | +12,5 | +12,5 | +12,5 | +12,5 |
| 75 | +2,5 | +5,5 | +5,5 | +5,5 | +5,5 | +5,5 | +11,0 | +11,0 | +11,0 | +11,0 |
| 80 | 0 | +4,0 | +4,0 | +4,0 | +4,0 | +4,0 | +10,0 | +10,0 | +10,0 | +10,0 |
| 85 | -3 | +2,0 | +3,0 | +3,0 | +3,0 | +3,0 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 | +8,5 |
| 90 | -6 | 0 | +2,0 | +2,0 | +2,0 | +2,0 | +7,5 | +7,5 | +7,5 | +7,5 |
| 95 | -10 | -2,5 | +1,0 | +1,0 | +1,0 | +1,0 | +6,5 | +6,5 | +6,5 | +6,5 |
| 100 | -15 | -5 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | +5,0 | +5,0 | +5,0 | +5,0 |
| 105 | | -8 | -2 | 0 | 0 | 0 | +3,75 | +3,75 | +3,75 | +3,75 |
| 110 | | -13 | -4 | 0 | 0 | 0 | +2,5 | +2,5 | +2,5 | +2,5 |
| 115 | | | -7 | -3 | 0 | 0 | +1,25 | +1,25 | +1,25 | +1,25 |
| 120 | | | -12 | -7 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| 125 | | | | | | 0 | -2,5 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| 130 | | | | | | 0 | -5,0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| 135 | | | | | | | -7,5 | -2,5 | 0 | 0 |
| 140 | | | | | | | -10 | -5 | 0 | 0 |
| 145 | | | | | | | | -7,5 | -2,5 | 0 |
| 150 | | | | | | | | -10,0 | -5,0 | 0 |
| 155 | | | | | | | | | -7,5 | -2,5 |
| 160 | | | | | | | | | -10,0 | -5,0 |

Sprememba nosilnosti (%)

Hitrost

(km/h)

Vsi indeksi nosilnosti

Indeksi nosilnosti

≥ 122 (9)

Indeksi nosilnosti

≤ 121 (9)

Simbol hitrosti

Simbol hitrosti

Simbol hitrosti

F

G

J

K

L

M

L

M

N

P (10)

0

+150

+150

+150

+150

+150

+150

+110

+110

+110

+110

5

+110

+110

+110

+110

+110

+110

- 90

- 90

- 90

- 90

10

- 80

- 80

- 80

- 80

- 80

- 80

- 75

- 75

- 75

- 75

15

- 65

- 65

- 65

- 65

- 65

- 65

- 60

- 60

- 60

- 60

20

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

- 50

25

- 35

- 35

- 35

- 35

- 35

- 35

- 42

- 42

- 42

- 42

30

- 25

- 25

- 25

- 25

- 25

- 25

- 35

- 35

- 35

- 35

35

- 19

- 19

- 19

- 19

- 19

- 19

- 29

- 29

- 29

- 29

40

- 15

- 15

- 15

- 15

- 15

- 15

- 25

- 25

- 25

- 25

45

- 13

- 13

- 13

- 13

- 13

- 13

- 22

- 22

- 22

- 22

50

- 12

- 12

- 12

- 12

- 12

- 12

- 20

- 20

- 20

- 20

55

- 11

- 11

- 11

- 11

- 11

- 11

+17,5

+17,5

+17,5

+17,5

60

- 10

- 10

- 10

- 10

- 10

- 10

+15,0

+15,0

+15,0

+15,0

65

+7,5

+8,5

+8,5

+8,5

+8,5

+8,5

+13,5

+13,5

+13,5

+13,5

70

+5,0

+7,0

+7,0

+7,0

+7,0

+7,0

+12,5

+12,5

+12,5

+12,5

75

+2,5

+5,5

+5,5

+5,5

+5,5

+5,5

+11,0

+11,0

+11,0

+11,0

80

0

+4,0

+4,0

+4,0

+4,0

+4,0

+10,0

+10,0

+10,0

+10,0

85

-3

+2,0

+3,0

+3,0

+3,0

+3,0

+8,5

+8,5

+8,5

+8,5

90

-6

0

+2,0

+2,0

+2,0

+2,0

+7,5

+7,5

+7,5

+7,5

95

-10

-2,5

+1,0

+1,0

+1,0

+1,0

+6,5

+6,5

+6,5

+6,5

100

-15

-5

0

0

0

0

+5,0

+5,0

+5,0

+5,0

105

-8

-2

0

0

0

+3,75

+3,75

+3,75

+3,75

110

-13

-4

0

0

0

+2,5

+2,5

+2,5

+2,5

115

-7

-3

0

0

+1,25

+1,25

+1,25

+1,25

120

-12

-7

0

0

0

0

0

0

125

0

-2,5

0

0

0

130

0

-5,0

0

0

0

135

-7,5

-2,5

0

0

140

-10

-5

0

0

145

-7,5

-2,5

0

150

-10,0

-5,0

0

155

-7,5

-2,5

160

-10,0

-5,0

PRILOGA 9

POJASNJEVALNA SLIKA

Glejte odstavek 2 tega pravilnika

Image

---

(1)  ETRTO, 32 Av.Brugmann – Bte 2, B-1060 Bruselj, Belgija.

1

(2)  TRA, 175 Montrose West Avenue, Suite 150, Copley, Ohio, 44321 ZDA.

2

(3)  JATMA, 9th Floor, Toranomon Building No.1–12, 1-Chome Toranomon Minato-ku, Tokio 105, Japonska.

3

(4)  TRAA, Suite 1, Hawthorn House, 795 Glenferrie Road, Hawthorn, Victoria, 3122 Avstralija.

4

(5)  ABPA, Avenida Paulista 244-12o Andar, CEP, 01310 Sao Paulo, SP Brazilija.

5

o

(6)  STRO, Älggatan 48 A, Nb, S-216 15 Malmö, Švedska.

6

(7)  Ta oznaka je obvezna le za tipe pnevmatik, ki so izdelane po tem pravilniku po uveljavitvi Dopolnitve 1 k Pravilniku.

7

(8)  1 za Nemčijo, 2 za Francijo, 3 za Italijo, 4 za Nizozemsko, 5 za Švedsko, 6 za Belgijo, 7 za Madžarsko, 8 za Češko, 9 za Španijo, 10 za Jugoslavijo, 11 za Združeno kraljestvo, 12 za Avstrijo, 13 za Luksemburg, 14 za Švico, 15 (prosto), 16 za Norveško, 17 za Finsko, 18 za Dansko, 19 za Romunijo, 20 za Poljsko, 21 za Portugalsko, 22 za Rusko federacijo, 23 za Grčijo, 24 za Irsko, 25 za Hrvaško, 26 za Slovenijo, 27 za Slovaško, 28 za Belorusijo, 29 za Estonijo, 30 (prosto), 31 za Bosno in Hercegovino, 32-36(prosto), 37 za Turčijo, 38-39 (prosto), 40 za Nekdanjo jugoslovansko republiko Makedonijo, 41 (prosto), 42 za Evropsko skupnost (homologacije podeljujejo države članice z uporabo svojih ECE simbolov), 43 za Japonsko. Naknadne številke se podelijo ostalim državam v kronološkem vrstnem redu glede na ratifikacijo ali pristop k Sporazumu o sprejetju enotnih tehničnih predpisov za cestna vozila, opremo in dele, ki jih je mogoče vgraditi in/ali uporabljati na cestnih vozilih, in o pogojih za vzajemno priznavanje homologacij, podeljenih na podlagi teh predpisov; tako dodeljene številke generalni sekretar Združenih narodov sporoči pogodbenicam Sporazuma.

8

(9)  Indeksi nosilnosti se nanašajo na uporabo z enojno pnevmatiko.

9

(10)  Spremembe obremenitve niso dovoljene pri hitrostih nad 160 km/h. Pri simbolih hitrostI „Q“ in več pomeni hitrost, ki ustreza simbolu hitrosti, največjo dovoljeno hitrost te pnevmatike.

10

---

PRILOGA II

Pravilnik ECE R 108

ENOTNI PREDPISI O HOMOLOGACIJI PROIZVODNJE OBNOVLJENIH PNEVMATIK ZA MOTORNA VOZILA IN NJIHOVE PRIKLOPNIKE

(Prečiščeno besedilo)

VSEBINA

PRAVILNIK

| 1. | Področje uporabe |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | Pomen izrazov |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | Označevanje |
| --- | --- |

3.

| 4. | Vloga za homologacijo |
| --- | --- |

4.

| 5. | Homologacija |
| --- | --- |

5.

| 6. | Zahteve |
| --- | --- |

6.

| 7. | Mere obnovljenih pnevmatik |
| --- | --- |

7.

| 8. | Spremembe homologacije |
| --- | --- |

8.

| 9. | Skladnost proizvodnje |
| --- | --- |

9.

| 10. | Kazni za neskladnost proizvodnje |
| --- | --- |

10.

| 11. | Dokončna prekinitev proizvodnje |
| --- | --- |

11.

| 12. | Imena in naslovi tehničnih služb, pristojnih za homologacijske preskuse, preskusnih laboratorijev in homologacijskih organov |
| --- | --- |

12.

PRILOGE

| Priloga 1 – | Sporočilo o podelitvi, razširitvi, zavrnitvi ali preklicu homologacije oziroma dokončni prekinitvi proizvodnje v obratu za obnovo pnevmatik po Pravilniku ECE R 108 |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 1 –

| Priloga 2 – | Vzorec oznake o homologaciji |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 2 –

| Priloga 3 – | Razporeditev oznak na obnovljenih pnevmatikah |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 3 –

| Priloga 4 – | Seznam indeksov nosilnosti in ustrezajoče nosilnosti |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 4 –

| Priloga 5 – | Označevanje velikosti in mer pnevmatik |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 5 –

| Priloga 6 – | Način merjenja pnevmatik |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 6 –

| Priloga 7 – | Postopek za preskuse vzdržljivosti – obremenitev/hitrost |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 7 –

| Priloga 8 – | Pojasnjevalna slika |
| --- | --- |

Priloga 8 –

1.   PODROČJE UPORABE

Ta pravilnik se nanaša na proizvodnjo obnovljenih pnevmatik, namenjenih za vgradnjo na osebna vozila in njihove priklopnike, ki se uporabljajo na cesti. Vendar pa se ne uporablja za:

| 1.1 | obnovljene pnevmatike za gospodarska vozila in njihove priklopnike; |
| --- | --- |

1.1

obnovljene pnevmatike za gospodarska vozila in njihove priklopnike;

| 1.2 | obnovljene pnevmatike za hitrosti pod 120 km/h ali nad 300 km/h; |
| --- | --- |

1.2

obnovljene pnevmatike za hitrosti pod 120 km/h ali nad 300 km/h;

| 1.3 | pnevmatike za kolesa in motorna kolesa; |
| --- | --- |

1.3

pnevmatike za kolesa in motorna kolesa;

| 1.4 | pnevmatike, prvotno izdelane brez simbolov hitrosti in indeksov nosilnosti; |
| --- | --- |

1.4

pnevmatike, prvotno izdelane brez simbolov hitrosti in indeksov nosilnosti;

| 1.5 | pnevmatike, prvotno izdelane brez homologacije in brez oznake „E“ ali „e“; |
| --- | --- |

1.5

pnevmatike, prvotno izdelane brez homologacije in brez oznake „E“ ali „e“;

| 1.6 | pnevmatike, namenjene za opremo avtomobilov, izdelanih pred letom 1939; |
| --- | --- |

1.6

pnevmatike, namenjene za opremo avtomobilov, izdelanih pred letom 1939;

| 1.7 | pnevmatike, namenjene izključno za tekmovanja ali za uporabo zunaj cest, in ustrezno označene; |
| --- | --- |

1.7

pnevmatike, namenjene izključno za tekmovanja ali za uporabo zunaj cest, in ustrezno označene;

| 1.8 | pnevmatike za zasilno uporabo, označene kot pnevmatike tipa „T“. |
| --- | --- |

1.8

pnevmatike za zasilno uporabo, označene kot pnevmatike tipa „T“.

2.   POMEN IZRAZOV – Glej tudi sliko v Prilogi 8

V tem pravilniku izraz:

| 2.1 | „vrsta obnovljenih pnevmatik“ – pomeni vrsto obnovljenih pnevmatik, kot je navedeno v točki 4.1.4; |
| --- | --- |

2.1

„vrsta obnovljenih pnevmatik“ – pomeni vrsto obnovljenih pnevmatik, kot je navedeno v točki 4.1.4;

| 2.2 | „zgradba“ pnevmatike pomeni tehnične značilnosti karkase pnevmatike. Ločimo predvsem naslednje zgradbe: |
| --- | --- |

2.2

„zgradba“ pnevmatike pomeni tehnične značilnosti karkase pnevmatike. Ločimo predvsem naslednje zgradbe:

| 2.2.1 | „diagonalna zgradba“ ali „zgradba s poševnim vložkom“ pomeni zgradbo pnevmatike, pri kateri niti vložkov potekajo od noge do noge, vložki pa so položeni tako, da potekajo niti pod izmeničnim kotom, znatno manjšim od 90 o na smer gibanja kolesa; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1

„diagonalna zgradba“ ali „zgradba s poševnim vložkom“ pomeni zgradbo pnevmatike, pri kateri niti vložkov potekajo od noge do noge, vložki pa so položeni tako, da potekajo niti pod izmeničnim kotom, znatno manjšim od 90 o na smer gibanja kolesa;

| 2.2.2 | „prepasana diagonalna zgradba“ pomeni zgradbo diagonalne pnevmatike (poševni vložek), pri kateri je karkasa učvrščena z obdajajočim pasom, sestavljenim iz dveh ali več vložkov, v katerih so kordne niti zelo neraztegljive. Vložki pasu so izmenično položeni drug na drugega tako, da niti sosednjih vložkov oklepajo kot, ki je primerljiv s kotom niti v vložkih karkase; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2

„prepasana diagonalna zgradba“ pomeni zgradbo diagonalne pnevmatike (poševni vložek), pri kateri je karkasa učvrščena z obdajajočim pasom, sestavljenim iz dveh ali več vložkov, v katerih so kordne niti zelo neraztegljive. Vložki pasu so izmenično položeni drug na drugega tako, da niti sosednjih vložkov oklepajo kot, ki je primerljiv s kotom niti v vložkih karkase;

| 2.2.3 | „radialna zgradba“ pomeni zgradbo pnevmatike, pri kateri niti vložkov karkase potekajo od noge do noge, vložki pa so položeni tako, da niti v njih potekajo pod kotom 90 o na smer gibanja kolesa. Karkasa je učvrščena z zelo neraztegljivim obdajajočim pasom; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.3

„radialna zgradba“ pomeni zgradbo pnevmatike, pri kateri niti vložkov karkase potekajo od noge do noge, vložki pa so položeni tako, da niti v njih potekajo pod kotom 90 o na smer gibanja kolesa. Karkasa je učvrščena z zelo neraztegljivim obdajajočim pasom;

| 2.3 | „kategorija uporabe“: |
| --- | --- |

2.3

„kategorija uporabe“:

| 2.3.1 | normalna pnevmatika je pnevmatika, namenjena za normalno rabo na cestah; |
| --- | --- |

2.3.1

normalna pnevmatika je pnevmatika, namenjena za normalno rabo na cestah;

| 2.3.2 | zimska pnevmatika je pnevmatika, pri kateri sta tekalna plast ali tekalna plast in zgradba načrtovani predvsem tako, da zagotavljata v blatu in svežem ali topečem se snegu boljšo učinkovitost kot normalna pnevmatika. Tekalna plast zimske pnevmatike je na splošno sestavljena iz kanalov (reber) in blokov tekalne površine, ki so bolj razmaknjeni kot pri normalni pnevmatiki; |
| --- | --- |

2.3.2

zimska pnevmatika je pnevmatika, pri kateri sta tekalna plast ali tekalna plast in zgradba načrtovani predvsem tako, da zagotavljata v blatu in svežem ali topečem se snegu boljšo učinkovitost kot normalna pnevmatika. Tekalna plast zimske pnevmatike je na splošno sestavljena iz kanalov (reber) in blokov tekalne površine, ki so bolj razmaknjeni kot pri normalni pnevmatiki;

| 2.3.3 | zasilna rezervna pnevmatika je pnevmatika, ki se razlikuje od pnevmatike za vgradnjo v katero koli vozilo za normalne vozne razmere in je namenjena samo za začasno uporabo v omejenih voznih razmerah; |
| --- | --- |

2.3.3

zasilna rezervna pnevmatika je pnevmatika, ki se razlikuje od pnevmatike za vgradnjo v katero koli vozilo za normalne vozne razmere in je namenjena samo za začasno uporabo v omejenih voznih razmerah;

| 2.3.4 | zasilna rezervna pnevmatika tipa „T“ je vrsta zasilne rezervne pnevmatike, ki je namenjena za uporabo pod tlakom, višjim od tlaka, določenega za standardne in ojačene pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

2.3.4

zasilna rezervna pnevmatika tipa „T“ je vrsta zasilne rezervne pnevmatike, ki je namenjena za uporabo pod tlakom, višjim od tlaka, določenega za standardne in ojačene pnevmatike;

| 2.4 | „noga“ je del pnevmatike, ki ima takšno obliko in zgradbo, da se prilega platišču in drži pnevmatiko na njem; |
| --- | --- |

2.4

„noga“ je del pnevmatike, ki ima takšno obliko in zgradbo, da se prilega platišču in drži pnevmatiko na njem;

| 2.5 | „kord“ so prameni niti v vložkih pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

2.5

„kord“ so prameni niti v vložkih pnevmatike;

| 2.6 | „vložek“ je plast z gumo obloženih vzporednih kordnih niti; |
| --- | --- |

2.6

„vložek“ je plast z gumo obloženih vzporednih kordnih niti;

| 2.7 | „pas“ se uporablja pri radialni ali prepasani pnevmatiki in pomeni sloj(-e) materiala pod tekalno plastjo, ki poteka(-o) v glavnem v smeri središčne črte tekalne plasti, da omeji karkaso v obodni smeri; |
| --- | --- |

2.7

„pas“ se uporablja pri radialni ali prepasani pnevmatiki in pomeni sloj(-e) materiala pod tekalno plastjo, ki poteka(-o) v glavnem v smeri središčne črte tekalne plasti, da omeji karkaso v obodni smeri;

| 2.8 | „blažilnik“ se uporablja pri diagonalni pnevmatiki in pomeni vmesni vložek med karkaso in tekalno plastjo; |
| --- | --- |

2.8

„blažilnik“ se uporablja pri diagonalni pnevmatiki in pomeni vmesni vložek med karkaso in tekalno plastjo;

| 2.9 | „zaščita“ je material na področju noge, ki varuje karkaso pred obrabo, da se ne oguli oz. odrgne ob platišče; |
| --- | --- |

2.9

„zaščita“ je material na področju noge, ki varuje karkaso pred obrabo, da se ne oguli oz. odrgne ob platišče;

| 2.10 | „karkasa“ je tisti strukturni del pnevmatike, ki ni tekalna plast in zunanji gumijasti del bočnice in ki pri napolnjeni pnevmatiki pomaga prenašati obremenitve; |
| --- | --- |

2.10

„karkasa“ je tisti strukturni del pnevmatike, ki ni tekalna plast in zunanji gumijasti del bočnice in ki pri napolnjeni pnevmatiki pomaga prenašati obremenitve;

| 2.11 | „tekalna plast“ je tisti strukturni del pnevmatike, ki ustvari stik s tlemi, varuje karkaso pred mehanskimi poškodbami in omogoča oprijem s podlago; |
| --- | --- |

2.11

„tekalna plast“ je tisti strukturni del pnevmatike, ki ustvari stik s tlemi, varuje karkaso pred mehanskimi poškodbami in omogoča oprijem s podlago;

| 2.12 | „bočnica“ je tisti del pnevmatike med tekalno plastjo in površino, ki jo pokrije rob platišča; |
| --- | --- |

2.12

„bočnica“ je tisti del pnevmatike med tekalno plastjo in površino, ki jo pokrije rob platišča;

| 2.13 | „spodnji del pnevmatike“ je področje med črto največje širine preseka pnevmatike in področjem, ki ga pokriva rob platišča; |
| --- | --- |

2.13

„spodnji del pnevmatike“ je področje med črto največje širine preseka pnevmatike in področjem, ki ga pokriva rob platišča;

| 2.14 | „kanal v tekalni plasti“ je prostor med sosednjima rebroma ali blokoma v dezenu tekalne plasti; |
| --- | --- |

2.14

„kanal v tekalni plasti“ je prostor med sosednjima rebroma ali blokoma v dezenu tekalne plasti;

| 2.15 | „vodilni kanali“ so široki kanali v osrednjem območju tekalne plasti, ki obsega približno tri četrtine širine tekalne plasti; |
| --- | --- |

2.15

„vodilni kanali“ so široki kanali v osrednjem območju tekalne plasti, ki obsega približno tri četrtine širine tekalne plasti;

| 2.16 | „širina preseka“ je linearna razdalja med zunanjima površinama bočnic napolnjene pnevmatike, ko je nameščena na določeno merilno platišče, vendar brez upoštevanja debeline napisov (oznak), dekoracij ali zaščitnih trakov ali reber; |
| --- | --- |

2.16

„širina preseka“ je linearna razdalja med zunanjima površinama bočnic napolnjene pnevmatike, ko je nameščena na določeno merilno platišče, vendar brez upoštevanja debeline napisov (oznak), dekoracij ali zaščitnih trakov ali reber;

| 2.17 | „celotna širina“ je linearna razdalja med zunanjima površinama bočnic napolnjene pnevmatike, ko je nameščena na predpisano merilno platišče, vključno z debelino napisov (oznak), dekoracij ali zaščitnih trakov ali reber; |
| --- | --- |

2.17

„celotna širina“ je linearna razdalja med zunanjima površinama bočnic napolnjene pnevmatike, ko je nameščena na predpisano merilno platišče, vključno z debelino napisov (oznak), dekoracij ali zaščitnih trakov ali reber;

| 2.18 | „višina preseka“ je razdalja, enaka polovični razliki zunanjega premera pnevmatike in nazivnega premera platišča; |
| --- | --- |

2.18

„višina preseka“ je razdalja, enaka polovični razliki zunanjega premera pnevmatike in nazivnega premera platišča;

| 2.19 | „nazivno presečno razmerje“ pomeni stokratnik števila, dobljenega z deljenjem nazivne višine preseka z nazivno širino preseka, pri čemer sta obe dimenziji izraženi v istih enotah; |
| --- | --- |

2.19

„nazivno presečno razmerje“ pomeni stokratnik števila, dobljenega z deljenjem nazivne višine preseka z nazivno širino preseka, pri čemer sta obe dimenziji izraženi v istih enotah;

| 2.20 | „zunanji premer“ pomeni celotni premer napolnjene, na novo obnovljene pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

2.20

„zunanji premer“ pomeni celotni premer napolnjene, na novo obnovljene pnevmatike;

| 2.21 | „oznaka velikosti pnevmatik“ je oznaka, ki kaže: |
| --- | --- |

2.21

„oznaka velikosti pnevmatik“ je oznaka, ki kaže:

| 2.21.1 | nazivno širino preseka. Ta širina mora biti izražena v mm, razen pri pnevmatikah, katerih oznaka velikosti je navedena v prvem stolpcu tabel v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku; |
| --- | --- |

2.21.1

nazivno širino preseka. Ta širina mora biti izražena v mm, razen pri pnevmatikah, katerih oznaka velikosti je navedena v prvem stolpcu tabel v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku;

| 2.21.2 | nazivno presečno razmerje, razen pri pnevmatikah, katerih oznaka velikosti je navedena v prvem stolpcu tabel v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku; |
| --- | --- |

2.21.2

nazivno presečno razmerje, razen pri pnevmatikah, katerih oznaka velikosti je navedena v prvem stolpcu tabel v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku;

| 2.21.3 | dogovorjeno število „d“ (simbol „d“), ki označuje nazivni premer platišča in ustreza premeru platišča, izraženemu v palcih (števila pod 100) ali v mm (števila nad 100). Za označevanje se lahko uporabijo števila, ki ustrezajo obema načinoma meritev; |
| --- | --- |

2.21.3

dogovorjeno število „d“ (simbol „d“), ki označuje nazivni premer platišča in ustreza premeru platišča, izraženemu v palcih (števila pod 100) ali v mm (števila nad 100). Za označevanje se lahko uporabijo števila, ki ustrezajo obema načinoma meritev;

| | 2.21.3.1 vrednosti simbolov „d“, izražene v milimetrih, so navedene spodaj:






  Koda nazivnega premera platišča – „d“ | Vrednost simbola „d“, izražena v mm |
| --- | --- | --- |
| 8
  9
  10
  11
  12
  13
  14 | 203
  229
  254
  279
  305
  330
  356 |
| 15
  16
  17
  18
  19 | 381
  406
  432
  457
  483 |
| 20
  21 | 508
  533 |

2.21.3.1 vrednosti simbolov „d“, izražene v milimetrih, so navedene spodaj:

Koda nazivnega premera platišča – „d“

Vrednost simbola „d“, izražena v mm

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

203

229

254

279

305

330

356

15

16

17

18

19

381

406

432

457

483

20

21

508

533

| 2.22 | „nazivni premer platišča (d)“ je premer platišča, na katero se vgradi ustrezna pnevmatika; |
| --- | --- |

2.22

„nazivni premer platišča (d)“ je premer platišča, na katero se vgradi ustrezna pnevmatika;

| 2.23 | „platišče“ je opora, na kateri sedita nogi pnevmatike, bodisi pnevmatike z zračnico ali brez nje; |
| --- | --- |

2.23

„platišče“ je opora, na kateri sedita nogi pnevmatike, bodisi pnevmatike z zračnico ali brez nje;

| 2.24 | „merilno platišče“ je platišče, ki je določeno z „merilno širino platišča“ ali „konstrukcijsko širino platišča“ za posamezno velikost pnevmatike v poljubni izdaji enega ali več mednarodnih standardov za pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

2.24

„merilno platišče“ je platišče, ki je določeno z „merilno širino platišča“ ali „konstrukcijsko širino platišča“ za posamezno velikost pnevmatike v poljubni izdaji enega ali več mednarodnih standardov za pnevmatike;

| 2.25 | „preskusno platišče“ je katero koli platišče, ki je odobreno ali priporočeno ali dovoljeno v enem od mednarodnih standardov za pnevmatike za konkretno velikost in tip pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

2.25

„preskusno platišče“ je katero koli platišče, ki je odobreno ali priporočeno ali dovoljeno v enem od mednarodnih standardov za pnevmatike za konkretno velikost in tip pnevmatike;

| 2.26 | „mednarodni standard za pnevmatike“ je eden od naslednjih dokumentov standardov:






  (a) | The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO), (Evropska tehnična organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča) (1)
   (2): „Standards Manual – Priročnik za standarde“; |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.26

„mednarodni standard za pnevmatike“ je eden od naslednjih dokumentov standardov:

(a)

The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO), (Evropska tehnična organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča) (1)
   (2): „Standards Manual – Priročnik za standarde“;

| (b) | The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO), (Evropska tehnična organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča) (2): „Engineering Design Information – obsolete data – Informacije za tehnično projektiranje – zastareli podatki“; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

The European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation (ETRTO), (Evropska tehnična organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča) (2): „Engineering Design Information – obsolete data – Informacije za tehnično projektiranje – zastareli podatki“;

| (c) | The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (3) (Združenje za pnevmatike in platišča): „Year Book – Letna publikacija“; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

The Tire and Rim Association Inc. (TRA) (3) (Združenje za pnevmatike in platišča): „Year Book – Letna publikacija“;

| (d) | The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (4)(Združenje japonskih proizvajalcev avtomobilskih pnevmatik): „Year Book – Letna publikacija“; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

The Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers Association (JATMA) (4)(Združenje japonskih proizvajalcev avtomobilskih pnevmatik): „Year Book – Letna publikacija“;

| (e) | The Tire and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (5) (Združenje za pnevmatike in platišča Avstralije): „Standards Manual – Priročnik za standarde“; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

The Tire and Rim Association of Australia (TRAA) (5) (Združenje za pnevmatike in platišča Avstralije): „Standards Manual – Priročnik za standarde“;

| (f) | The Associação Brasiliera de Pneus e Aros (ABPA) (Brazilsko združenje za pnevmatike in platišča) (6): „Manual de Normal Technicas – Priročnik za tehnične standarde“; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

The Associação Brasiliera de Pneus e Aros (ABPA) (Brazilsko združenje za pnevmatike in platišča) (6): „Manual de Normal Technicas – Priročnik za tehnične standarde“;

| (g) | The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) 6/(Skandinavska organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča) (7): „Data Book – Publikacija s podatki“; |
| --- | --- |

(g)

The Scandinavian Tyre and Rim Organisation (STRO) 6/(Skandinavska organizacija za pnevmatike in platišča) (7): „Data Book – Publikacija s podatki“;

| 2.27 | „trganje“ je odletavanje delcev gume s tekalne plasti; |
| --- | --- |

2.27

„trganje“ je odletavanje delcev gume s tekalne plasti;

| 2.28 | „ločevanje korda“ je ločevanje kordnih nitk od njihove gumijaste prevleke; |
| --- | --- |

2.28

„ločevanje korda“ je ločevanje kordnih nitk od njihove gumijaste prevleke;

| 2.29 | „razslojevanje vložkov“ je ločevanje sosednjih vložkov; |
| --- | --- |

2.29

„razslojevanje vložkov“ je ločevanje sosednjih vložkov;

| 2.30 | „ločevanje tekalne plasti“ je trganje tekalne plasti od karkase; |
| --- | --- |

2.30

„ločevanje tekalne plasti“ je trganje tekalne plasti od karkase;

| 2.31 | „indikatorji obrabe“ so mostički v dnu kanalov tekalne plasti, ki so načrtovani za vizualno oceno stopnje obrabljenosti tekalne plasti; |
| --- | --- |

2.31

„indikatorji obrabe“ so mostički v dnu kanalov tekalne plasti, ki so načrtovani za vizualno oceno stopnje obrabljenosti tekalne plasti;

| 2.32 | „opis uporabe“ je posebna kombinacija indeksa nosilnosti in simbola hitrosti pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

2.32

„opis uporabe“ je posebna kombinacija indeksa nosilnosti in simbola hitrosti pnevmatike;

| 2.33 | „indeks nosilnosti“ je številska koda največje obremenitve, ki jo prenese pnevmatika.
  Seznam indeksov nosilnosti in ustrezajoče obremenitve so prikazane v Prilogi 4 k temu pravilniku; |
| --- | --- |

2.33

„indeks nosilnosti“ je številska koda največje obremenitve, ki jo prenese pnevmatika.

Seznam indeksov nosilnosti in ustrezajoče obremenitve so prikazane v Prilogi 4 k temu pravilniku;

| 2.34 | „simbol hitrosti“ je: |
| --- | --- |

2.34

„simbol hitrosti“ je:

| 2.34.1 | črkovni simbol, ki prikazuje kategorijo hitrosti, pri kateri je pnevmatika lahko obremenjena skladno z indeksom nosilnosti; |
| --- | --- |

2.34.1

črkovni simbol, ki prikazuje kategorijo hitrosti, pri kateri je pnevmatika lahko obremenjena skladno z indeksom nosilnosti;

| 2.34.2 | simboli hitrosti in ustrezajoče hitrosti so navedene v spodnji tabeli:






  Simbol hitrosti | Ustrezajoča hitrost (km/h) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| L
  M
  N
  P
  Q
  R
  S
  T
  U
  H
  V
  W
  Y | 120
  130
  140
  150
  160
  170
  180
  190
  200
  210
  240
  270
  300 |

2.34.2

simboli hitrosti in ustrezajoče hitrosti so navedene v spodnji tabeli:

Simbol hitrosti

Ustrezajoča hitrost (km/h)

L

M

N

P

Q

R

S

T

U

H

V

W

Y

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

240

270

300

| 2.35 | „največja obremenitev“ je največje breme, ki ga pnevmatika lahko prenese; |
| --- | --- |

2.35

„največja obremenitev“ je največje breme, ki ga pnevmatika lahko prenese;

| 2.35.1 | za hitrosti, ki ne presegajo 210 km/h največja obremenitev ne sme preseči vrednosti, ki ustreza indeksu nosilnosti za pnevmatiko; |
| --- | --- |

2.35.1

za hitrosti, ki ne presegajo 210 km/h največja obremenitev ne sme preseči vrednosti, ki ustreza indeksu nosilnosti za pnevmatiko;

| 2.35.2 | za hitrosti nad 210 km/h, ki pa ne presegajo 300 km/h, pa največja obremenitev ne sme preseči odstotka vrednosti, ki ustreza indeksu nosilnosti pnevmatike, podane v spodnji tabeli, glede na hitrost, ki jo lahko razvije vozilo na katero se pnevmatika vgradi:







  Simbol za hitrost pnevmatike | Največja hitrost (km/h) | Največja obremenitev - % |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| V | 210
  215
  220
  225
  230
  235
  240 | 100,0
  98,5
  97,0
  95,5
  94,0
  92,5
  91,0 |
| W | 240
  250
  260
  270 | 100
  95
  90
  85 |
| Y | 270
  280
  290
  300 | 100
  95
  90
  85 |

2.35.2

za hitrosti nad 210 km/h, ki pa ne presegajo 300 km/h, pa največja obremenitev ne sme preseči odstotka vrednosti, ki ustreza indeksu nosilnosti pnevmatike, podane v spodnji tabeli, glede na hitrost, ki jo lahko razvije vozilo na katero se pnevmatika vgradi:

Simbol za hitrost pnevmatike

Največja hitrost (km/h)

Največja obremenitev - %

V

210

215

220

225

230

235

240

100,0

98,5

97,0

95,5

94,0

92,5

91,0

W

240

250

260

270

100

95

90

85

Y

270

280

290

300

100

95

90

85

Za vmesne največje hitrosti je dovoljena linearna interpolacija največje obremenitve.

| 2.36 | „obrat za obnovo pnevmatik“ je lokacija s proizvodno enoto ali skupina lokacij, kjer se dokonča proizvodnja obnovljenih pnevmatik; |
| --- | --- |

2.36

„obrat za obnovo pnevmatik“ je lokacija s proizvodno enoto ali skupina lokacij, kjer se dokonča proizvodnja obnovljenih pnevmatik;

| 2.37 | „obnovitev pnevmatike“ je splošni izraz za obnovitev rabljene pnevmatike, ko se zamenja obrabljena tekalna plast z novim materialom. Vključuje lahko tudi obnovo zunanje bočnice. Vključuje naslednje metode postopkov: |
| --- | --- |

2.37

„obnovitev pnevmatike“ je splošni izraz za obnovitev rabljene pnevmatike, ko se zamenja obrabljena tekalna plast z novim materialom. Vključuje lahko tudi obnovo zunanje bočnice. Vključuje naslednje metode postopkov:

| 2.37.1 | „prekritje zgornje plasti“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti; |
| --- | --- |

2.37.1

„prekritje zgornje plasti“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti;

| 2.37.2 | „razširjeno prekritje“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti z novim materialom, ki sega preko dela bočnice; |
| --- | --- |

2.37.2

„razširjeno prekritje“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti z novim materialom, ki sega preko dela bočnice;

| 2.37.3 | „od noge do noge“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti in obnova bočnice, vključno s celotnim spodnjim delom pnevmatike ali njegovim delom; |
| --- | --- |

2.37.3

„od noge do noge“ – zamenjava tekalne plasti in obnova bočnice, vključno s celotnim spodnjim delom pnevmatike ali njegovim delom;

| 2.38 | „ogrodje pnevmatike“ je obrabljena pnevmatika, ki obsega karkaso in preostali material tekalne plasti in bočnice; |
| --- | --- |

2.38

„ogrodje pnevmatike“ je obrabljena pnevmatika, ki obsega karkaso in preostali material tekalne plasti in bočnice;

| 2.39 | „brušenje“ je postopek odstranitve starega materiala z ogrodja pnevmatike zaradi priprave površine za nanašanje novega materiala; |
| --- | --- |

2.39

„brušenje“ je postopek odstranitve starega materiala z ogrodja pnevmatike zaradi priprave površine za nanašanje novega materiala;

| 2.40 | „popravilo“ je delo, ki se opravi na poškodovanih ogrodjih pnevmatik v okviru priznanih meja; |
| --- | --- |

2.40

„popravilo“ je delo, ki se opravi na poškodovanih ogrodjih pnevmatik v okviru priznanih meja;

| 2.41 | „material za tekalno plast“ je material v primernem stanju za zamenjavo obrabljene tekalne plasti. Lahko je v več oblikah, na primer: |
| --- | --- |

2.41

„material za tekalno plast“ je material v primernem stanju za zamenjavo obrabljene tekalne plasti. Lahko je v več oblikah, na primer:

| 2.41.1 | „profilirani trakovi“ (kamelji hrbet) –material narezan na določeno dolžino, predhodno ekstrudiran v zahtevani prečni profil in zatem nameščen v hladnem stanju na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran; |
| --- | --- |

2.41.1

„profilirani trakovi“ (kamelji hrbet) –material narezan na določeno dolžino, predhodno ekstrudiran v zahtevani prečni profil in zatem nameščen v hladnem stanju na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran;

| 2.41.2 | „naviti trakovi“ – trak materiala za tekalno plast, ki se neposredno ekstrudira in navije na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike in nanaša do potrebnega preseka. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran; |
| --- | --- |

2.41.2

„naviti trakovi“ – trak materiala za tekalno plast, ki se neposredno ekstrudira in navije na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike in nanaša do potrebnega preseka. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran;

| 2.41.3 | „neposredno ekstrudiranje“ – material za tekalno plast, ekstrudiran v potrebnem preseku in neposredno ekstrudiran na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran; |
| --- | --- |

2.41.3

„neposredno ekstrudiranje“ – material za tekalno plast, ekstrudiran v potrebnem preseku in neposredno ekstrudiran na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material mora biti vulkaniziran;

| 2.41.4 | „predvulkanizirano“– predhodno oblikovana in vulkanizirana tekalna plast, ki se nanese neposredno na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material se mora prilepiti na ogrodje pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

2.41.4

„predvulkanizirano“– predhodno oblikovana in vulkanizirana tekalna plast, ki se nanese neposredno na pripravljeno ogrodje pnevmatike. Novi material se mora prilepiti na ogrodje pnevmatike;

| 2.42 | „obloga bočnice“ je material, uporabljen za pokritje bočnic ogrodja pnevmatike, da se lahko oblikujejo potrebne oznake; |
| --- | --- |

2.42

„obloga bočnice“ je material, uporabljen za pokritje bočnic ogrodja pnevmatike, da se lahko oblikujejo potrebne oznake;

| 2.43 | „vmesna guma“ je material, uporabljen kot vezni sloj med novo tekalno plastjo in okvirom, pa tudi za popravilo manjših poškodb; |
| --- | --- |

2.43

„vmesna guma“ je material, uporabljen kot vezni sloj med novo tekalno plastjo in okvirom, pa tudi za popravilo manjših poškodb;

| 2.44 | „lepilo“ je lepljiva raztopina, ki pred postopkom vulkanizacije drži nove materiale na predvidenem mestu; |
| --- | --- |

2.44

„lepilo“ je lepljiva raztopina, ki pred postopkom vulkanizacije drži nove materiale na predvidenem mestu;

| 2.45 | „vulkanizacija“ je izraz, ki opisuje spremembo fizikalnih lastnosti novega materiala, do katerih običajno pride zaradi delovanja toplote in tlaka za določen čas in v nadzorovanih razmerah; |
| --- | --- |

2.45

„vulkanizacija“ je izraz, ki opisuje spremembo fizikalnih lastnosti novega materiala, do katerih običajno pride zaradi delovanja toplote in tlaka za določen čas in v nadzorovanih razmerah;

| 2.46 | „radialna neenakomernost“ je spreminjanje polmera pnevmatike, izmerjeno na obodu tekalne površine; |
| --- | --- |

2.46

„radialna neenakomernost“ je spreminjanje polmera pnevmatike, izmerjeno na obodu tekalne površine;

| 2.47 | „neuravnoteženost“ je odstopanje porazdelitve mase okrog osrednje osi pnevmatike. Meri se lahko kot „statična“ ali „dinamična“ neuravnoteženost. |
| --- | --- |

2.47

„neuravnoteženost“ je odstopanje porazdelitve mase okrog osrednje osi pnevmatike. Meri se lahko kot „statična“ ali „dinamična“ neuravnoteženost.

3.   OZNAČEVANJE

| 3.1 | Primer razmestitve oznak na obnovljenih pnevmatikah je naveden v Prilogi 3 k temu pravilniku. |
| --- | --- |

3.1

Primer razmestitve oznak na obnovljenih pnevmatikah je naveden v Prilogi 3 k temu pravilniku.

| 3.2 | Obnovljene pnevmatike morajo pri simetričnih pnevmatikah imeti na obeh bočnicah, pri asimetričnih pa vsaj na zunanji strani: |
| --- | --- |

3.2

Obnovljene pnevmatike morajo pri simetričnih pnevmatikah imeti na obeh bočnicah, pri asimetričnih pa vsaj na zunanji strani:

| 3.2.1 | ime blagovne znamke ali registrirane blagovne znamke; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1

ime blagovne znamke ali registrirane blagovne znamke;

| 3.2.2 | oznako velikosti pnevmatik, kot je določeno v točki 2.21; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2

oznako velikosti pnevmatik, kot je določeno v točki 2.21;

| 3.2.3 | navedbo zgradbe, kot sledi: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3

navedbo zgradbe, kot sledi:

| 3.2.3.1 | na diagonalnih pnevmatikah: brez navedbe ali črka „D“ pred oznako za premer platišča; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.1

na diagonalnih pnevmatikah: brez navedbe ali črka „D“ pred oznako za premer platišča;

| 3.2.3.2 | na radialnih pnevmatikah: črko „R“ pred oznako za premer platišča, in po izbiri, beseda „RADIAL“; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.2

na radialnih pnevmatikah: črko „R“ pred oznako za premer platišča, in po izbiri, beseda „RADIAL“;

| 3.2.3.3 | na pnevmatikah s poševnim vložkom črka „B“ pred oznako za premer platišča in dodatno besedi „BIAS-BELTED“; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.3

na pnevmatikah s poševnim vložkom črka „B“ pred oznako za premer platišča in dodatno besedi „BIAS-BELTED“;

| 3.2.4 | opis uporabe, ki zajema: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4

opis uporabe, ki zajema:

| 3.2.4.1 | navedbo nazivne nosilnosti pnevmatike v obliki indeksa nosilnosti, ki je predpisan v točki 2.33; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.1

navedbo nazivne nosilnosti pnevmatike v obliki indeksa nosilnosti, ki je predpisan v točki 2.33;

| 3.2.4.2 | navedbo največje nazivne hitrosti pnevmatike v obliki simbola, kot je predpisan v točki 2.34; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.2

navedbo največje nazivne hitrosti pnevmatike v obliki simbola, kot je predpisan v točki 2.34;

| 3.2.5 | besedo „TUBELESS“ (brez zračnice), če je pnevmatika namenjena za uporabo brez notranje zračnice; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5

besedo „TUBELESS“ (brez zračnice), če je pnevmatika namenjena za uporabo brez notranje zračnice;

| 3.2.6 | napis M+S ali MS ali M.S. ali M & S, če gre za zimsko pnevmatiko; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6

napis M+S ali MS ali M.S. ali M & S, če gre za zimsko pnevmatiko;

| 3.2.7 | datum obnovitve, kot sledi: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.7

datum obnovitve, kot sledi:

| 3.2.7.1 | do 31. decembra 1999; kot predpisuje točka 3.2.7.2 ali v obliki skupine treh številk, pri čemer prvi dve pomenita številko tedna, tretja pa leto izdelave v posameznem desetletju. Datumska oznaka lahko zajema obdobje proizvodnje od tedna, označenega s številko tedna, pa vse do tri tedne zatem (številka tedna povečana za tri). Na primer, oznaka „253“ bi lahko pomenila pnevmatiko, ki je bila obnovljena v tednih 25, 26, 27 ali 28 v letu 1993.
  Datumska oznaka je lahko označena le na eni strani; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.7.1

do 31. decembra 1999; kot predpisuje točka 3.2.7.2 ali v obliki skupine treh številk, pri čemer prvi dve pomenita številko tedna, tretja pa leto izdelave v posameznem desetletju. Datumska oznaka lahko zajema obdobje proizvodnje od tedna, označenega s številko tedna, pa vse do tri tedne zatem (številka tedna povečana za tri). Na primer, oznaka „253“ bi lahko pomenila pnevmatiko, ki je bila obnovljena v tednih 25, 26, 27 ali 28 v letu 1993.

Datumska oznaka je lahko označena le na eni strani;

| 3.2.7.2 | po 1. januarju 2000; v obliki skupine štirih številk, pri čemer prvi dve pomenita številko tedna, zadnji dve pa leto, v katerem je bila pnevmatika obnovljena. Datumska oznaka lahko zajema obdobje proizvodnje od tedna, označenega z ustrezno številko, pa vse do tri tedne zatem (številka tedna povečana za tri). Na primer, oznaka „2503“ bi lahko pomenila pnevmatiko, ki je bila obnovljena v tednih 25, 26, 27 ali 28 v letu 2003.
  Datumska oznaka je lahko označena le na eni strani; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.7.2

po 1. januarju 2000; v obliki skupine štirih številk, pri čemer prvi dve pomenita številko tedna, zadnji dve pa leto, v katerem je bila pnevmatika obnovljena. Datumska oznaka lahko zajema obdobje proizvodnje od tedna, označenega z ustrezno številko, pa vse do tri tedne zatem (številka tedna povečana za tri). Na primer, oznaka „2503“ bi lahko pomenila pnevmatiko, ki je bila obnovljena v tednih 25, 26, 27 ali 28 v letu 2003.

Datumska oznaka je lahko označena le na eni strani;

| 3.2.8 | izraz „RETREAD“ ali „REMOULD“ (OBNOVLJENO ali PREOBLIKOVANO, po 1. januarju 1999 se uporablja samo beseda „RETREAD“). Na prošnjo izvajalca obnove se lahko doda ustrezni izraz tudi v drugih jezikih. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.8

izraz „RETREAD“ ali „REMOULD“ (OBNOVLJENO ali PREOBLIKOVANO, po 1. januarju 1999 se uporablja samo beseda „RETREAD“). Na prošnjo izvajalca obnove se lahko doda ustrezni izraz tudi v drugih jezikih.

| 3.3 | Pred homologacijo mora biti na pnevmatikah dovolj velik prostor za namestitev homologacijske oznake za, kot določa točka 5.8 in je prikazana v Prilogi 2 k temu pravilniku. |
| --- | --- |

3.3

Pred homologacijo mora biti na pnevmatikah dovolj velik prostor za namestitev homologacijske oznake za, kot določa točka 5.8 in je prikazana v Prilogi 2 k temu pravilniku.

| 3.4 | Po homologaciji se oznake iz točke 5.8 in Priloge 2 k temu pravilniku namestijo na ustrezen prostor, kot določa točka 3.3. Ta oznaka se lahko namesti samo na eno bočnico. |
| --- | --- |

3.4

Po homologaciji se oznake iz točke 5.8 in Priloge 2 k temu pravilniku namestijo na ustrezen prostor, kot določa točka 3.3. Ta oznaka se lahko namesti samo na eno bočnico.

| 3.5 | Oznake iz točke 3.2 in oznaka za homologacijo, ki je predpisana v točkah 3.4 in 5.8, morajo biti dobro čitljive in nalite na pnevmatiko oziroma vtisnjene vanjo, ali pa se trajno označijo na pnevmatiki. |
| --- | --- |

3.5

Oznake iz točke 3.2 in oznaka za homologacijo, ki je predpisana v točkah 3.4 in 5.8, morajo biti dobro čitljive in nalite na pnevmatiko oziroma vtisnjene vanjo, ali pa se trajno označijo na pnevmatiki.

| 3.6 | Če so izvorne specifikacije proizvajalca še vedno čitljive tudi po postopku obnovitve, se štejejo kot specifikacije izvajalca obnavljanja za obnovljeno pnevmatiko. Če pa te izvorne specifikacije ne veljajo po opravljenem postopku obnove, jih je treba v celoti odstraniti. |
| --- | --- |

3.6

Če so izvorne specifikacije proizvajalca še vedno čitljive tudi po postopku obnovitve, se štejejo kot specifikacije izvajalca obnavljanja za obnovljeno pnevmatiko. Če pa te izvorne specifikacije ne veljajo po opravljenem postopku obnove, jih je treba v celoti odstraniti.

| 3.7 | Originalna oznaka homologacije „E“ ali „e“ in številka homologacije se odstranita. |
| --- | --- |

3.7

Originalna oznaka homologacije „E“ ali „e“ in številka homologacije se odstranita.

4.   VLOGA ZA HOMOLOGACIJO

Naslednji postopki veljajo za izdajo homologacije obrata za obnovo pnevmatik.

| 4.1 | Vlogo za homologacijo obrata za obnovo pnevmatik vloži imetnik (imena) blagovne znamke, ki se uporablja za pnevmatiko, ali njegov pravilno pooblaščen zastopnik. Navesti je treba: |
| --- | --- |

4.1

Vlogo za homologacijo obrata za obnovo pnevmatik vloži imetnik (imena) blagovne znamke, ki se uporablja za pnevmatiko, ali njegov pravilno pooblaščen zastopnik. Navesti je treba:

| 4.1.1 | prikaz sestave družbe, ki proizvaja obnovljene pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.1

prikaz sestave družbe, ki proizvaja obnovljene pnevmatike;

| 4.1.2 | kratek opis sistema upravljanja kakovosti, ki zagotavlja učinkovit nadzor nad postopki obnavljanja pnevmatik, tako da ustrezajo zahtevam tega pravilnika; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.2

kratek opis sistema upravljanja kakovosti, ki zagotavlja učinkovit nadzor nad postopki obnavljanja pnevmatik, tako da ustrezajo zahtevam tega pravilnika;

| 4.1.3 | imena ali oznake blagovne znamke, ki se uporabljajo za obnovljene pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.3

imena ali oznake blagovne znamke, ki se uporabljajo za obnovljene pnevmatike;

| 4.1.4 | naslednje informacije v zvezi s serijo pnevmatik, ki se obnavljajo: |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4

naslednje informacije v zvezi s serijo pnevmatik, ki se obnavljajo:

| 4.1.4.1 | obseg velikosti pnevmatik; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.1

obseg velikosti pnevmatik;

| 4.1.4.2 | zgradba pnevmatik (diagonalne, prepasane diagonalne ali radialne); |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.2

zgradba pnevmatik (diagonalne, prepasane diagonalne ali radialne);

| 4.1.4.3 | kategorijo rabe pnevmatik (normalne ali zimske pnevmatike itd.): |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.3

kategorijo rabe pnevmatik (normalne ali zimske pnevmatike itd.):

| 4.1.4.4 | sistem obnavljanja in način uporabe novih materialov, kot določata točki 2.37 in 2.41; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.4

sistem obnavljanja in način uporabe novih materialov, kot določata točki 2.37 in 2.41;

| 4.1.4.5 | simbol največje hitrosti pnevmatik za obnavljanje; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.5

simbol največje hitrosti pnevmatik za obnavljanje;

| 4.1.4.6 | indeks največje nosilnosti pnevmatik za obnavljanje; |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.6

indeks največje nosilnosti pnevmatik za obnavljanje;

| 4.1.4.7 | imenovani mednarodni standard za pnevmatike, s katerim je serija pnevmatik skladna. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.4.7

imenovani mednarodni standard za pnevmatike, s katerim je serija pnevmatik skladna.

5.   HOMOLOGACIJA

| 5.1 | Za obnavljanje pnevmatik je potrebna homologacija obrata za obnovo pnevmatik, ki jo izdajo pristojni organi v skladu z zahtevami tega pravilnika. Pristojni organ ukrene vse potrebno, kot je opisano v tem pravilniku, da zagotovi ustreznost pnevmatik, obnovljenih v konkretnem obratu, z zahtevami tega pravilnika. Obrat je v celoti odgovoren, da bodo obnovljene pnevmatike izpolnile zahteve iz tega pravilnika in imele ustrezne lastnosti pri normalni rabi. |
| --- | --- |

5.1

Za obnavljanje pnevmatik je potrebna homologacija obrata za obnovo pnevmatik, ki jo izdajo pristojni organi v skladu z zahtevami tega pravilnika. Pristojni organ ukrene vse potrebno, kot je opisano v tem pravilniku, da zagotovi ustreznost pnevmatik, obnovljenih v konkretnem obratu, z zahtevami tega pravilnika. Obrat je v celoti odgovoren, da bodo obnovljene pnevmatike izpolnile zahteve iz tega pravilnika in imele ustrezne lastnosti pri normalni rabi.

| 5.2 | Poleg normalnih zahtev za začetno oceno obrata za obnovo pnevmatik se mora homologacijski organ prepričati, da so vsi postopki, delovanje, navodila in dokumentacija s specifikacijami, ki jo priskrbijo dobavitelji materiala, opisani v razumljivem jeziku za operativno osebje v obratu za obnovo pnevmatik. |
| --- | --- |

5.2

Poleg normalnih zahtev za začetno oceno obrata za obnovo pnevmatik se mora homologacijski organ prepričati, da so vsi postopki, delovanje, navodila in dokumentacija s specifikacijami, ki jo priskrbijo dobavitelji materiala, opisani v razumljivem jeziku za operativno osebje v obratu za obnovo pnevmatik.

| 5.3 | Homologacijski organ mora zagotoviti, da postopki in proizvodna dokumentacija za vsak obrat za obnovo pnevmatik vsebujejo podatke o uporabljenih materialih in postopkih za popravila, o mejah popravljivih poškodb ali predrtja do karkase pnevmatike, ne glede na to, če takšna poškodba že obstaja ali nastane med postopki priprave za obnovo. |
| --- | --- |

5.3

Homologacijski organ mora zagotoviti, da postopki in proizvodna dokumentacija za vsak obrat za obnovo pnevmatik vsebujejo podatke o uporabljenih materialih in postopkih za popravila, o mejah popravljivih poškodb ali predrtja do karkase pnevmatike, ne glede na to, če takšna poškodba že obstaja ali nastane med postopki priprave za obnovo.

| 5.4 | Pred podelitvijo homologacije se mora organ prepričati, da obnovljene pnevmatike ustrezajo temu pravilniku in da so predpisani preskusi iz točk 6.7 in 6.8 uspešno opravljeni na najmanj 5 in načeloma ne več kot 20 vzorcih obnovljenih pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo serijo pnevmatik, kakršne izdeluje obrat za obnovo pnevmatik. |
| --- | --- |

5.4

Pred podelitvijo homologacije se mora organ prepričati, da obnovljene pnevmatike ustrezajo temu pravilniku in da so predpisani preskusi iz točk 6.7 in 6.8 uspešno opravljeni na najmanj 5 in načeloma ne več kot 20 vzorcih obnovljenih pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo serijo pnevmatik, kakršne izdeluje obrat za obnovo pnevmatik.

| 5.5 | V primeru vsake napake, odkrite med preskusi, je treba preskusiti še dva nadaljnja vzorca pnevmatik z isto specifikacijo.
  Če kateri koli od končnih vzorcev, ali oba, ne ustrezata, se vloga za homologacijo obrata za obnovo pnevmatik zavrne. |
| --- | --- |

5.5

V primeru vsake napake, odkrite med preskusi, je treba preskusiti še dva nadaljnja vzorca pnevmatik z isto specifikacijo.

Če kateri koli od končnih vzorcev, ali oba, ne ustrezata, se vloga za homologacijo obrata za obnovo pnevmatik zavrne.

| 5.6 | Če so izpolnjene vse zahteve tega pravilnika, se izda homologacija in dodeli homologacijska številka vsakemu homologiranemu obratu za obnovo pnevmatik. Prvi dve števki te številke pomenita zaporedje sprememb, ki vključujejo najnovejše tehnične spremembe tega pravilnika ob času izdaje homologacije. Pred številko homologacije je „108 R“, ki pomeni, da se homologacija nanaša na pnevmatiko, ki je obnovljena v skladu z zahtevami tega pravilnika. Isti organ ne sme dodeliti iste številke drugemu obratu za obnovo pnevmatik, za katerega velja ta pravilnik. |
| --- | --- |

5.6

Če so izpolnjene vse zahteve tega pravilnika, se izda homologacija in dodeli homologacijska številka vsakemu homologiranemu obratu za obnovo pnevmatik. Prvi dve števki te številke pomenita zaporedje sprememb, ki vključujejo najnovejše tehnične spremembe tega pravilnika ob času izdaje homologacije. Pred številko homologacije je „108 R“, ki pomeni, da se homologacija nanaša na pnevmatiko, ki je obnovljena v skladu z zahtevami tega pravilnika. Isti organ ne sme dodeliti iste številke drugemu obratu za obnovo pnevmatik, za katerega velja ta pravilnik.

| 5.7 | Obvestilo o homologaciji ali razširitvi, zavrnitvi ali preklicu homologacije, ali o dokončni prekinitvi proizvodnje po tem pravilniku se sporoči strankam Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, v obliki, ki je skladna z vzorcem v Prilogi 1 k temu pravilniku. |
| --- | --- |

5.7

Obvestilo o homologaciji ali razširitvi, zavrnitvi ali preklicu homologacije, ali o dokončni prekinitvi proizvodnje po tem pravilniku se sporoči strankam Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, v obliki, ki je skladna z vzorcem v Prilogi 1 k temu pravilniku.

| 5.8 | Na vsako obnovljeno pnevmatiko v skladu s tem pravilnikom, in sicer na prostor za oznako iz točke 3.3, in poleg oznak, ki jih predpisuje točka 3.2, je treba vidno namestiti mednarodno oznako za homologacijo, ki vsebuje: |
| --- | --- |

5.8

Na vsako obnovljeno pnevmatiko v skladu s tem pravilnikom, in sicer na prostor za oznako iz točke 3.3, in poleg oznak, ki jih predpisuje točka 3.2, je treba vidno namestiti mednarodno oznako za homologacijo, ki vsebuje:

| 5.8.1 | krog, ki obkroža črko „E“, ki ji sledi številčna oznaka države, ki je podelila homologacijo (8); in |
| --- | --- |

5.8.1

krog, ki obkroža črko „E“, ki ji sledi številčna oznaka države, ki je podelila homologacijo (8); in

| 5.8.2 | številko homologacije, kakor je opisana v točki 5.6. |
| --- | --- |

5.8.2

številko homologacije, kakor je opisana v točki 5.6.

| 5.9 | V Prilogi 2 k temu pravilniku je primer razporeditve oznake za homologacijo. |
| --- | --- |

5.9

V Prilogi 2 k temu pravilniku je primer razporeditve oznake za homologacijo.

6.   ZAHTEVE

| 6.1 | Pnevmatike ne morejo biti sprejete v obnovo, če niso bile homologirane in ne nosijo oznake „E“ ali „e“, s tem, da ta zahteva ni obvezujoča najpozneje do 1. januarja 2000. |
| --- | --- |

6.1

Pnevmatike ne morejo biti sprejete v obnovo, če niso bile homologirane in ne nosijo oznake „E“ ali „e“, s tem, da ta zahteva ni obvezujoča najpozneje do 1. januarja 2000.

| 6.1.1 | Pnevmatike za velike hitrosti, ki imajo samo napis „ZR“ v oznaki velikosti pnevmatike in ne nosijo opisa rabe, se ne obnavljajo. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.1

Pnevmatike za velike hitrosti, ki imajo samo napis „ZR“ v oznaki velikosti pnevmatike in ne nosijo opisa rabe, se ne obnavljajo.

| 6.2 | Pnevmatik, ki so bile že obnovljene, se ne sprejme v nadaljnjo obnovo. |
| --- | --- |

6.2

Pnevmatik, ki so bile že obnovljene, se ne sprejme v nadaljnjo obnovo.

| 6.3 | Starost ogrodja pnevmatike, sprejete v obnovitev, ne sme presegati 7 let, kar je moč ugotoviti iz števk, ki pomenijo leto izdelave originalne pnevmatike; to je, pnevmatika označena z datumsko oznako „253“, se lahko sprejme v obnovo do konca leta 2000. |
| --- | --- |

6.3

Starost ogrodja pnevmatike, sprejete v obnovitev, ne sme presegati 7 let, kar je moč ugotoviti iz števk, ki pomenijo leto izdelave originalne pnevmatike; to je, pnevmatika označena z datumsko oznako „253“, se lahko sprejme v obnovo do konca leta 2000.

| 6.4 | Pogoji, ki morajo biti izpolnjeni pred obnovo: |
| --- | --- |

6.4

Pogoji, ki morajo biti izpolnjeni pred obnovo:

| 6.4.1 | pnevmatike morajo biti pred pregledom čiste in suhe; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.1

pnevmatike morajo biti pred pregledom čiste in suhe;

| 6.4.2 | pred „brušenjem“ je treba vsako pnevmatiko popolnoma pregledati tako znotraj kot zunaj, da bi zagotovili njeno primernost za obnovo; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.2

pred „brušenjem“ je treba vsako pnevmatiko popolnoma pregledati tako znotraj kot zunaj, da bi zagotovili njeno primernost za obnovo;

| 6.4.3 | pnevmatik z vidnimi poškodbami zaradi prekomerne obremenitve ali nezadostne napolnjenosti ni dovoljeno obnavljati; |
| --- | --- |

6.4.3

pnevmatik z vidnimi poškodbami zaradi prekomerne obremenitve ali nezadostne napolnjenosti ni dovoljeno obnavljati;

| 6.4.4 | pnevmatik, ki kažejo naslednje poškodbe, ni mogoče sprejeti v obnovo: |
| --- | --- |

6.4.4

pnevmatik, ki kažejo naslednje poškodbe, ni mogoče sprejeti v obnovo:

| 6.4.4.1 | (a) | obsežne razpoke v gumi, ki segajo vse do karkase; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.4.4.1

(a)

obsežne razpoke v gumi, ki segajo vse do karkase;

| (b) | predrtje karkase ali poškodba ogrodja pnevmatik s simbolom hitrosti večjim od „H“, razen če se tem ogrodjem ne določi nižjega simbola hitrosti; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

predrtje karkase ali poškodba ogrodja pnevmatik s simbolom hitrosti večjim od „H“, razen če se tem ogrodjem ne določi nižjega simbola hitrosti;

| (c) | predhodna popravila poškodb zunaj navedenih omejitev poškodb – glej točko. 5.3; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

predhodna popravila poškodb zunaj navedenih omejitev poškodb – glej točko. 5.3;

| (d) | prelom karkase; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

prelom karkase;

| (e) | precejšnja poškodba zaradi olj ali kemikalij; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

precejšnja poškodba zaradi olj ali kemikalij;

| (f) | več poškodb preblizu skupaj; |
| --- | --- |

(f)

več poškodb preblizu skupaj;

| (g) | poškodovana ali počena noga; |
| --- | --- |

(g)

poškodovana ali počena noga;

| (h) | nepopravljivo obraba ali poškodba notranje obloge; |
| --- | --- |

(h)

nepopravljivo obraba ali poškodba notranje obloge;

| (i) | poškodba noge, razen manjših poškodb samo na „gumi“; |
| --- | --- |

(i)

poškodba noge, razen manjših poškodb samo na „gumi“;

| (j) | izpostavljen kord zaradi obrabe tekalne plasti ali zdrsane bočnice; |
| --- | --- |

(j)

izpostavljen kord zaradi obrabe tekalne plasti ali zdrsane bočnice;

| (k) | nepopravljivo odstopanje tekalne plasti ali ločitev materiala bočnice od karkase; |
| --- | --- |

(k)

nepopravljivo odstopanje tekalne plasti ali ločitev materiala bočnice od karkase;

| (l) | poškodbe karkase na področju bočnice; |
| --- | --- |

(l)

poškodbe karkase na področju bočnice;

| 6.4.5 | karkase radialnih pnevmatik, kjer odstopajo pasovi, razen neznatne ohlapnosti roba pasu, se ne sprejmejo za obnovo. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.5

karkase radialnih pnevmatik, kjer odstopajo pasovi, razen neznatne ohlapnosti roba pasu, se ne sprejmejo za obnovo.

| 6.5 | Priprava: |
| --- | --- |

6.5

Priprava:

| 6.5.1 | po „brušenju“ in pred nanosom novega materiala je treba vsako pnevmatiko temeljito znova pregledati, vsaj od zunaj, da bi se prepričali, če je še primerna za obnovo; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.1

po „brušenju“ in pred nanosom novega materiala je treba vsako pnevmatiko temeljito znova pregledati, vsaj od zunaj, da bi se prepričali, če je še primerna za obnovo;

| 6.5.2 | celotna površina, na katero se nanese novi material, mora biti pripravljena brez pregrevanja. Obrušena površinska tekstura ne sme kazati globokih raztrganin ali prostih koncev materiala; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.2

celotna površina, na katero se nanese novi material, mora biti pripravljena brez pregrevanja. Obrušena površinska tekstura ne sme kazati globokih raztrganin ali prostih koncev materiala;

| 6.5.3 | kjer se uporabi predvulkanizirani material, morajo obrisi pripravljene površine ustrezati zahtevam proizvajalca materiala; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.3

kjer se uporabi predvulkanizirani material, morajo obrisi pripravljene površine ustrezati zahtevam proizvajalca materiala;

| 6.5.4 | prosti konci niti korda niso dovoljeni; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.4

prosti konci niti korda niso dovoljeni;

| 6.5.5 | med pripravo se ne sme poškodovati kord ogrodja pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.5

med pripravo se ne sme poškodovati kord ogrodja pnevmatike;

| 6.5.6 | poškodba pasu radialnih pnevmatik zaradi brušenja mora biti omejena na lokalizirano poškodbo zgolj zunanjega sloja; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.6

poškodba pasu radialnih pnevmatik zaradi brušenja mora biti omejena na lokalizirano poškodbo zgolj zunanjega sloja;

| 6.5.7 | omejitve poškodb zaradi brušenja pri diagonalnih pnevmatikah so: |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7

omejitve poškodb zaradi brušenja pri diagonalnih pnevmatikah so:

| 6.5.7.1 | pri sestavi z dvema vložkoma, ne sme biti nobene poškodbe karkase, razen lahke lokalizirane poškodbe zaradi brušenja na spoju ogrodja pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7.1

pri sestavi z dvema vložkoma, ne sme biti nobene poškodbe karkase, razen lahke lokalizirane poškodbe zaradi brušenja na spoju ogrodja pnevmatike;

| 6.5.7.2 | pri sestavi z dvema vložkoma, ki vsebuje tudi blažilnik pri pnevmatikah brez zračnic, ni dovoljena nobena poškodba karkase ali blažilnika; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7.2

pri sestavi z dvema vložkoma, ki vsebuje tudi blažilnik pri pnevmatikah brez zračnic, ni dovoljena nobena poškodba karkase ali blažilnika;

| 6.5.7.3 | pri sestavi z dvema vložkoma, ki vsebuje tudi blažilnik pri pnevmatikah z zračnico, je dovoljena le lokalizirana poškodba blažilnika; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7.3

pri sestavi z dvema vložkoma, ki vsebuje tudi blažilnik pri pnevmatikah z zračnico, je dovoljena le lokalizirana poškodba blažilnika;

| 6.5.7.4 | pri sestavi s štirimi ali več vložki pri pnevmatikah brez zračnic, ni dovoljena nobena poškodba karkase ali blažilnika; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7.4

pri sestavi s štirimi ali več vložki pri pnevmatikah brez zračnic, ni dovoljena nobena poškodba karkase ali blažilnika;

| 6.5.7.5 | pri sestavi s štirimi ali več vložki pri pnevmatikah z zračnico je dovoljena le poškodba skrajnega zunanjega sloja vložka v območju temena pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

6.5.7.5

pri sestavi s štirimi ali več vložki pri pnevmatikah z zračnico je dovoljena le poškodba skrajnega zunanjega sloja vložka v območju temena pnevmatike;

| 6.5.8 | izpostavljene jeklene dele je treba, takoj ko je mogoče, obdelati z ustreznim materialom, ki ga določi proizvajalec tega konkretnega materiala. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.8

izpostavljene jeklene dele je treba, takoj ko je mogoče, obdelati z ustreznim materialom, ki ga določi proizvajalec tega konkretnega materiala.

| 6.6 | Obnova: |
| --- | --- |

6.6

Obnova:

| 6.6.1 | izvajalec obnove mora zagotoviti, da bodisi proizvajalec ali dobavitelj materialov za popravila, vključno z zaplatami, prevzame odgovornost za naslednje:






  (a) | opredeli način uporabe in hrambe, če to zaprosi izvajalec obnove, v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bo material uporabil; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.6.1

izvajalec obnove mora zagotoviti, da bodisi proizvajalec ali dobavitelj materialov za popravila, vključno z zaplatami, prevzame odgovornost za naslednje:

(a)

opredeli način uporabe in hrambe, če to zaprosi izvajalec obnove, v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bo material uporabil;

| (b) | določi omejitve poškodb, za katere so materiali namenjeni, če to zaprosi izvajalec obnove, v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bo material uporabil; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

določi omejitve poškodb, za katere so materiali namenjeni, če to zaprosi izvajalec obnove, v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bo material uporabil;

| (c) | zagotovi, da so ojačene zaplate za pnevmatike primerne za predvideno uporabo, če se pravilno uporabljajo pri popravilih karkase; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

zagotovi, da so ojačene zaplate za pnevmatike primerne za predvideno uporabo, če se pravilno uporabljajo pri popravilih karkase;

| (d) | zagotovi, da zaplate vzdržijo v napolnjenih pnevmatikah, dvakratni največji tlak kot ga navede proizvajalec pnevmatik; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

zagotovi, da zaplate vzdržijo v napolnjenih pnevmatikah, dvakratni največji tlak kot ga navede proizvajalec pnevmatik;

| (e) | zagotovi primernost vseh drugih materialov za popravila za predvideno uporabo; |
| --- | --- |

(e)

zagotovi primernost vseh drugih materialov za popravila za predvideno uporabo;

| 6.6.2 | izvajalec obnove je odgovoren tudi za pravilno uporabo materialov za popravilo in mora zagotoviti, da je popravilo brezhibno in ne vsebuje nobenih napak, ki bi lahko vplivale na zadostno življenjsko dobo pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.2

izvajalec obnove je odgovoren tudi za pravilno uporabo materialov za popravilo in mora zagotoviti, da je popravilo brezhibno in ne vsebuje nobenih napak, ki bi lahko vplivale na zadostno življenjsko dobo pnevmatike;

| 6.6.3 | izvajalec obnove mora zagotoviti, da bodisi proizvajalec ali dobavitelj materialov za tekalno plast in bočnico izda specifikacije, ki veljajo za pogoje hrambe in uporabe materiala, in tako zagotovi kakovost materialov. Če izvajalec obnove tako zaprosi, morajo biti te informacije v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bodo materiali uporabili; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.3

izvajalec obnove mora zagotoviti, da bodisi proizvajalec ali dobavitelj materialov za tekalno plast in bočnico izda specifikacije, ki veljajo za pogoje hrambe in uporabe materiala, in tako zagotovi kakovost materialov. Če izvajalec obnove tako zaprosi, morajo biti te informacije v domačem jeziku dežele, v kateri se bodo materiali uporabili;

| 6.6.4 | izvajalec obnove mora tudi zagotoviti, da je material za popravila ali njegova zmes dokumentirana v potrdilu proizvajalca ali dobavitelja. Zmes materiala mora biti primerna za predvideno uporabo pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.4

izvajalec obnove mora tudi zagotoviti, da je material za popravila ali njegova zmes dokumentirana v potrdilu proizvajalca ali dobavitelja. Zmes materiala mora biti primerna za predvideno uporabo pnevmatike;

| 6.6.5 | obdelana pnevmatika mora biti čimprej po zaključenem popravilu in nanosu materiala vulkanizirana, najkasneje v skladu s specifikacijami proizvajalca materiala; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.5

obdelana pnevmatika mora biti čimprej po zaključenem popravilu in nanosu materiala vulkanizirana, najkasneje v skladu s specifikacijami proizvajalca materiala;

| 6.6.6 | pnevmatiko je treba vulkanizirati toliko časa pri ustrezni temperaturi in tlaku, ki sta predpisana za uporabljene materiale in opremo za obdelavo; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.6

pnevmatiko je treba vulkanizirati toliko časa pri ustrezni temperaturi in tlaku, ki sta predpisana za uporabljene materiale in opremo za obdelavo;

| 6.6.7 | mere kalupa za vulkanizacijo morajo ustrezati debelini novega materiala in velikosti obrušenega ogrodja. Pri obnovi radialnih pnevmatik je treba vulkanizirati samo v radialnih ali radialno deljenih kalupih; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.7

mere kalupa za vulkanizacijo morajo ustrezati debelini novega materiala in velikosti obrušenega ogrodja. Pri obnovi radialnih pnevmatik je treba vulkanizirati samo v radialnih ali radialno deljenih kalupih;

| 6.6.8 | debelina izvornega materiala po brušenju in povprečna debelina novega materiala pod tekalno plastjo mora biti po obnovi takšna kot določata točki 6.6.8.1 in 6.6.8.2. Debelino materiala na kateri koli točki po širini tekalne plasti ali okrog oboda pnevmatike je treba kontrolirati tako, da so izpolnjene določbe točk 6.7.5 in 6.7.6; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.8

debelina izvornega materiala po brušenju in povprečna debelina novega materiala pod tekalno plastjo mora biti po obnovi takšna kot določata točki 6.6.8.1 in 6.6.8.2. Debelino materiala na kateri koli točki po širini tekalne plasti ali okrog oboda pnevmatike je treba kontrolirati tako, da so izpolnjene določbe točk 6.7.5 in 6.7.6;

| 6.6.8.1 | za radialne in prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike (mm):
  1,5 ≤ (A+B) ≤ 5 (najmanj 1,5 mm; največ 5,0 mm)
  A ≥ 1 (najmanj 1,0 mm)
  B ≥ 0,5 (najmanj 0,5 mm)



  P.D. = globina profila
  X = ločnica obrušenja
  A = povprečna debelina novega materiala pod profilom
  B = najmanjša debelina izvornega materiala nad pasom po brušenju; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.8.1

za radialne in prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike (mm):

1,5 ≤ (A+B) ≤ 5 (najmanj 1,5 mm; največ 5,0 mm)

A ≥ 1 (najmanj 1,0 mm)

B ≥ 0,5 (najmanj 0,5 mm)

Image

P.D. = globina profila

X = ločnica obrušenja

A = povprečna debelina novega materiala pod profilom

B = najmanjša debelina izvornega materiala nad pasom po brušenju;

| 6.6.8.2 | za diagonalne pnevmatike:
  debelina izvornega materiala nad blažilnikom mora biti ≥ 0,00 mm;
  povprečna debelina novega materiala nad ločnico obrušenega ogrodja pnevmatike mora biti ≥ 2,00 mm;
  skupna debelina izvornega in novega materiala pod dnom kanalov v tekalni plasti mora biti ≥ 2,00 in ≤ 5,00 mm; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.8.2

za diagonalne pnevmatike:

debelina izvornega materiala nad blažilnikom mora biti ≥ 0,00 mm;

povprečna debelina novega materiala nad ločnico obrušenega ogrodja pnevmatike mora biti ≥ 2,00 mm;

skupna debelina izvornega in novega materiala pod dnom kanalov v tekalni plasti mora biti ≥ 2,00 in ≤ 5,00 mm;

| 6.6.9 | opis uporabe obnovljene pnevmatike ne sme vsebovati niti simbola za večjo hitrost niti višjega indeksa nosilnosti kot so pri originalni pnevmatiki za prvo življensko dobo; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.9

opis uporabe obnovljene pnevmatike ne sme vsebovati niti simbola za večjo hitrost niti višjega indeksa nosilnosti kot so pri originalni pnevmatiki za prvo življensko dobo;

| 6.6.10 | najmanjša zgornja hitrost obnovljene pnevmatike mora biti 120 km/h (simbol hitrosti „L“), in največja pa 300 km/h (simbol hitrosti „Y“); |
| --- | --- |

6.6.10

najmanjša zgornja hitrost obnovljene pnevmatike mora biti 120 km/h (simbol hitrosti „L“), in največja pa 300 km/h (simbol hitrosti „Y“);

| 6.6.11 | indikatorji obrabe so vključeni na naslednji način: |
| --- | --- |

6.6.11

indikatorji obrabe so vključeni na naslednji način:

| 6.6.11.1 | obnovljena pnevmatika mora imeti najmanj šest prečnih vrst z indikatorji obrabe, približno enakomerno razporejenih in nameščenih v vodilnih kanalih tekalne plasti. Indikatorji obrabe morajo biti takšni, da jih ni mogoče zamenjati za grebene materiala med rebri ali bloki tekalne plasti; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.11.1

obnovljena pnevmatika mora imeti najmanj šest prečnih vrst z indikatorji obrabe, približno enakomerno razporejenih in nameščenih v vodilnih kanalih tekalne plasti. Indikatorji obrabe morajo biti takšni, da jih ni mogoče zamenjati za grebene materiala med rebri ali bloki tekalne plasti;

| 6.6.11.2 | če pa so pnevmatike namenjene za platišča z normalnim premerom oznake 12 ali manj, so dovoljene štiri vrste indikatorjev obrabe; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.11.2

če pa so pnevmatike namenjene za platišča z normalnim premerom oznake 12 ali manj, so dovoljene štiri vrste indikatorjev obrabe;

| 6.6.11.3 | indikatorji obrabe morajo s točnostjo + 0,60/-0,00 mm prikazati stopnjo obrabe, ko kanali že niso globoki več kot 1,6 mm; |
| --- | --- |

6.6.11.3

indikatorji obrabe morajo s točnostjo + 0,60/-0,00 mm prikazati stopnjo obrabe, ko kanali že niso globoki več kot 1,6 mm;

| 6.6.11.4 | višina indikatorjev obrabe se določi z merjenjem razlike med globino, izmerjeno s površine tekalne plasti do vrha indikatorjev obrabe in dnom kanalov, tik ob nagibu ob vznožju indikatorjev obrabe. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.11.4

višina indikatorjev obrabe se določi z merjenjem razlike med globino, izmerjeno s površine tekalne plasti do vrha indikatorjev obrabe in dnom kanalov, tik ob nagibu ob vznožju indikatorjev obrabe.

| 6.7 | Pregled: |
| --- | --- |

6.7

Pregled:

| 6.7.1 | po vulkaniziranju, vendar dokler je pnevmatika še topla, je treba vsako obnovljeno pnevmatiko pregledati zaradi zagotovitve, da ni nobenih očitnih napak. Med obnovo ali po njej je treba pnevmatiko napolniti najmanj do 1,5 bara in jo pregledati. Če se odkrije kakšno očitno napako v profilu pnevmatike (npr. mehur, usad, itd.), je treba pnevmatiko posebej pregledati, da se določi vzrok za to napako; |
| --- | --- |

6.7.1

po vulkaniziranju, vendar dokler je pnevmatika še topla, je treba vsako obnovljeno pnevmatiko pregledati zaradi zagotovitve, da ni nobenih očitnih napak. Med obnovo ali po njej je treba pnevmatiko napolniti najmanj do 1,5 bara in jo pregledati. Če se odkrije kakšno očitno napako v profilu pnevmatike (npr. mehur, usad, itd.), je treba pnevmatiko posebej pregledati, da se določi vzrok za to napako;

| 6.7.2 | pred ali med obnovo, ali pa po njej, je treba pnevmatiko najmanj enkrat pregledati glede celovitosti zgradbe z ustrezno metodo pregleda; |
| --- | --- |

6.7.2

pred ali med obnovo, ali pa po njej, je treba pnevmatiko najmanj enkrat pregledati glede celovitosti zgradbe z ustrezno metodo pregleda;

| 6.7.3 | za namene kontrole kakovosti je treba na določenem številu obnovljenih pnevmatik opraviti preskus s porušnimi in/ali neporušnimi metodami ali pregled. Število tako pregledanih pnevmatik in rezultate je treba zapisati; |
| --- | --- |

6.7.3

za namene kontrole kakovosti je treba na določenem številu obnovljenih pnevmatik opraviti preskus s porušnimi in/ali neporušnimi metodami ali pregled. Število tako pregledanih pnevmatik in rezultate je treba zapisati;

| 6.7.4 | po obnovi morajo biti mere obnovljene pnevmatike pri merjenju, kot ga določa Priloga 6 k temu pravilniku, skladne z merami, izračunanimi po postopkih iz točke 7 ali iz Priloge 5 k temu pravilniku; |
| --- | --- |

6.7.4

po obnovi morajo biti mere obnovljene pnevmatike pri merjenju, kot ga določa Priloga 6 k temu pravilniku, skladne z merami, izračunanimi po postopkih iz točke 7 ali iz Priloge 5 k temu pravilniku;

| 6.7.5 | radialna neenakomernost obnovljene pnevmatike ne sme preseči 1,5 mm (+0,4 mm tolerance pri merjenju); |
| --- | --- |

6.7.5

radialna neenakomernost obnovljene pnevmatike ne sme preseči 1,5 mm (+0,4 mm tolerance pri merjenju);

| 6.7.6 | največja statična neuravnoteženost obnovljene pnevmatike, izmerjena ob premeru platišča, ne sme preseči 1,5 % mase pnevmatike; |
| --- | --- |

6.7.6

največja statična neuravnoteženost obnovljene pnevmatike, izmerjena ob premeru platišča, ne sme preseči 1,5 % mase pnevmatike;

| 6.7.7 | indikatorji obrabe morajo biti skladni z zahtevami točke 6.6.11. |
| --- | --- |

6.7.7

indikatorji obrabe morajo biti skladni z zahtevami točke 6.6.11.

| 6.8 | Preskus zmogljivosti: |
| --- | --- |

6.8

Preskus zmogljivosti:

| 6.8.1 | pnevmatike, ki so obnovljene v skladu s tem pravilnikom, morajo prestati preskus vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost, kot določa Priloga 7 k temu pravilniku; |
| --- | --- |

6.8.1

pnevmatike, ki so obnovljene v skladu s tem pravilnikom, morajo prestati preskus vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost, kot določa Priloga 7 k temu pravilniku;

| 6.8.2 | šteje se, da je obnovljena pnevmatika, ki po preskusu vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost ne kaže ločevanja tekalne plasti, vložka, korda, trganja ali loma korda, uspešno prestala preskus; |
| --- | --- |

6.8.2

šteje se, da je obnovljena pnevmatika, ki po preskusu vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost ne kaže ločevanja tekalne plasti, vložka, korda, trganja ali loma korda, uspešno prestala preskus;

| 6.8.3 | zunanji premer pnevmatike, izmerjen šest ur po preskusu vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost, ne sme odstopati za več kot ± 3,5 odstotka od zunanjega premera, izmerjenega pred preskusom. |
| --- | --- |

6.8.3

zunanji premer pnevmatike, izmerjen šest ur po preskusu vzdržljivosti obremenitev/hitrost, ne sme odstopati za več kot ± 3,5 odstotka od zunanjega premera, izmerjenega pred preskusom.

7.   MERE OBNOVLJENIH PNEVMATIK

| 7.1 | Pnevmatike, obnovljene po zahtevah tega pravilnika, morajo biti skladne s spodaj navedenimi merami: |
| --- | --- |

7.1

Pnevmatike, obnovljene po zahtevah tega pravilnika, morajo biti skladne s spodaj navedenimi merami:

| 7.1.1 | širina preseka: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.1

širina preseka:

| 7.1.1.1 | širina preseka se izračuna po naslednji enačbi:
  S = S1 + K (A – A1)
  kjer je:
  S: dejanska širina preseka v mm, kot je izmerjena na preskusnem platišču;
  S1: vrednost „konstrukcijske širine preseka“, ki se nanaša na merilno platišče, kot je navedeno v mednarodnem standardu za pnevmatike, ki jo navede izvajalec obnove za konkretno velikost pnevmatike;
  A: širina preskusnega platišča v milimetrih;
  A1: širina merilnega platišča v milimetrih, kot je navedeno v mednarodnem standardu za pnevmatike, ki jo navede izvajalec obnove za konkretno velikost pnevmatike.
  K: je faktor z vrednostjo 0,4; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.1.1

širina preseka se izračuna po naslednji enačbi:

S = S1 + K (A – A1)

kjer je:

S: dejanska širina preseka v mm, kot je izmerjena na preskusnem platišču;

S1: vrednost „konstrukcijske širine preseka“, ki se nanaša na merilno platišče, kot je navedeno v mednarodnem standardu za pnevmatike, ki jo navede izvajalec obnove za konkretno velikost pnevmatike;

A: širina preskusnega platišča v milimetrih;

A1: širina merilnega platišča v milimetrih, kot je navedeno v mednarodnem standardu za pnevmatike, ki jo navede izvajalec obnove za konkretno velikost pnevmatike.

K: je faktor z vrednostjo 0,4;

| 7.1.2 | zunanji premer: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2

zunanji premer:

| 7.1.2.1 | teoretični zunanji premer obnovljene pnevmatike se izračuna po enačbi:
  D = d + 2H
  kjer je:
  D: je teoretični zunanji premer v milimetrih;
  d: je dogovorjeno število, ki ga določa točka 2.21.3, v milimetrih;
  H: je nazivna višina preseka v mm in je enaka Sn, pomnožena z 0,01 Ra,
  kjer je:
  Sn: nazivna širina preseka v milimetrih;
  Ra: nazivno presečno razmerje.
  Vsi zgoraj navedeni simboli ustrezajo navedbam v označbi velikosti pnevmatike na njeni bočnici, v skladu z zahtevami iz točke 3.2.2 in kot je določeno v točki 2.21; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2.1

teoretični zunanji premer obnovljene pnevmatike se izračuna po enačbi:

D = d + 2H

kjer je:

D: je teoretični zunanji premer v milimetrih;

d: je dogovorjeno število, ki ga določa točka 2.21.3, v milimetrih;

H: je nazivna višina preseka v mm in je enaka Sn, pomnožena z 0,01 Ra,

kjer je:

Sn: nazivna širina preseka v milimetrih;

Ra: nazivno presečno razmerje.

Vsi zgoraj navedeni simboli ustrezajo navedbam v označbi velikosti pnevmatike na njeni bočnici, v skladu z zahtevami iz točke 3.2.2 in kot je določeno v točki 2.21;

| 7.1.2.2 | pri pnevmatikah, katerih oznaka velikosti je navedena v prvem stolpcu tabel v Prilogi 5 k Pravilniku ECE R 30, pa mora biti zunanji premer takšen, kot je naveden v navedenih tabelah; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2.2

pri pnevmatikah, katerih oznaka velikosti je navedena v prvem stolpcu tabel v Prilogi 5 k Pravilniku ECE R 30, pa mora biti zunanji premer takšen, kot je naveden v navedenih tabelah;

| 7.1.3 | način merjenja obnovljenih pnevmatik: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.3

način merjenja obnovljenih pnevmatik:

| 7.1.3.1 | mere obnovljenih pnevmatik morajo biti izmerjene v skladu s postopki, navedenimi v Prilogi 6 k temu pravilniku; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.3.1

mere obnovljenih pnevmatik morajo biti izmerjene v skladu s postopki, navedenimi v Prilogi 6 k temu pravilniku;

| 7.1.4 | zahteve za širino preseka: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4

zahteve za širino preseka:

| 7.1.4.1 | dejanska celotna širina je lahko manjša od širine ali širin preseka, določenih v točki 7.1; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.1

dejanska celotna širina je lahko manjša od širine ali širin preseka, določenih v točki 7.1;

| 7.1.4.2 | dejanska celotna širina je lahko večja od vrednosti, določenih v točki 7.1, za: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.2

dejanska celotna širina je lahko večja od vrednosti, določenih v točki 7.1, za:

| 7.1.4.2.1 | 4 odstotke pri radialnih pnevmatikah; in |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.2.1

4 odstotke pri radialnih pnevmatikah; in

| 7.1.4.2.2 | 6 odstotkov pri diagonalnih pnevmatikah, ali prepasanih diagonalnih pnevmatikah; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.2.2

6 odstotkov pri diagonalnih pnevmatikah, ali prepasanih diagonalnih pnevmatikah;

| 7.1.4.2.3 | če pa ima pnevmatika poseben zaščitni pas, je širina lahko večja do 8 mm nad odstopanji, ki jih navajata točki 7.1.4.2.1 in 7.1.4.2.2; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.4.2.3

če pa ima pnevmatika poseben zaščitni pas, je širina lahko večja do 8 mm nad odstopanji, ki jih navajata točki 7.1.4.2.1 in 7.1.4.2.2;

| 7.1.5 | zahteve za zunanji premer: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5

zahteve za zunanji premer:

| 7.1.5.1 | dejanski zunanji premer obnovljene pnevmatike ne sme biti izven vrednosti Dmin in Dmax, izračunanih po enačbah:
  Dmin = d + (2H x a)
  Dmax = d + (2H x b)
  kjer velja: |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1

dejanski zunanji premer obnovljene pnevmatike ne sme biti izven vrednosti Dmin in Dmax, izračunanih po enačbah:

Dmin = d + (2H x a)

Dmax = d + (2H x b)

kjer velja:

| 7.1.5.1.1 | za velikosti, ki niso navedene v tabelah v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku, ustrezata „H“ in „d“, določbam iz točke 7.1.2.1; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.1

za velikosti, ki niso navedene v tabelah v Prilogi 5 k temu pravilniku, ustrezata „H“ in „d“, določbam iz točke 7.1.2.1;

| 7.1.5.1.2 | za velikosti, navedene v točki 7.1.2.2 zgoraj:
  H = 0,5 (D – d)
  kjer je „D“ zunanji premer in „d“ nazivni premer platišča, naveden v zgoraj navedenih tabelah za konkretno velikost; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.2

za velikosti, navedene v točki 7.1.2.2 zgoraj:

H = 0,5 (D – d)

kjer je „D“ zunanji premer in „d“ nazivni premer platišča, naveden v zgoraj navedenih tabelah za konkretno velikost;

| 7.1.5.1.3 | koeficient „a“ = 0,97; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.1.3

koeficient „a“ = 0,97;

| 7.1.5.1.4 | koeficient „b“ je za: | Radialne pnevmatike | Diagonalne pnevmatike in prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Normalne pnevmatike | 1,04 | 1,08 |

7.1.5.1.4

koeficient „b“ je za:

Radialne pnevmatike

Diagonalne pnevmatike in prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike

Normalne pnevmatike

1,04

1,08

| 7.1.5.2 | za zimske pnevmatike, je lahko največji zunanji premer (Dmax), izračunan v točki 7.1.4.1 večji za največ 1 odstotek. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.5.2

za zimske pnevmatike, je lahko največji zunanji premer (Dmax), izračunan v točki 7.1.4.1 večji za največ 1 odstotek.

8.   SPREMEMBE HOMOLOGACIJE

| 8.1 | Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik mora vsako spremembo katere koli informacije, ki jih je obrat navedel v vlogi za homologacijo (glej točko 4), sporočiti homologacijskemu organu, ki je homologiral obrat za obnovo pnevmatik. Ta organ lahko potem: |
| --- | --- |

8.1

Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik mora vsako spremembo katere koli informacije, ki jih je obrat navedel v vlogi za homologacijo (glej točko 4), sporočiti homologacijskemu organu, ki je homologiral obrat za obnovo pnevmatik. Ta organ lahko potem:

| 8.1.1 | upošteva, da opravljene spremembe po vsej verjetnosti ne bodo imele opaznega neugodnega učinka in da obrat za obnovo pnevmatik v vsakem primeru izpolnjuje vse zahteve; ali |
| --- | --- |

8.1.1

upošteva, da opravljene spremembe po vsej verjetnosti ne bodo imele opaznega neugodnega učinka in da obrat za obnovo pnevmatik v vsakem primeru izpolnjuje vse zahteve; ali

| 8.1.2 | zahteva dopolnilno preiskavo homologacije. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.2

zahteva dopolnilno preiskavo homologacije.

| 8.2 | Potrditev ali zavrnitev homologacije, z navedbo sprememb, je treba sporočiti po postopku, določenem v točki 5.7 strankam Sporazuma, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik. |
| --- | --- |

8.2

Potrditev ali zavrnitev homologacije, z navedbo sprememb, je treba sporočiti po postopku, določenem v točki 5.7 strankam Sporazuma, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik.

9.   SKLADNOST PROIZVODNJE

Zagotovljena mora biti skladnost proizvodnih postopkov s postopki, navedenimi v Sporazumu, Priloga 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev. 2), ob naslednjih zahtevah.

| 9.1 | Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik, ki je homologiran po tem pravilniku, mora biti skladen z zahtevami iz točke 6. |
| --- | --- |

9.1

Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik, ki je homologiran po tem pravilniku, mora biti skladen z zahtevami iz točke 6.

| 9.2 | Imetnik homologacije mora zagotoviti, da se v vsakem letu proizvodnje in preko vsega leta pregleda in preskusi najmanj naslednje število pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo celotni obseg proizvodnje, kot predpisuje ta pravilnik: |
| --- | --- |

9.2

Imetnik homologacije mora zagotoviti, da se v vsakem letu proizvodnje in preko vsega leta pregleda in preskusi najmanj naslednje število pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo celotni obseg proizvodnje, kot predpisuje ta pravilnik:

| 9.2.1 | 0,01 odstotka skupne letne proizvodnje, vendar v nobenem primeru manj kot 5 in ne nujno več kot 20. |
| --- | --- |

9.2.1

0,01 odstotka skupne letne proizvodnje, vendar v nobenem primeru manj kot 5 in ne nujno več kot 20.

| 9.3 | Če je preverjanja iz točke 9.2 opravil sam homologacijski organ ali so bile opravljene pod njegovim nadzorom, se lahko rezultati uporabijo kot del ali namesto rezultatov preverjanj, ki jih predpisuje točka 9.4. |
| --- | --- |

9.3

Če je preverjanja iz točke 9.2 opravil sam homologacijski organ ali so bile opravljene pod njegovim nadzorom, se lahko rezultati uporabijo kot del ali namesto rezultatov preverjanj, ki jih predpisuje točka 9.4.

| 9.4 | Organ, ki je obratu za obnovo pnevmatik podelil homologacijo, lahko kadar koli preveri metode nadzora skladnosti, ki se uporabljajo v vsaki proizvodni enoti. Za vsako proizvodno enoto mora homologacijski organ vzeti naključne vzorce med vsakim letom proizvodnje in pregledati ter preskusiti vsaj naslednje število pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo celotni obseg proizvodnje, kot predpisuje ta pravilnik: |
| --- | --- |

9.4

Organ, ki je obratu za obnovo pnevmatik podelil homologacijo, lahko kadar koli preveri metode nadzora skladnosti, ki se uporabljajo v vsaki proizvodni enoti. Za vsako proizvodno enoto mora homologacijski organ vzeti naključne vzorce med vsakim letom proizvodnje in pregledati ter preskusiti vsaj naslednje število pnevmatik, ki predstavljajo celotni obseg proizvodnje, kot predpisuje ta pravilnik:

| 9.4.1 | 0,01 odstotka skupne letne proizvodnje, vendar v nobenem primeru manj kot 5 in ne več kot 20. |
| --- | --- |

9.4.1

0,01 odstotka skupne letne proizvodnje, vendar v nobenem primeru manj kot 5 in ne več kot 20.

| 9.5 | Preskusi in pregledi iz točke 9.4 lahko nadomestijo tiste, ki jih zahteva točka 9.2. |
| --- | --- |

9.5

Preskusi in pregledi iz točke 9.4 lahko nadomestijo tiste, ki jih zahteva točka 9.2.

10.   KAZNI ZA NESKLADNOST PROIZVODNJE

| 10.1 | Homologacija, podeljena obratu za obnovo pnevmatik po tem pravilniku, se lahko prekliče, če niso izpolnjene zahteve iz točke 9, ali če obrat za obnovo pnevmatik ali obnovljene pnevmatike, proizvedene v tem obratu, ne izpolnjujejo zahtev, ki jih predpisuje ta odstavek. |
| --- | --- |

10.1

Homologacija, podeljena obratu za obnovo pnevmatik po tem pravilniku, se lahko prekliče, če niso izpolnjene zahteve iz točke 9, ali če obrat za obnovo pnevmatik ali obnovljene pnevmatike, proizvedene v tem obratu, ne izpolnjujejo zahtev, ki jih predpisuje ta odstavek.

| 10.2. | Če stranka Sporazuma, ki uporablja ta pravilnik, prekliče homologacijo, ki jo je pred tem podelila, mora takoj obvestiti druge stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, s sporočilom na obrazcu, skladnem z vzorcem iz Priloge 1 k tem pravilniku. |
| --- | --- |

10.2.

Če stranka Sporazuma, ki uporablja ta pravilnik, prekliče homologacijo, ki jo je pred tem podelila, mora takoj obvestiti druge stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, s sporočilom na obrazcu, skladnem z vzorcem iz Priloge 1 k tem pravilniku.

11.   DOKONČNA PREKINITEV PROIZVODNJE

Organ, ki je dodelil homologacijo obratu za obnovo pnevmatik, mora biti obveščen, če poslovanje in proizvodnja homologiranih obnovljenih pnevmatik v okviru tega pravilnika prenehata. Ob prejemu te informacije mora organ o tem obvestiti druge stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, s sporočilom na obrazcu, skladnem z vzorcem iz Priloge 1 k temu pravilniku.

12.   IMENA IN NASLOVI TEHNIČNIH SLUŽB, PRISTOJNIH ZA HOMOLOGACIJSKE PRESKUSE, PRESKUSNIH LABORATORIJEV IN ADMINISTRATIVNIH ORGANOV

| 12.1 | Stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, morajo sporočiti Sekretariatu Združenih narodov imena in naslove tehničnih služb, ki so pristojne za izvedbo preskusov za homologiranje in, če je potrebno, pooblaščenih preskusnih laboratorijev in administrativnih organov, ki podeljujejo homologacije in katerim je treba poslati sporočila o podelitvi, zavrnitvi ali preklicu homologacije, izdane v drugih državah. |
| --- | --- |

12.1

Stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, morajo sporočiti Sekretariatu Združenih narodov imena in naslove tehničnih služb, ki so pristojne za izvedbo preskusov za homologiranje in, če je potrebno, pooblaščenih preskusnih laboratorijev in administrativnih organov, ki podeljujejo homologacije in katerim je treba poslati sporočila o podelitvi, zavrnitvi ali preklicu homologacije, izdane v drugih državah.

| 12.2 | Stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, lahko uporabljajo laboratorije proizvajalcev pnevmatik ali obratov za obnovo pnevmatik in lahko imenujejo kot odobrene preskusne laboratorije tiste laboratorije, ki so na ozemlju konkretne stranke ali na ozemlju druge stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, s pogojem, da je ta postopek predhodno sprejet s strani pristojnega administrativnega organa slednje. |
| --- | --- |

12.2

Stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, ki uporabljajo ta pravilnik, lahko uporabljajo laboratorije proizvajalcev pnevmatik ali obratov za obnovo pnevmatik in lahko imenujejo kot odobrene preskusne laboratorije tiste laboratorije, ki so na ozemlju konkretne stranke ali na ozemlju druge stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958, s pogojem, da je ta postopek predhodno sprejet s strani pristojnega administrativnega organa slednje.

| 12.3 | Kjer stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958 uporabljajo točko 12.2, so na svojo željo lahko prisotne pri preskusih. |
| --- | --- |

12.3

Kjer stranke Sporazuma iz leta 1958 uporabljajo točko 12.2, so na svojo željo lahko prisotne pri preskusih.

PRILOGA 1

SPOROČILO

(največji format: A 4 (210 x 297 mm))

Image

PRILOGA 2

PRIMER HOMOLOGACIJSKE OZNAKE

Image

Zgornja homologacijska oznaka, nameščena na obnovljeno pnevmatiko, pomeni, da je bil ta obrat za obnovo pnevmatik homologiran na Nizozemskem (E4) pod številko homologacije 108 R 002439, ki izpolnjuje zahteve tega pravilnika v izvirniku (00).

Homologacijska številka mora biti nameščena tik ob krogu in nad ali pod črko „E“, ali levo ali desno od te črke. Števke v homologacijski številki morajo biti na isti strani simbola „E“ in obrnjene v isto smer. Izogibati se je treba uporabi rimskih številk v homologacijski številki, da ne pride do zamenjave z drugimi simboli.

PRILOGA 3

PRIMER RAZPOREDITVE OZNAK OBNOVLJENIH PNEVMATIK

Primer oznak, ki jih morajo imeti obnovljene pnevmatike na trgu po uveljavitvi tega pravilnika

Image

| — | z nazivno širino preseka 185, |
| --- | --- |

—

z nazivno širino preseka 185,

| — | z nazivnim presečnim razmerjem 70, |
| --- | --- |

—

z nazivnim presečnim razmerjem 70,

| — | z radialno zgradbo (R), |
| --- | --- |

—

z radialno zgradbo (R),

| — | z nazivnim premerom platišča z oznako 14, |
| --- | --- |

—

z nazivnim premerom platišča z oznako 14,

| — | z opisom uporabe „89T“, ki pomeni nosilnost 580 kg, kar ustreza indeksu nosilnosti „89“ in največjo hitrostjo 190 km/h, kar ustreza simbolu hitrosti „T“, |
| --- | --- |

—

z opisom uporabe „89T“, ki pomeni nosilnost 580 kg, kar ustreza indeksu nosilnosti „89“ in največjo hitrostjo 190 km/h, kar ustreza simbolu hitrosti „T“,

| — | za rabo brez notranje zračnice („TUBELESS“), |
| --- | --- |

—

za rabo brez notranje zračnice („TUBELESS“),

| — | je zimska (M+S), |
| --- | --- |

—

je zimska (M+S),

| — | obnovljena v tednih 25, 26, 27 ali 28 leta 2003. |
| --- | --- |

—

obnovljena v tednih 25, 26, 27 ali 28 leta 2003.

Namestitev in vrstni red oznak, ki tvorijo oznako pnevmatike, mora biti naslednji:

| (a) | deli oznake velikosti, ki zajema nazivno širino preseka, nazivno presečno razmerje, simbol vrste zgradbe (kjer je primerno) in nazivni premer platišča, morajo biti skupaj, kot prikazuje gornji primer: 185/70 R 14; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

deli oznake velikosti, ki zajema nazivno širino preseka, nazivno presečno razmerje, simbol vrste zgradbe (kjer je primerno) in nazivni premer platišča, morajo biti skupaj, kot prikazuje gornji primer: 185/70 R 14;

| (b) | opis uporabe, ki obsega indeks nosilnosti in simbol za hitrost, mora biti blizu oznake velikosti. Lahko je pred oznako velikosti ali za njo, ali pa je postavljen nad ali pod njo; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

opis uporabe, ki obsega indeks nosilnosti in simbol za hitrost, mora biti blizu oznake velikosti. Lahko je pred oznako velikosti ali za njo, ali pa je postavljen nad ali pod njo;

| (c) | oznake „TUBELESS“, „REINFORCED“ in „M + S“ so lahko oddaljene od oznake za velikost; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

oznake „TUBELESS“, „REINFORCED“ in „M + S“ so lahko oddaljene od oznake za velikost;

| (d) | oznaka „RETREAD“ je lahko oddaljena od oznake velikosti. |
| --- | --- |

(d)

oznaka „RETREAD“ je lahko oddaljena od oznake velikosti.

PRILOGA 4

SEZNAM INDEKSOV NOSILNOSTI IN USTREZAJOČE NOSILNOSTI

| Indeks nosilnosti (LI) in nosilnost - kg |
| --- |
| LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg | LI | kg |
| 0 | 45 | 40 | 140 | 80 | 450 | 120 | 1 400 | 160 | 4 500 | 200 | 14 000 | 240 | 45 000 |
| 1 | 46,2 | 41 | 145 | 81 | 462 | 121 | 1 450 | 161 | 4 625 | 201 | 14 500 | 241 | 46 250 |
| 2 | 47,5 | 42 | 150 | 82 | 475 | 122 | 1 500 | 162 | 4 750 | 202 | 15 000 | 242 | 47 500 |
| 3 | 48,7 | 43 | 155 | 83 | 487 | 123 | 1 550 | 163 | 4 875 | 203 | 15 500 | 243 | 48 750 |
| 4 | 50 | 44 | 160 | 84 | 500 | 124 | 1 600 | 164 | 5 000 | 204 | 16 000 | 244 | 50 000 |
| 5 | 51,5 | 45 | 165 | 85 | 515 | 125 | 1 650 | 165 | 5 150 | 205 | 16 500 | 245 | 51 500 |
| 6 | 53 | 46 | 170 | 86 | 530 | 126 | 1 700 | 166 | 5 300 | 206 | 17 000 | 246 | 53 000 |
| 7 | 54,5 | 47 | 175 | 87 | 545 | 127 | 1 750 | 167 | 5 450 | 207 | 17 500 | 247 | 54 500 |
| 8 | 56 | 48 | 180 | 88 | 560 | 128 | 1 800 | 168 | 5 600 | 208 | 18 000 | 248 | 56 000 |
| 9 | 58 | 49 | 185 | 89 | 580 | 129 | 1 850 | 169 | 5 800 | 209 | 18 500 | 249 | 58 000 |
| 10 | 60 | 50 | 190 | 90 | 600 | 130 | 1 900 | 170 | 6 000 | 210 | 19 000 | 250 | 60 000 |
| 11 | 61,5 | 51 | 195 | 91 | 615 | 131 | 1 950 | 171 | 6 150 | 211 | 19 500 | 251 | 61 500 |
| 12 | 63 | 52 | 200 | 92 | 630 | 132 | 2 000 | 172 | 6 300 | 212 | 20 000 | 252 | 63 000 |
| 13 | 65 | 53 | 206 | 93 | 650 | 133 | 2 060 | 173 | 6 500 | 213 | 20 600 | 253 | 65 000 |
| 14 | 67 | 54 | 212 | 94 | 670 | 134 | 2 120 | 174 | 6 700 | 214 | 21 200 | 254 | 67 000 |
| 15 | 69 | 55 | 218 | 95 | 690 | 135 | 2 180 | 175 | 6 900 | 215 | 21 800 | 255 | 69 000 |
| 16 | 71 | 56 | 224 | 96 | 710 | 136 | 2 240 | 176 | 7 100 | 216 | 22 400 | 256 | 71 000 |
| 17 | 73 | 57 | 230 | 97 | 730 | 137 | 2 300 | 177 | 7 300 | 217 | 23 000 | 257 | 73 000 |
| 18 | 75 | 58 | 236 | 98 | 750 | 138 | 2 360 | 178 | 7 500 | 218 | 23 600 | 258 | 75 000 |
| 19 | 77,5 | 59 | 243 | 99 | 775 | 139 | 2 430 | 179 | 7 750 | 219 | 24 300 | 259 | 77 500 |
| 20 | 80 | 60 | 250 | 100 | 800 | 140 | 2 500 | 180 | 8 000 | 220 | 25 000 | 260 | 80 000 |
| 21 | 82,5 | 61 | 257 | 101 | 825 | 141 | 2 575 | 181 | 8 250 | 221 | 25 750 | 261 | 82 500 |
| 22 | 85 | 62 | 265 | 102 | 850 | 142 | 2 650 | 182 | 8 500 | 222 | 26 500 | 262 | 85 000 |
| 23 | 87,5 | 63 | 272 | 103 | 875 | 143 | 2 725 | 183 | 8 750 | 223 | 27 250 | 263 | 87 500 |
| 24 | 90 | 64 | 280 | 104 | 900 | 144 | 2 800 | 184 | 9 000 | 224 | 28 000 | 264 | 90 000 |
| 25 | 92,5 | 65 | 290 | 105 | 925 | 145 | 2 900 | 185 | 9 250 | 225 | 29 000 | 265 | 92 500 |
| 26 | 95 | 66 | 300 | 106 | 950 | 146 | 3 000 | 186 | 9 500 | 226 | 30 000 | 266 | 95 000 |
| 27 | 97,5 | 67 | 307 | 107 | 975 | 147 | 3 075 | 187 | 9 750 | 227 | 30 750 | 267 | 97 500 |
| 28 | 100 | 68 | 315 | 108 | 1 000 | 148 | 3 150 | 188 | 10 000 | 228 | 31 500 | 268 | 100 000 |
| 29 | 103 | 69 | 325 | 109 | 1 030 | 149 | 3 250 | 189 | 10 300 | 229 | 32 500 | 269 | 103 000 |
| 30 | 106 | 70 | 335 | 110 | 1 060 | 150 | 3 350 | 190 | 10 600 | 230 | 33 500 | 270 | 106 000 |
| 31 | 109 | 71 | 345 | 111 | 1 090 | 151 | 3 450 | 191 | 10 900 | 231 | 34 500 | 271 | 109 000 |
| 32 | 112 | 72 | 355 | 112 | 1 120 | 152 | 3 550 | 192 | 11 200 | 232 | 35 500 | 272 | 112 000 |
| 33 | 115 | 73 | 365 | 113 | 1 150 | 153 | 3 650 | 193 | 11 500 | 233 | 36 500 | 273 | 115 000 |
| 34 | 118 | 74 | 375 | 114 | 1 180 | 154 | 3 750 | 194 | 11 800 | 234 | 37 500 | 274 | 118 000 |
| 35 | 121 | 75 | 387 | 115 | 1 215 | 155 | 3 875 | 195 | 12 150 | 235 | 38 750 | 275 | 121 500 |
| 36 | 125 | 76 | 400 | 116 | 1 250 | 156 | 4 000 | 196 | 12 500 | 236 | 40 000 | 276 | 125 000 |
| 37 | 128 | 77 | 412 | 117 | 1 285 | 157 | 4 125 | 197 | 12 850 | 237 | 41 250 | 277 | 128 500 |
| 38 | 132 | 78 | 425 | 118 | 1 320 | 158 | 4 250 | 198 | 13 200 | 238 | 42 500 | 278 | 132 000 |
| 39 | 136 | 79 | 437 | 119 | 1 360 | 159 | 4 375 | 199 | 13 600 | 239 | 43 750 | 279 | 136 000 |

Indeks nosilnosti (LI) in nosilnost - kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

LI

kg

0

45

40

140

80

450

120

1 400

160

4 500

200

14 000

240

45 000

1

46,2

41

145

81

462

121

1 450

161

4 625

201

14 500

241

46 250

2

47,5

42

150

82

475

122

1 500

162

4 750

202

15 000

242

47 500

3

48,7

43

155

83

487

123

1 550

163

4 875

203

15 500

243

48 750

4

50

44

160

84

500

124

1 600

164

5 000

204

16 000

244

50 000

5

51,5

45

165

85

515

125

1 650

165

5 150

205

16 500

245

51 500

6

53

46

170

86

530

126

1 700

166

5 300

206

17 000

246

53 000

7

54,5

47

175

87

545

127

1 750

167

5 450

207

17 500

247

54 500

8

56

48

180

88

560

128

1 800

168

5 600

208

18 000

248

56 000

9

58

49

185

89

580

129

1 850

169

5 800

209

18 500

249

58 000

10

60

50

190

90

600

130

1 900

170

6 000

210

19 000

250

60 000

11

61,5

51

195

91

615

131

1 950

171

6 150

211

19 500

251

61 500

12

63

52

200

92

630

132

2 000

172

6 300

212

20 000

252

63 000

13

65

53

206

93

650

133

2 060

173

6 500

213

20 600

253

65 000

14

67

54

212

94

670

134

2 120

174

6 700

214

21 200

254

67 000

15

69

55

218

95

690

135

2 180

175

6 900

215

21 800

255

69 000

16

71

56

224

96

710

136

2 240

176

7 100

216

22 400

256

71 000

17

73

57

230

97

730

137

2 300

177

7 300

217

23 000

257

73 000

18

75

58

236

98

750

138

2 360

178

7 500

218

23 600

258

75 000

19

77,5

59

243

99

775

139

2 430

179

7 750

219

24 300

259

77 500

20

80

60

250

100

800

140

2 500

180

8 000

220

25 000

260

80 000

21

82,5

61

257

101

825

141

2 575

181

8 250

221

25 750

261

82 500

22

85

62

265

102

850

142

2 650

182

8 500

222

26 500

262

85 000

23

87,5

63

272

103

875

143

2 725

183

8 750

223

27 250

263

87 500

24

90

64

280

104

900

144

2 800

184

9 000

224

28 000

264

90 000

25

92,5

65

290

105

925

145

2 900

185

9 250

225

29 000

265

92 500

26

95

66

300

106

950

146

3 000

186

9 500

226

30 000

266

95 000

27

97,5

67

307

107

975

147

3 075

187

9 750

227

30 750

267

97 500

28

100

68

315

108

1 000

148

3 150

188

10 000

228

31 500

268

100 000

29

103

69

325

109

1 030

149

3 250

189

10 300

229

32 500

269

103 000

30

106

70

335

110

1 060

150

3 350

190

10 600

230

33 500

270

106 000

31

109

71

345

111

1 090

151

3 450

191

10 900

231

34 500

271

109 000

32

112

72

355

112

1 120

152

3 550

192

11 200

232

35 500

272

112 000

33

115

73

365

113

1 150

153

3 650

193

11 500

233

36 500

273

115 000

34

118

74

375

114

1 180

154

3 750

194

11 800

234

37 500

274

118 000

35

121

75

387

115

1 215

155

3 875

195

12 150

235

38 750

275

121 500

36

125

76

400

116

1 250

156

4 000

196

12 500

236

40 000

276

125 000

37

128

77

412

117

1 285

157

4 125

197

12 850

237

41 250

277

128 500

38

132

78

425

118

1 320

158

4 250

198

13 200

238

42 500

278

132 000

39

136

79

437

119

1 360

159

4 375

199

13 600

239

43 750

279

136 000

PRILOGA 5

OZNAČEVANJE VELIKOSTI IN MER PNEVMATIK

(v skladu s Pravilnikom ECE R 30)

Glej Prilogo 5 k Pravilniku ECE R 30

PRILOGA 6

NAČIN MERJENJA PNEVMATIK

| 1. | Priprava pnevmatike |
| --- | --- |

1.

Priprava pnevmatike

| 1.1 | Pnevmatiko je treba namestiti na preskusno platišče, kot določi izvajalec obnove, in napolniti s tlakom 3 do 3,5 bara. |
| --- | --- |

1.1

Pnevmatiko je treba namestiti na preskusno platišče, kot določi izvajalec obnove, in napolniti s tlakom 3 do 3,5 bara.

| 1.2 | Tlak pnevmatike je treba nastaviti na naslednje vrednosti: |
| --- | --- |

1.2

Tlak pnevmatike je treba nastaviti na naslednje vrednosti:

| 1.2.1 | za standardne prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike– na 1,7 bara; |
| --- | --- |

1.2.1

za standardne prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike– na 1,7 bara;

| 1.2.2 | za diagonalne pnevmatike – na: | Tlak (bar) za simbol za hitrost |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Število slojev | L, M, N | P, Q, R, S | T, U, H, V |
| 4 | 1,7 | 2,0 | — |
| 6 | 2,1 | 2,4 | 2,6 |
| 8 | 2,5 | 2,8 | 3,0 |

1.2.2

za diagonalne pnevmatike – na:

Tlak (bar) za simbol za hitrost

Število slojev

L, M, N

P, Q, R, S

T, U, H, V

4

1,7

2,0

—

6

2,1

2,4

2,6

8

2,5

2,8

3,0

| 1.2.3 | za standardne radialne pnevmatike – na 1,8 bara; |
| --- | --- |

1.2.3

za standardne radialne pnevmatike – na 1,8 bara;

| 1.2.4 | za ojačene pnevmatike – na 2,3 bara. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.4

za ojačene pnevmatike – na 2,3 bara.

| 2. | Postopek merjenja |
| --- | --- |

2.

Postopek merjenja

| 2.1 | Pnevmatika, nameščena na platišče, se mora prilagajati na temperaturo prostora najmanj 24 ur, razen če ni drugače navedeno v točki 6.8.3 tega pravilnika. |
| --- | --- |

2.1

Pnevmatika, nameščena na platišče, se mora prilagajati na temperaturo prostora najmanj 24 ur, razen če ni drugače navedeno v točki 6.8.3 tega pravilnika.

| 2.2 | Tlak pnevmatike se ponovno nastavi na vrednost, kot je navedena v točki 1.2 te priloge. |
| --- | --- |

2.2

Tlak pnevmatike se ponovno nastavi na vrednost, kot je navedena v točki 1.2 te priloge.

| 2.3 | Celotno širino se izmeri na šestih enako razmaknjenih točkah na obodu pnevmatike, ob upoštevanju debeline zaščitnih reber ali pasov. Kot celotna širina se vzame največji dobljeni odčitek. |
| --- | --- |

2.3

Celotno širino se izmeri na šestih enako razmaknjenih točkah na obodu pnevmatike, ob upoštevanju debeline zaščitnih reber ali pasov. Kot celotna širina se vzame največji dobljeni odčitek.

| 2.4 | Zunanji premer se izračuna iz meritve največjega oboda napolnjene pnevmatike. |
| --- | --- |

2.4

Zunanji premer se izračuna iz meritve največjega oboda napolnjene pnevmatike.

PRILOGA 7

POSTOPEK PRESKUSOV VZDRŽLJIVOSTI – OBREMENITEV/HITROST

(načelno skladno s prilogo 7 k pravilniku ECE R 30)

| 1. | Priprava pnevmatike |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 1.1 | Obnovljena pnevmatika se namesti na preskusno platišče, kot določi izvajalec obnove. |
| --- | --- |

1.1

Obnovljena pnevmatika se namesti na preskusno platišče, kot določi izvajalec obnove.

| 1.2 | Pnevmatika se napolni do ustreznega tlaka, kot je podan (v barih) v spodnji tabeli.











  Simbol hitrosti | Diagonalne pnevmatike | Radialne pnevmatike | Prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike s |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Število slojev | standardne | ojačene | standardne |
| 4 | 6 | 8 |
| L, M, N | 2,3 | 2,7 | 3,0 | 2,4 | — | — |
| P, Q, R, S | 2,6 | 3,0 | 3,3 | 2,6 | 3,0 | 2,6 |
| T, U, H | 2,8 | 3,2 | 3,5 | 2,8 | 3,2 | 2,8 |
| V | 3,0 | 3,4 | 3,7 | 3,0 | 3,4 | — |
| W in Y | | | | 3,2 | 3,6 | |

1.2

Pnevmatika se napolni do ustreznega tlaka, kot je podan (v barih) v spodnji tabeli.

Simbol hitrosti

Diagonalne pnevmatike

Radialne pnevmatike

Prepasane diagonalne pnevmatike s

Število slojev

standardne

ojačene

standardne

4

6

8

L, M, N

2,3

2,7

3,0

2,4

—

—

P, Q, R, S

2,6

3,0

3,3

2,6

3,0

2,6

T, U, H

2,8

3,2

3,5

2,8

3,2

2,8

V

3,0

3,4

3,7

3,0

3,4

—

W in Y

3,2

3,6

| 1.3 | Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik lahko zaprosi za uporabo drugačnega preskusnega tlaka, kot je naveden v točki 1.2 te priloge in navede razloge za to. V takem primeru mora biti pnevmatika napolnjena do želenega tlaka. |
| --- | --- |

1.3

Obrat za obnovo pnevmatik lahko zaprosi za uporabo drugačnega preskusnega tlaka, kot je naveden v točki 1.2 te priloge in navede razloge za to. V takem primeru mora biti pnevmatika napolnjena do želenega tlaka.

| 1.4 | Pnevmatika in sestav kolesa naj se prilagaja temperaturi v preskusnem prostoru najmanj 3 ure. |
| --- | --- |

1.4

Pnevmatika in sestav kolesa naj se prilagaja temperaturi v preskusnem prostoru najmanj 3 ure.

| 1.5 | Ponovno se nastavi tlak pnevmatike na vrednost, kot je navedena v točki 1.2 ali 1.3 te priloge. |
| --- | --- |

1.5

Ponovno se nastavi tlak pnevmatike na vrednost, kot je navedena v točki 1.2 ali 1.3 te priloge.

| 2. | Postopek preskusa |
| --- | --- |

2.

Postopek preskusa

| 2.1 | Pnevmatiko in sestavljeno kolo se namesti na preskusno os in jo pritisne ob zunanjo stran gladke površine preskusnega bobna s pogonom, s premerom 1,70 m ± 1 % ali 2,00 m ± 1 %. |
| --- | --- |

2.1

Pnevmatiko in sestavljeno kolo se namesti na preskusno os in jo pritisne ob zunanjo stran gladke površine preskusnega bobna s pogonom, s premerom 1,70 m ± 1 % ali 2,00 m ± 1 %.

| 2.2 | Preskusno os se obremeni z 80 % od: |
| --- | --- |

2.2

Preskusno os se obremeni z 80 % od:

| 2.2.1 | največje obremenitve po indeksu nosilnosti za pnevmatike s simboli hitrosti L do vključno H; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1

največje obremenitve po indeksu nosilnosti za pnevmatike s simboli hitrosti L do vključno H;

| 2.2.2 | največje obremenitve, povezane z največjo hitrostjo (glej točko 2.35.2 tega pravilnika):






  — | 240 km/h pri pnevmatikah simbola hitrosti „V“, |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.2.2

največje obremenitve, povezane z največjo hitrostjo (glej točko 2.35.2 tega pravilnika):

—

240 km/h pri pnevmatikah simbola hitrosti „V“,

| — | 270 km/h pri pnevmatikah simbola hitrosti „W“, |
| --- | --- |

—

270 km/h pri pnevmatikah simbola hitrosti „W“,

| — | 300 km/h pri pnevmatikah simbola hitrosti „Y“. |
| --- | --- |

—

300 km/h pri pnevmatikah simbola hitrosti „Y“.

| 2.3 | Med preskusom se tlak v pnevmatikah ne sme popravljati, preskusna obremenitev mora biti stalna. |
| --- | --- |

2.3

Med preskusom se tlak v pnevmatikah ne sme popravljati, preskusna obremenitev mora biti stalna.

| 2.4 | Med preskusom je treba vzdrževati temperaturo preskusnega prostora med 20 oC in 30 oC, razen če proizvajalec pnevmatik ali izvajalec obnove pnevmatik soglaša z višjo temperaturo. |
| --- | --- |

2.4

Med preskusom je treba vzdrževati temperaturo preskusnega prostora med 20 oC in 30 oC, razen če proizvajalec pnevmatik ali izvajalec obnove pnevmatik soglaša z višjo temperaturo.

| 2.5 | Program preskusa vzdržljivosti mora potekati brez prekinitve, in sicer: |
| --- | --- |

2.5

Program preskusa vzdržljivosti mora potekati brez prekinitve, in sicer:

| 2.5.1 | potrebni čas, da se od nič doseže začetno preskusno hitrost: 10 minut; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.1

potrebni čas, da se od nič doseže začetno preskusno hitrost: 10 minut;

| 2.5.2 | začetna preskusna hitrost: predpisana največja hitrost za zadevno pnevmatiko, zmanjšana za 40 km/h pri preskusnem bobnu premera 1,70 m ± 1 %, ali zmanjšana za 30 km/h pri preskusnem bobnu premera 2,00 m ± 1 %; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.2

začetna preskusna hitrost: predpisana največja hitrost za zadevno pnevmatiko, zmanjšana za 40 km/h pri preskusnem bobnu premera 1,70 m ± 1 %, ali zmanjšana za 30 km/h pri preskusnem bobnu premera 2,00 m ± 1 %;

| 2.5.3 | stopnje povečevanja hitrosti: 10 km/h do največje preskusne hitrosti; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.3

stopnje povečevanja hitrosti: 10 km/h do največje preskusne hitrosti;

| 2.5.4 | preskus traja na vsaki hitrostni stopnji, razen zadnje: 10 minut; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.4

preskus traja na vsaki hitrostni stopnji, razen zadnje: 10 minut;

| 2.5.5 | preskus traja na zadnji hitrostni stopnji: 20 minut; |
| --- | --- |

2.5.5

preskus traja na zadnji hitrostni stopnji: 20 minut;

| 2.5.6 | največja preskusna hitrost: predpisana največja hitrost za pnevmatiko, zmanjšana za 10 km/h v primeru preskusnega bobna s premerom 1,70 m ± 1 %, oziroma predpisana največja hitrost pri preskusnem bobnu s premerom 2,00 m ± 1 %. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.6

največja preskusna hitrost: predpisana največja hitrost za pnevmatiko, zmanjšana za 10 km/h v primeru preskusnega bobna s premerom 1,70 m ± 1 %, oziroma predpisana največja hitrost pri preskusnem bobnu s premerom 2,00 m ± 1 %.

| 3. | Enakovredni preskusni postopki
  Pri uporabi drugačnega preskusnega postopka, kot je opisan v točki 2 te priloge, je treba dokazati njeno enakovrednost. |
| --- | --- |

3.

Enakovredni preskusni postopki

Pri uporabi drugačnega preskusnega postopka, kot je opisan v točki 2 te priloge, je treba dokazati njeno enakovrednost.

PRILOGA 8

POJASNJEVALNA SLIKA

Glej odstavek 2 tega pravilnika.

Image

---

(1)  Standarde za pnevmatike je možno naročiti na naslednjih naslovih:

1

(2)  ETRTO, 32 Av. Brugmann – Bte 2, B-1060 Bruselj, Belgija

2

(3)  TRA, 175 Montrose West Avenue, Suite 150, Copley, Ohio, 44321 USA – ZDA

3

(4)  JATMA, 9th Floor, Toranomon Building No. 1-12, 1-Chome Toranomon Minato‐ku, Tokyo 105, Japonska

4

(5)  TRAA, Suite 1, Hawthorn House, 795 Glenferrie Road, Hawthorn, Victoria, 3122 Avstralija

5

(6)  ABPA, Avenida Paulista 2444-12o Andar, CEP, 124, 01310 Sao Paulo, SP Brazilija

6

o

(7)  STRO, Älggatan 48 A, Nb, S-216 15 Malmö, Švedska

7

(8)  1 za Nemčijo, 2 za Francijo, 3 za Italijo, 4 za Nizozemsko, 5 za Švedsko, 6 za Belgijo, 7 za Madžarsko, 8 za Češko, 9 za Španijo, 10 za Jugoslavijo, 11 za Združeno kraljestvo, 12 za Avstrijo, 13 za Luksemburg, 14 za Švico, 15 (prosto), 16 za Norveško, 17 za Finsko, 18 za Dansko, 19 za Romunijo, 20 za Poljsko, 21 za Portugalsko, 22 za Rusko federacijo, 23 za Grčijo, 24 za Irsko, 25 za Hrvaško, 26 za Slovenijo, 27 za Slovaško, 28 za Belorusijo, 29 za Estonijo, 30 (prosto), 31 za Bosno in Hercegovino, 32-36(prosto), 37 za Turčijo, 38-39 (prosto), 40 za Nekdanjo jugoslovansko republiko Makedonijo, 41 (prosto), 42 za Evropsko skupnost (homologacije podeljujejo države članice z uporabo svojih ECE simbolov), 43 za Japonsko. Naknadne številke se podelijo ostalim državam v kronološkem vrstnem redu glede na ratifikacijo ali pristop k Sporazumu o sprejetju enotnih tehničnih predpisov za cestna vozila, opremo in dele, ki jih je mogoče vgraditi in/ali uporabljati na cestnih vozilih, in o pogojih za vzajemno priznavanje homologacij, podeljenih na podlagi teh predpisov; tako dodeljene številke generalni sekretar Združenih narodov sporoči pogodbenicam Sporazuma.

8

---

| 4.7.2006 | SL EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN | Uradni list Evropske unije | L 181/53 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

4.7.2006

SL EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN

Uradni list Evropske unije

L 181/53

---

SKLEP SVETA

z dne 13. marca 2006

o pristopu skupnosti k Pravilniku št. 55 Gospodarske komisije Združenih narodov za Evropo o določbah o odobritvi mehanskih elementov za spenjanje med seboj povezanih cestnih vozil

(Besedilo velja za EGP)

(2006/444/ES)

SVET EVROPSKE UNIJE JE –

ob upoštevanju Pogodbe o ustanovitvi Evropske skupnosti,

ob upoštevanju Sklepa Sveta 97/836/ES z dne 27. novembra 1997 v pričakovanju pristopa Evropske skupnosti k Sporazumu Gospodarske komisije Združenih narodov za Evropo o sprejemu enotnih tehničnih predpisov za cestna vozila, opremo in dele, ki se lahko vgradijo v cestna vozila in/ali uporabijo na njih in na pogoje za vzajemno priznavanje homologacij, dodeljenih na podlagi teh predpisov („Revidiran sporazum iz leta 1958“) (1) in zlasti člena 3(3) in druge alinee člena 4(2) Sklepa,

ob upoštevanju predloga Komisije,

ob upoštevanju privolitve Evropskega parlamenta (2),

ob upoštevanju naslednjega:

| (1) | Standardne zahteve Pravilnika št. 55 (3) o določbah o odobritvi mehanskih elementov za spenjanje med seboj povezanih cestnih vozil so namenjene odpravljanju tehničnih ovir v trgovini z motornimi vozili med pogodbenicami in zagotovitvi visoke ravni varnosti in zaščite v delovanju vozil. |
| --- | --- |

(1)

Standardne zahteve Pravilnika št. 55 (3) o določbah o odobritvi mehanskih elementov za spenjanje med seboj povezanih cestnih vozil so namenjene odpravljanju tehničnih ovir v trgovini z motornimi vozili med pogodbenicami in zagotovitvi visoke ravni varnosti in zaščite v delovanju vozil.

| (2) | Pravilnik št. 55 ni bil vključen v Prilogo II Sklepa 97/836/ES zaradi neskladja s tehničnimi zahtevami in specifikacijami Skupnosti v času pristopa k Revidiranemu sporazumu iz leta 1958. |
| --- | --- |

(2)

Pravilnik št. 55 ni bil vključen v Prilogo II Sklepa 97/836/ES zaradi neskladja s tehničnimi zahtevami in specifikacijami Skupnosti v času pristopa k Revidiranemu sporazumu iz leta 1958.

| (3) | Z vidika kasnejših sprememb mora biti Pravilnik št. 55 vključen v sistem Skupnosti za homologacijo motornih vozil – |
| --- | --- |

(3)

Z vidika kasnejših sprememb mora biti Pravilnik št. 55 vključen v sistem Skupnosti za homologacijo motornih vozil –

SKLENIL:

Člen 1

1.   Skupnost uporablja Pravilnik št. 55 Gospodarske komisije Združenih narodov za Evropo o določbah o odobritvi mehanskih elementov za spenjanje med seboj povezanih cestnih vozil.

2.   Besedilo Pravilnika se priloži k temu sklepu.

Člen 2

Pravilnik št. 55 se vključi v sistem Skupnosti za homologacijo vozil.

Člen 3

Komisija o tem sklepu uradno obvesti generalnega sekretarja Združenih narodov.

V Bruslju, 13. marca 2006

Za Svet

Predsednik

M. BARTENSTEIN

---

(1)  UL L 346, 17.12.1997, str. 78.

1

(2)  Še ni objavljeno v Uradnem listu.

2

(3)  Dokument ZN E/ECE/324, E/ECE/TRANS/505, Rev. 1/Add. 54/Rev. 1 in Popravek št. 1.

3

---

AGREEMENT

Concerning the adoption of uniform technical prescriptions for wheeled vehicles, equipment and parts which can be fitted and/or be used on wheeled vehicles and the conditions for reciprocal recognition of approvals granted on the basis of these prescriptions (1)

(Revision 2, including the amendments which entered into force on 16 October 1995)

---

(1)  Former title of the Agreement.

---

Addendum 54:

REGULATION No 55

Revised version providing Revision 1 consolidated with Corrigendum 1 (1)

Uniform provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of combinations of vehicles

---

(1)  Corrigendum 1 to the 01 series of amendments, subject of depositary notification C.N.602.2002.TREATIES-1 dated 13 June 2002.

---

(Acts whose publication is obligatory)

Regulation No 55 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE).

Uniform provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of combinations of vehicles.

1.   SCOPE

| 1.1. | This Regulation lays down the requirements which mechanical coupling devices and components shall meet in order to be regarded internationally as being mutually compatible. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

This Regulation lays down the requirements which mechanical coupling devices and components shall meet in order to be regarded internationally as being mutually compatible.

| 1.2. | This Regulation applies to devices and components intended for: |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

This Regulation applies to devices and components intended for:

| 1.2.1. | motor vehicles and trailers intended to form a combination of vehicles (1); |
| --- | --- |

1.2.1.

motor vehicles and trailers intended to form a combination of vehicles (1);

| 1.2.2. | motor vehicles and trailers intended to form articulated vehicles (1), where the vertical load imposed on the motor vehicle by the trailer does not exceed 200 kN. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.2.

motor vehicles and trailers intended to form articulated vehicles (1), where the vertical load imposed on the motor vehicle by the trailer does not exceed 200 kN.

| 1.3. | This Regulation applies to: |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

This Regulation applies to:

| 1.3.1. | standard devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.3.; |
| --- | --- |

1.3.1.

standard devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.3.;

| 1.3.2. | non-standard devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.4.; |
| --- | --- |

1.3.2.

non-standard devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.4.;

| 1.3.3. | non-standard miscellaneous devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.5. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.3.

non-standard miscellaneous devices and components as defined in paragraph 2.5.

2.   DEFINITIONS

For the purposes of this Regulation:

| 2.1. | „mechanical coupling devices and components means” all those items on the frame, load-bearing parts of the bodywork and the chassis of the motor vehicle and trailer by means of which they are connected together to form the combination of vehicles or the articulated vehicles. Fixed or detachable parts for the attachment or operation of the mechanical coupling device or component are included. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

„mechanical coupling devices and components means” all those items on the frame, load-bearing parts of the bodywork and the chassis of the motor vehicle and trailer by means of which they are connected together to form the combination of vehicles or the articulated vehicles. Fixed or detachable parts for the attachment or operation of the mechanical coupling device or component are included.

| 2.2. | automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.
  In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

automatic coupling requirement is achieved if reversing the towing vehicle against the trailer is sufficient to engage the coupling completely, to lock it automatically and to indicate proper engagement of the locking devices without any external intervention.

In the case of hook type couplings automatic coupling requirement is achieved if opening and closing of the coupling locking device takes place without any external intervention when the drawbar eye is inserted into the hook.

| 2.3. | standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

standard mechanical coupling devices and components conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation. They are interchangeable within their class, independent of manufacturer.

| 2.4. | non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

non-standard mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform in all respects to the standard dimensions and characteristic values given in this Regulation but can be connected to standard coupling devices and components in the relevant class.

| 2.5. | non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6. such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

non-standard miscellaneous mechanical coupling devices and components do not conform to standard dimensions and characteristic values as given in this Regulation and cannot be connected to standard coupling devices and components. They include, for example, devices which do not correspond with any of the Classes A to L and T listed in paragraph 2.6. such as those intended for special, heavy transport use and miscellaneous devices conforming to existing national standards.

| 2.6. | mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows: |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

mechanical coupling devices and components are classified according to type as follows:

| 2.6.1. | Class A | Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head — see annex 5, paragraph 1. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.1.

Class A

Coupling balls and towing brackets employing a 50 mm diameter spherical device and brackets on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a coupling head — see annex 5, paragraph 1.

| 2.6.1.1. | Class A50-1 to 50-5 | Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.1.1.

Class A50-1 to 50-5

Standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixing.

| 2.6.1.2. | Class A50-X | Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.1.2.

Class A50-X

Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls and brackets.

| 2.6.2. | Class B | Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 2. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.2.

Class B

Coupling heads fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to the 50 mm diameter coupling ball on the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 2.

| 2.6.2.1. | Class B50-X | Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.2.1.

Class B50-X

Non-standard 50 mm diameter coupling heads.

| 2.6.3. | Class C | Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye — see annex 5, paragraph 3. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.3.

Class C

Drawbar couplings with a 50 mm diameter pin and with a jaw and an automatic closing and locking pin on the towing vehicle for connecting to the trailer by means of a drawbar eye — see annex 5, paragraph 3.

| 2.6.3.1. | Class C50-1 to 50-7 | Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.3.1.

Class C50-1 to 50-7

Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.

| 2.6.3.2. | Class C50-X | Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.3.2.

Class C50-X

Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar couplings.

| 2.6.4. | Class D | Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.4.

Class D

Drawbar eyes having a parallel hole suitable for a 50 mm diameter pin and fitted to the drawbar of trailers for connecting to automatic drawbar couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4.

| 2.6.4.1. | Class D50-A | Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.4.1.

Class D50-A

Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for welded attachment.

| 2.6.4.2. | Class D50-B | Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.4.2.

Class D50-B

Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for threaded attachment.

| 2.6.4.3. | Class D50-C& 50-D | Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.4.3.

Class D50-C& 50-D

Standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes for bolted attachment.

| 2.6.4.4. | Class D50-X | Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.4.4.

Class D50-X

Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter drawbar eyes.

| 2.6.5. | Class E | Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices — see annex 5, paragraph 5. |
| --- | --- | --- |
| | Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted. |
| | Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked. |
| | This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle. |

2.6.5.

Class E

Non-standard drawbars comprising overrun devices and similar items of equipment mounted on the front of the towed vehicle, or to the vehicle chassis, which are suitable for coupling to the towing vehicle by means of drawbar eyes, coupling heads or similar coupling devices — see annex 5, paragraph 5.

Drawbars may be hinged to move freely in a vertical plane and not support any vertical load or be fixed in a vertical plane so as to support a vertical load (Rigid drawbars). Rigid drawbars can be entirely rigid or be flexibly mounted.

Drawbars may comprise more than one component and may be adjustable or cranked.

This Regulation applies to drawbars which are separate units, not an integral part of the chassis of the towed vehicle.

| 2.6.6. | Class F | Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the load-bearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 6. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.6.

Class F

Non-standard drawbeams comprising all components and devices between the coupling devices, such as coupling balls and drawbar couplings, and the frame (for example the rear cross member), the load-bearing bodywork or the chassis of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 6.

| 2.6.7. | Class G | Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer — see annex 5, paragraph 7. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.7.

Class G

Fifth wheel couplings are plate type couplings having an automatic coupling lock and are fitted to the towing vehicle for connecting with a 50 mm diameter fifth wheel coupling pin fitted to a semitrailer — see annex 5, paragraph 7.

| 2.6.7.1. | Class G50 | Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.7.1.

Class G50

Standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.

| 2.6.7.2. | Class G50-X | Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.7.2.

Class G50-X

Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel couplings.

| 2.6.8. | Class H | Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 8. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.8.

Class H

Fifth wheel coupling pins, 50 mm diameter, are devices fitted to a semitrailer to connect with the fifth wheel coupling of the towing vehicle — see annex 5, paragraph 8.

| 2.6.8.1. | Class H50-X | Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.8.1.

Class H50-X

Non-standard 50 mm pin diameter fifth wheel coupling pins.

| 2.6.9. | Class J | Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel — see annex 5, paragraph 9. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.9.

Class J

Non-standard mounting plates comprising all components and devices for attaching fifth wheel couplings to the frame or chassis of the towing vehicle. The mounting plate may have provision for moving horizontally, that is to form a sliding fifth wheel — see annex 5, paragraph 9.

| 2.6.10. | Class K | Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes — see annex 5, paragraph 10. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.10.

Class K

Standard, hook type couplings intended for use with appropriate Class L type toroidal drawbar eyes — see annex 5, paragraph 10.

| 2.6.11. | Class L | Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.11.

Class L

Standard toroidal drawbar eyes for use with appropriate Class K hook type couplings — see annex 5, paragraph 4.

| 2.6.12. | Class S | Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.12.

Class S

Devices and components which do not conform to any of the Classes A to L or T above and which are used, for example, for special heavy transport or are devices unique to some countries and covered by existing national standards.

| 2.6.13. | Class T | Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.6.13.

Class T

Non-standard, non-automatic dedicated drawbar type couplings which are able to be separated only by the use of tools and are typically used for trailers of car transporters. They shall be approved as a matched pair.

| 2.7. | Steering wedges are devices or components mounted on semitrailers which control positive steering of the trailer in conjunction with the fifth wheel coupling. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

Steering wedges are devices or components mounted on semitrailers which control positive steering of the trailer in conjunction with the fifth wheel coupling.

| 2.8. | Remote control systems are devices and components which enable the coupling device to be operated from the side of the vehicle or from the driving cab of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

Remote control systems are devices and components which enable the coupling device to be operated from the side of the vehicle or from the driving cab of the vehicle.

| 2.9. | Remote indicators are devices and components which give an indication in the vehicle cab that coupling has been effected and that the locking devices have engaged. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.

Remote indicators are devices and components which give an indication in the vehicle cab that coupling has been effected and that the locking devices have engaged.

| 2.10. | „type of coupling device or component” means a device or component which does not differ in such essential respects as: |
| --- | --- |

2.10.

„type of coupling device or component” means a device or component which does not differ in such essential respects as:

| 2.10.1. | the manufacturer's or supplier s trade name or mark; |
| --- | --- |

2.10.1.

the manufacturer's or supplier s trade name or mark;

| 2.10.2. | the class of coupling as defined in paragraph 2.6.; |
| --- | --- |

2.10.2.

the class of coupling as defined in paragraph 2.6.;

| 2.10.3. | the external shape, principal dimensions or fundamental difference in design including materials used; and |
| --- | --- |

2.10.3.

the external shape, principal dimensions or fundamental difference in design including materials used; and

| 2.10.4. | the characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U as defined in paragraph 2.11. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.4.

the characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U as defined in paragraph 2.11.

| 2.11. | The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as: |
| --- | --- |

2.11.

The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U are defined or determined as:

| 2.11.1. | The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for horizontal loads in the dynamic tests. For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support imposed vertical loads, the value is:
  D = g ((T · R)/(T + R)) kN
  For mechanical coupling devices and components for centre axle trailers as defined in 2.13, the value is:
  Dc = g ((T · C)/(T + C)) kN
  For fifth wheel couplings of Class G, fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H and mounting plates of Class J, as defined in paragraph 2.6., the value is:
  D = g ((0,6 · T ·R)/(T + R-U)) kN
  where:






  T | is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer. (2) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| R | is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. (2) |
| C | is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass (2). For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers (3) the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle. |
| g | is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9,81 m/s2 |
| U | is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2. |
| S | is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3. |

2.11.1.

The D or Dc value is the theoretical reference value for the horizontal forces in the towing vehicle and the trailer and is used as the basis for horizontal loads in the dynamic tests. For mechanical coupling devices and components not designed to support imposed vertical loads, the value is:

D = g ((T · R)/(T + R)) kN

For mechanical coupling devices and components for centre axle trailers as defined in 2.13, the value is:

Dc = g ((T · C)/(T + C)) kN

For fifth wheel couplings of Class G, fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H and mounting plates of Class J, as defined in paragraph 2.6., the value is:

D = g ((0,6 · T ·R)/(T + R-U)) kN

where:

T

is the technically permissible maximum mass of the towing vehicle, in tonnes. Where relevant, this includes the vertical load imposed by a centre axle trailer. (2)

R

is the technically permissible maximum mass, in tonnes, of a trailer with drawbar free to move in a vertical plane, or of a semitrailer. (2)

C

is the mass, in tonnes, transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., when coupled to the towing vehicle and loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass (2). For Category O1 and O2 centre axle trailers (3) the technically permissible maximum mass will be that declared by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle.

g

is the acceleration due to gravity (assumed to be 9,81 m/s2

U

is as defined in paragraph 2.11.2.

S

is as defined in paragraph 2.11.3.

| 2.11.2. | The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass (2) |
| --- | --- |

2.11.2.

The U value is the vertical mass, in tonnes, imposed on the fifth wheel coupling by the semitrailer of technically permissible maximum mass (2)

| 2.11.3. | The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass (2) |
| --- | --- |

2.11.3.

The S value is the vertical mass, in kilograms, imposed on the coupling, under static conditions, by the centre axle trailer, as defined in paragraph 2.13., of technically permissible maximum mass (2)

| 2.11.4. | The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests.

  V = (a · C · X2) / L2
  (See the Note below)
  where:






  a | is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle. |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.11.4.

The V value is the theoretical reference value of the amplitude of the vertical force imposed on the coupling by the centre axle trailer of technically permissible maximum mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. The V value is used as the basis for vertical forces in the dynamic tests.

V = (a · C · X2) / L2
  (See the Note below)

where:

a

is an equivalent vertical acceleration at the coupling depending on the type of suspension system of the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

For air suspension (or suspension systems with equivalent damping characteristics)

a = 1n8 m/s2

For other types of suspension:

a = 2n4 m/s2

| X | is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1) |
| --- | --- |

X

is the length of the loading area of the trailer, in metres (see Figure 1)

| L | is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1) |
| --- | --- |

L

is the distance from the centre of the drawbar eye to the centre of the axle assembly, in metres (see Figure 1)

Note: (X2 / L2) ≥ 1,0

(If less than 1,0, the value of 1,0 shall be used)

Figure 1

Dimensions of the centre axle trailer

Image

| 2.12. | Symbols and definitions used in annex 6 of this Regulation.






  Av | = | maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes. |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| C | = | mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation. |
| D | = | D value in kN — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation. |
| Dc | = | Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation. |
| R | = | mass of towed vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation. |
| T | = | mass of towing vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation. |
| Fa | = | static lifting force in kN. |
| Fh | = | horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN. |
| Fs | = | vertical component of test force in kN. |
| S | = | static vertical mass in kg. |
| U | = | fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes. |
| V | = | V-value in kN — see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation. |
| a | = | equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle — see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation. |
| e | = | longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm. |
| f | = | vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm. |
| g | = | acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9,81 m/s2. |
| L | = | theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in metres. |
| X | = | length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in metres. |
| Subscripts: |
| O | = | maximum test force |
| U | = | minimum test force |
| a | = | static force |
| h | = | horizontal |
| p | = | pulsating |
| res | = | resultant |
| s | = | vertical |
| w | = | alternating force |

2.12.

Av

=

maximum permitted axle mass of the steered axle in tonnes.

C

=

mass of centre axle trailer in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.

D

=

D value in kN — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.

Dc

=

Dc value in kN for centre axle trailers — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.

R

=

mass of towed vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.

T

=

mass of towing vehicle in tonnes — see paragraph 2.11.1. of this Regulation.

Fa

=

static lifting force in kN.

Fh

=

horizontal component of test force in longitudinal axis of vehicle in kN.

Fs

=

vertical component of test force in kN.

S

=

static vertical mass in kg.

U

=

fifth wheel imposed vertical mass in tonnes.

V

=

V-value in kN — see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.

a

=

equivalent vertical acceleration factor at the coupling point of centre axle trailers depending on the type of suspension of the rear axle(s) of the towing vehicle — see paragraph 2.11.4. of this Regulation.

e

=

longitudinal distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the vertical plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.

f

=

vertical distance between the coupling point of coupling balls which can be dismantled and the horizontal plane of the fixing points (see Figures 20c to 20f) in mm.

g

=

acceleration due to gravity, assumed as 9,81 m/s2.

L

=

theoretical drawbar length between the centre of the drawbar eye and the centre of the axle assembly in metres.

X

=

length of the loading area of a centre axle trailer in metres.

Subscripts:

O

=

maximum test force

U

=

minimum test force

a

=

static force

h

=

horizontal

p

=

pulsating

res

=

resultant

s

=

vertical

w

=

alternating force

| 2.13. | „Centre axle trailer” means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser. The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass (4). |
| --- | --- |

2.13.

„Centre axle trailer” means a trailer having a drawbar which cannot move in a vertical plane independent of the trailer and having an axle or axles positioned close to the centre of gravity of the trailer, when uniformly loaded. The vertical load imposed on the coupling of the towing vehicle shall not exceed 10 per cent of the maximum mass of the trailer, or 1 000 kg, whichever is the lesser. The maximum mass of the centre axle trailer means the total mass transmitted to the ground by the axle or axles of the trailer when coupled to a towing vehicle and when loaded to the technically permissible maximum mass (4).

| 2.14. | „Positive mechanical engagement” means that the design and geometry of a device and its component parts shall be such that it will not open or disengage under the action of any forces or components of forces to which it is subject during normal use or testing. |
| --- | --- |

2.14.

„Positive mechanical engagement” means that the design and geometry of a device and its component parts shall be such that it will not open or disengage under the action of any forces or components of forces to which it is subject during normal use or testing.

| 2.15. | „Vehicle type” means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the structure, dimensions, shape and materials in areas to which the mechanical coupling device or component is affixed. This applies to both the towing vehicle and trailer. |
| --- | --- |

2.15.

„Vehicle type” means vehicles which do not differ in such essential respects as the structure, dimensions, shape and materials in areas to which the mechanical coupling device or component is affixed. This applies to both the towing vehicle and trailer.

3.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL OF A MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICE OR COMPONENT

| 3.1. | The application for approval shall be submitted by the holder of the trade name or mark or by his duly accredited representative. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

The application for approval shall be submitted by the holder of the trade name or mark or by his duly accredited representative.

| 3.2. | For each type of mechanical coupling device or component the application shall be accompanied by the following information, for example, by means of the Communication form given in annex 1: |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

For each type of mechanical coupling device or component the application shall be accompanied by the following information, for example, by means of the Communication form given in annex 1:

| 3.2.1. | details of all manufacturer's or supplier's trade names or marks to be applied to the coupling device or component; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

details of all manufacturer's or supplier's trade names or marks to be applied to the coupling device or component;

| 3.2.2. | three sets of drawings which are sufficiently detailed to define the device or component and which specify how it is to be fitted to the vehicle; the drawings shall show the position and space provided for the approval number and other marking as given in paragraph 7.; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

three sets of drawings which are sufficiently detailed to define the device or component and which specify how it is to be fitted to the vehicle; the drawings shall show the position and space provided for the approval number and other marking as given in paragraph 7.;

| 3.2.3. | a statement of the values of D, Dc, S, V and U as applicable and as defined in paragraph 2.11.
  For Class A towing brackets a statement of the maximum permissible towing vehicle and trailer masses and the maximum permissible static vertical imposed load on the tow ball as advised by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

a statement of the values of D, Dc, S, V and U as applicable and as defined in paragraph 2.11.

For Class A towing brackets a statement of the maximum permissible towing vehicle and trailer masses and the maximum permissible static vertical imposed load on the tow ball as advised by the manufacturer of the towing vehicle;

| 3.2.3.1. | The characteristic values shall be at least equal to those applicable to the maximum permissible towing vehicle, trailer and combination masses. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.1.

The characteristic values shall be at least equal to those applicable to the maximum permissible towing vehicle, trailer and combination masses.

| 3.2.4. | a detailed technical description of the device or component, specifying, in particular, the type and the materials used; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.

a detailed technical description of the device or component, specifying, in particular, the type and the materials used;

| 3.2.5. | restrictions on the vehicles to which the coupling may be fitted — see annex 1, paragraph 12 and annex 5, paragraph 3.4.; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.

restrictions on the vehicles to which the coupling may be fitted — see annex 1, paragraph 12 and annex 5, paragraph 3.4.;

| 3.2.6. | one sample, plus additional samples as requested by the type approval authority or technical service; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6.

one sample, plus additional samples as requested by the type approval authority or technical service;

| 3.2.7. | all samples shall be fully finished with the final surface treatment applied. However, if the final treatment is by painting or epoxy powder coating, this should be omitted; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.7.

all samples shall be fully finished with the final surface treatment applied. However, if the final treatment is by painting or epoxy powder coating, this should be omitted;

| 3.2.8. | in the case of a mechanical coupling device or component designed for a specific vehicle type, the manufacturer of the device or component shall also submit the installation data given by the vehicle manufacturer. The approval authority or technical service may also request that a vehicle representative of the type be submitted. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.8.

in the case of a mechanical coupling device or component designed for a specific vehicle type, the manufacturer of the device or component shall also submit the installation data given by the vehicle manufacturer. The approval authority or technical service may also request that a vehicle representative of the type be submitted.

4.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICES OR COMPONENTS

| 4.1. | Each sample shall conform to the dimensional and strength specifications set out in annexes 5 and 6. Following the tests specified in annex 6 there shall not be any cracks, fractures or any excessive permanent distortion which would be detrimental to the satisfactory operation of the device or component. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.

Each sample shall conform to the dimensional and strength specifications set out in annexes 5 and 6. Following the tests specified in annex 6 there shall not be any cracks, fractures or any excessive permanent distortion which would be detrimental to the satisfactory operation of the device or component.

| 4.2. | All parts of the mechanical coupling device or component whose failure could result in separation of the vehicle and trailer shall be made of steel. Other materials may be used provided that equivalence has been demonstrated by the manufacturer to the satisfaction of the type approval authority or technical service of the Contracting Party applying this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

All parts of the mechanical coupling device or component whose failure could result in separation of the vehicle and trailer shall be made of steel. Other materials may be used provided that equivalence has been demonstrated by the manufacturer to the satisfaction of the type approval authority or technical service of the Contracting Party applying this Regulation.

| 4.3. | The mechanical coupling devices or components shall be safe to operate and coupling and uncoupling shall be possible by one person without the use of tools. With the exception of Class T couplings only devices which allow automatic coupling shall be allowed for the coupling of trailers having a maximum technically permissible mass greater than 3,5 tonnes. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.

The mechanical coupling devices or components shall be safe to operate and coupling and uncoupling shall be possible by one person without the use of tools. With the exception of Class T couplings only devices which allow automatic coupling shall be allowed for the coupling of trailers having a maximum technically permissible mass greater than 3,5 tonnes.

| 4.4. | The mechanical coupling devices or components shall be designed and manufactured such that in normal use and with correct maintenance and replacement of wearing parts they will continue to function satisfactorily and retain the characteristics prescribed by this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.

The mechanical coupling devices or components shall be designed and manufactured such that in normal use and with correct maintenance and replacement of wearing parts they will continue to function satisfactorily and retain the characteristics prescribed by this Regulation.

| 4.5. | All mechanical coupling devices or components shall be designed to have positive mechanical engagement and the closed position shall be locked at least once by further positive mechanical engagement unless further requirements are stated in annex 5. Alternatively there may be two or more separate arrangements to ensure the integrity of the device but each arrangement shall be designed to have positive mechanical engagement and shall be tested individually to any requirements given in annex 6. Positive mechanical engagement shall be as defined in paragraph 2.14.
  Spring forces may be used only to close the device and to prevent the effects of vibration from causing component parts of the device to move to positions where it may open or disengage.
  The failure or omission of any one single spring shall not allow the complete device to open or disengage. |
| --- | --- |

4.5.

All mechanical coupling devices or components shall be designed to have positive mechanical engagement and the closed position shall be locked at least once by further positive mechanical engagement unless further requirements are stated in annex 5. Alternatively there may be two or more separate arrangements to ensure the integrity of the device but each arrangement shall be designed to have positive mechanical engagement and shall be tested individually to any requirements given in annex 6. Positive mechanical engagement shall be as defined in paragraph 2.14.

Spring forces may be used only to close the device and to prevent the effects of vibration from causing component parts of the device to move to positions where it may open or disengage.

The failure or omission of any one single spring shall not allow the complete device to open or disengage.

| 4.6. | Every device or component shall be accompanied by installation and operating instructions giving sufficient information for any competent person to install it correctly on the vehicle and operate it properly — see also annex 7. The instructions shall be in at least the language of the country in which it will be offered for sale. In the case of devices and components supplied for original equipment fitting by a vehicle manufacturer or bodybuilder, installation instructions may be dispensed with but the vehicle manufacturer or bodybuilder will be responsible for ensuring that the vehicle operator is supplied with the necessary instructions for correct operation of the coupling device or component. |
| --- | --- |

4.6.

Every device or component shall be accompanied by installation and operating instructions giving sufficient information for any competent person to install it correctly on the vehicle and operate it properly — see also annex 7. The instructions shall be in at least the language of the country in which it will be offered for sale. In the case of devices and components supplied for original equipment fitting by a vehicle manufacturer or bodybuilder, installation instructions may be dispensed with but the vehicle manufacturer or bodybuilder will be responsible for ensuring that the vehicle operator is supplied with the necessary instructions for correct operation of the coupling device or component.

| 4.7. | For devices and components of Class A, or Class S, if applicable, for use with trailers of maximum permissible mass not exceeding 3,5 tonnes, and which are produced by manufacturers not having any association with the vehicle manufacturer and where the devices and components are intended for fitting in the after-market, the height and other installation features of the coupling shall, in all cases, be verified by the type approval authority or technical service in accordance with annex 7, paragraph 1. |
| --- | --- |

4.7.

For devices and components of Class A, or Class S, if applicable, for use with trailers of maximum permissible mass not exceeding 3,5 tonnes, and which are produced by manufacturers not having any association with the vehicle manufacturer and where the devices and components are intended for fitting in the after-market, the height and other installation features of the coupling shall, in all cases, be verified by the type approval authority or technical service in accordance with annex 7, paragraph 1.

| 4.8. | For heavy duty and other non-standard miscellaneous coupling devices or components, Class S and Class T, the relevant requirements in annexes 5, 6 and 7 for the closest standard or non-standard device or component shall be used. |
| --- | --- |

4.8.

For heavy duty and other non-standard miscellaneous coupling devices or components, Class S and Class T, the relevant requirements in annexes 5, 6 and 7 for the closest standard or non-standard device or component shall be used.

5.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE FITTED WITH A MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICE OR COMPONENT

| 5.1. | Where a vehicle manufacturer applies for approval of a vehicle fitted with a mechanical coupling device or component or authorises the use of a vehicle for towing any form of trailer, then, at the request of a bona fide applicant for possible type approval for a mechanical coupling device or component, or of the type approval authority or technical service of a Contracting Party, the vehicle manufacturer shall readily make available to that inquirer or authority or technical service, such information as required in paragraph 5.3. below, to enable a manufacturer of a coupling device or component to properly design and manufacture a mechanical coupling device or component for that vehicle. At the request of a bona fide applicant for possible type approval for a mechanical coupling device or component, any information given in paragraph 5.3. below which is held by the type approval authority shall be released to that applicant. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

Where a vehicle manufacturer applies for approval of a vehicle fitted with a mechanical coupling device or component or authorises the use of a vehicle for towing any form of trailer, then, at the request of a bona fide applicant for possible type approval for a mechanical coupling device or component, or of the type approval authority or technical service of a Contracting Party, the vehicle manufacturer shall readily make available to that inquirer or authority or technical service, such information as required in paragraph 5.3. below, to enable a manufacturer of a coupling device or component to properly design and manufacture a mechanical coupling device or component for that vehicle. At the request of a bona fide applicant for possible type approval for a mechanical coupling device or component, any information given in paragraph 5.3. below which is held by the type approval authority shall be released to that applicant.

| 5.2. | The application for approval of a vehicle type with regard to the fitting of a mechanical coupling device or component shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or by his duly accredited representative. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.

The application for approval of a vehicle type with regard to the fitting of a mechanical coupling device or component shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or by his duly accredited representative.

| 5.3. | It shall be accompanied by the following information to enable the type approval authority to complete the communication form given in annex 2. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.

It shall be accompanied by the following information to enable the type approval authority to complete the communication form given in annex 2.

| 5.3.1. | a detailed description of the vehicle type and of the mechanical coupling device or component and, at the request of the type approval authority or technical service, a copy of the approval form for the device or component; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.1.

a detailed description of the vehicle type and of the mechanical coupling device or component and, at the request of the type approval authority or technical service, a copy of the approval form for the device or component;

| 5.3.2. | The information shall also include the maximum permissible masses of the towing and towed vehicles, the distribution of the maximum permissible mass of the towing vehicle between the axles, the maximum permissible axle masses, the maximum permissible vertical loading to be imposed on the rear of the towing vehicle and details and/or drawings of the installation mounting points for the device or component and of any additional reinforcing plates, support brackets and so on, necessary for safe attachment of the mechanical coupling device or component to the towing vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.2.

The information shall also include the maximum permissible masses of the towing and towed vehicles, the distribution of the maximum permissible mass of the towing vehicle between the axles, the maximum permissible axle masses, the maximum permissible vertical loading to be imposed on the rear of the towing vehicle and details and/or drawings of the installation mounting points for the device or component and of any additional reinforcing plates, support brackets and so on, necessary for safe attachment of the mechanical coupling device or component to the towing vehicle;

| 5.3.2.1. | the loading condition at which the height of the tow ball of M1 category vehicles is to be measured — see paragraph 2 of annex 7, appendix 1. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.2.1.

the loading condition at which the height of the tow ball of M1 category vehicles is to be measured — see paragraph 2 of annex 7, appendix 1.

| 5.3.3. | three sets of drawings which are sufficiently detailed to identify the device or component and which specify how it is to be fitted to the vehicle; the drawings shall show the position and space provided for the approval number and other marking as given in paragraph 7.; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.3.

three sets of drawings which are sufficiently detailed to identify the device or component and which specify how it is to be fitted to the vehicle; the drawings shall show the position and space provided for the approval number and other marking as given in paragraph 7.;

| 5.3.4. | a detailed technical description of the device or component, specifying, in particular, the type and the materials used; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.

a detailed technical description of the device or component, specifying, in particular, the type and the materials used;

| 5.3.5. | a statement of the values of D, Dc, S, V and U as applicable and as defined in paragraph 2.11.; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.5.

a statement of the values of D, Dc, S, V and U as applicable and as defined in paragraph 2.11.;

| 5.3.5.1. | The characteristic values shall be at least equal to those applicable to the maximum permissible towing vehicle, trailer and combination masses. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.5.1.

The characteristic values shall be at least equal to those applicable to the maximum permissible towing vehicle, trailer and combination masses.

| 5.3.6. | a vehicle, representative of the type to be approved and fitted with a mechanical coupling device, shall be submitted to the type approval authority or technical service which may also request additional samples of the device or component; |
| --- | --- |

5.3.6.

a vehicle, representative of the type to be approved and fitted with a mechanical coupling device, shall be submitted to the type approval authority or technical service which may also request additional samples of the device or component;

| 5.3.7. | a vehicle not having all of the components appropriate to the type may be accepted provided that the applicant can show, to the satisfaction of the type approval authority or technical service, that the absence of the components does not have any effect on the results of the inspection as far as the requirements of this Regulation are concerned. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.7.

a vehicle not having all of the components appropriate to the type may be accepted provided that the applicant can show, to the satisfaction of the type approval authority or technical service, that the absence of the components does not have any effect on the results of the inspection as far as the requirements of this Regulation are concerned.

6.   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VEHICLES FITTED WITH A MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICE OR COMPONENT

| 6.1. | The mechanical coupling device or component fitted to the vehicle shall be approved in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs 3 and 4 and annexes 5 and 6 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.

The mechanical coupling device or component fitted to the vehicle shall be approved in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs 3 and 4 and annexes 5 and 6 of this Regulation.

| 6.2. | The installation of the mechanical coupling device or component shall meet the requirements of annex 7 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.

The installation of the mechanical coupling device or component shall meet the requirements of annex 7 to this Regulation.

| 6.3. | Operating instructions shall be provided for use of the coupling device or component which shall contain any special instructions for operations which are different from those normally associated with the type of coupling device or component and instructions for coupling and uncoupling with different modes of operation, for example, at various angles between the towing and towed vehicles. Each vehicle shall be accompanied by these operating instructions which shall be at least in the language of the country in which it will be offered for sale. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.

Operating instructions shall be provided for use of the coupling device or component which shall contain any special instructions for operations which are different from those normally associated with the type of coupling device or component and instructions for coupling and uncoupling with different modes of operation, for example, at various angles between the towing and towed vehicles. Each vehicle shall be accompanied by these operating instructions which shall be at least in the language of the country in which it will be offered for sale.

7.   MARKINGS

| 7.1. | Types of mechanical coupling devices and components submitted for approval shall bear the trade name or mark of the manufacturer, supplier or applicant. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.

Types of mechanical coupling devices and components submitted for approval shall bear the trade name or mark of the manufacturer, supplier or applicant.

| 7.2. | There shall be a sufficiently large space for application of the approval mark referred to in paragraph 8.5 and shown in annex 3. This space shall be shown on the drawings referred to in paragraph 3.2.2. |
| --- | --- |

7.2.

There shall be a sufficiently large space for application of the approval mark referred to in paragraph 8.5 and shown in annex 3. This space shall be shown on the drawings referred to in paragraph 3.2.2.

| 7.3. | Adjacent to the approval mark referred to in paragraphs 7.2 and 8.5, the mechanical coupling device or component shall be marked with the class of coupling, as defined in paragraph 2.6 and the relevant characteristic values as defined in paragraph 2.11 and shown in annex 4. The position for these markings shall be shown on the drawings referred to in paragraph 3.2.2.
  The characteristic values need not be marked in cases where those values are defined in the classification given in this Regulation, for example, Classes A50-1 to A50-5. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.

Adjacent to the approval mark referred to in paragraphs 7.2 and 8.5, the mechanical coupling device or component shall be marked with the class of coupling, as defined in paragraph 2.6 and the relevant characteristic values as defined in paragraph 2.11 and shown in annex 4. The position for these markings shall be shown on the drawings referred to in paragraph 3.2.2.

The characteristic values need not be marked in cases where those values are defined in the classification given in this Regulation, for example, Classes A50-1 to A50-5.

| 7.4. | Where the mechanical coupling device or component is approved for alternative characteristic values within the same class of coupling or device, a maximum of two alternatives shall be marked on the device or component. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.

Where the mechanical coupling device or component is approved for alternative characteristic values within the same class of coupling or device, a maximum of two alternatives shall be marked on the device or component.

| 7.5. | If the application of the mechanical coupling device or component is restricted in any way, for example, if it is not to be used with steering wedges, then that restriction shall be marked on the device or component. |
| --- | --- |

7.5.

If the application of the mechanical coupling device or component is restricted in any way, for example, if it is not to be used with steering wedges, then that restriction shall be marked on the device or component.

| 7.6. | All markings shall be permanent and legible when the device or component is installed on the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.

All markings shall be permanent and legible when the device or component is installed on the vehicle.

8.   APPROVAL

| 8.1. | If the sample(s) of a type of mechanical coupling device or component meets (meet) the requirements of this Regulation, approval shall be granted subject to the requirements of paragraph 10 being satisfactorily met. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.

If the sample(s) of a type of mechanical coupling device or component meets (meet) the requirements of this Regulation, approval shall be granted subject to the requirements of paragraph 10 being satisfactorily met.

| 8.2. | An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 01) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party may not assign the same number to another type of device or component referred to in this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.

An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 01) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party may not assign the same number to another type of device or component referred to in this Regulation.

| 8.3. | Notice of approval or of extension, refusal or withdrawal of approval or of production definitely discontinued, relating to a type of mechanical coupling device or component approved pursuant to this Regulation, shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a communication form conforming to the model in either annex 1 or annex 2 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

8.3.

Notice of approval or of extension, refusal or withdrawal of approval or of production definitely discontinued, relating to a type of mechanical coupling device or component approved pursuant to this Regulation, shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a communication form conforming to the model in either annex 1 or annex 2 to this Regulation.

| 8.4. | In addition to the mark prescribed in paragraph 7.1., there shall be affixed to every mechanical coupling device or component approved under this Regulation, in the space referred to in paragraph 7.2., an approval mark as described in paragraph 8.5. |
| --- | --- |

8.4.

In addition to the mark prescribed in paragraph 7.1., there shall be affixed to every mechanical coupling device or component approved under this Regulation, in the space referred to in paragraph 7.2., an approval mark as described in paragraph 8.5.

| 8.5. | The approval mark shall be an international mark comprising: |
| --- | --- |

8.5.

The approval mark shall be an international mark comprising:

| 8.5.1. | a circle surrounding the letter „E” followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (5); |
| --- | --- |

8.5.1.

a circle surrounding the letter „E” followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (5);

| 8.5.2. | the approval number prescribed in paragraph 8.2.; |
| --- | --- |

8.5.2.

the approval number prescribed in paragraph 8.2.;

| 8.5.3. | the approval mark and number shall be arranged as shown in the example in annex 3. |
| --- | --- |

8.5.3.

the approval mark and number shall be arranged as shown in the example in annex 3.

9.   MODIFICATIONS OF THE MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICE OR COMPONENT, OR OF THE VEHICLE AND EXTENSION OF APPROVAL

| 9.1. | Any modification to the type of mechanical coupling device or component, or of the vehicle as defined in paragraph 2.10 shall be notified to the type approval authority or technical service which granted the approval. The type approval authority or technical service may then either: |
| --- | --- |

9.1.

Any modification to the type of mechanical coupling device or component, or of the vehicle as defined in paragraph 2.10 shall be notified to the type approval authority or technical service which granted the approval. The type approval authority or technical service may then either:

| 9.1.1. | consider that the modifications are unlikely to have any appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the device, component or vehicle still conforms to requirements; or |
| --- | --- |

9.1.1.

consider that the modifications are unlikely to have any appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the device, component or vehicle still conforms to requirements; or

| 9.1.2. | require a further test report. |
| --- | --- |

9.1.2.

require a further test report.

| 9.2. | Confirmation of, or refusal of approval, specifying the modification, shall be communicated by the procedure prescribed in paragraph 8.3 to the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

9.2.

Confirmation of, or refusal of approval, specifying the modification, shall be communicated by the procedure prescribed in paragraph 8.3 to the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation.

| 9.3. | The type approval authority or technical service issuing an extension of approval shall assign a series number for such an extension and shall inform the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by the procedure prescribed in paragraph 8.3. |
| --- | --- |

9.3.

The type approval authority or technical service issuing an extension of approval shall assign a series number for such an extension and shall inform the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by the procedure prescribed in paragraph 8.3.

10.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION PROCEDURES

The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324 — E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2), with the following requirements:

| 10.1. | The holder of the approval must ensure that results of the conformity of production tests are recorded and that the annexed documents remain available for a period determined in agreement with the approval authority or technical service. This period must not exceed 10 years counted from the time when production is definitely discontinued. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.

The holder of the approval must ensure that results of the conformity of production tests are recorded and that the annexed documents remain available for a period determined in agreement with the approval authority or technical service. This period must not exceed 10 years counted from the time when production is definitely discontinued.

| 10.2. | The type approval authority or technical service which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every two years. |
| --- | --- |

10.2.

The type approval authority or technical service which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every two years.

11.   PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

| 11.1. | The approval granted in respect of a type of mechanical coupling device or component pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the requirements are not complied with or if a device or component bearing the approval mark does not conform to the type approved. |
| --- | --- |

11.1.

The approval granted in respect of a type of mechanical coupling device or component pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the requirements are not complied with or if a device or component bearing the approval mark does not conform to the type approved.

| 11.2. | If a Contracting Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in either annex 1 or annex 2 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

11.2.

If a Contracting Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in either annex 1 or annex 2 to this Regulation.

12.   PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

If the holder of the approval completely ceases to manufacture a type of mechanical coupling device or component approved in accordance with this Regulation, he shall so inform the type approval authority or technical service which granted the approval. Upon receiving the relevant communication, that type approval authority or technical service shall inform thereof the other Contracting Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in either annex 1 or annex 2 to this Regulation.

13.   TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS

Until the United Nations Secretary-General is notified otherwise, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation that are Member States of the European Community (at the time of adoption of the 01 series of amendments, Italy, Netherlands, Belgium, United Kingdom, Luxembourg, Finland and Greece) declare that, in relation to mechanical coupling devices and components, they will only be bound by the obligations of the Agreement to which this Regulation is annexed with respect to such devices and components intended for vehicles of categories other than M1.

14.   NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF TECHNICAL SERVICES RESPONSIBLE FOR APPROVAL TESTS AND OF ADMINISTRATIVE DEPARTMENTS

| 14.1. | The Contracting Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval, or production definitely discontinued, issued in other countries, are to be sent. |
| --- | --- |

14.1.

The Contracting Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval, or production definitely discontinued, issued in other countries, are to be sent.

---

(1)  Within the meaning of the Convention on Road Traffic (Vienna, 1968, Article 1, sub-paragraphs (t) and (u)).

(2)  The mass T and R and the technically permissible maximum mass, may be greater than the permissible maximum mass prescribed by national legislation.

(3)  See definitions in Regulation No 13 annexed to the 1958 Agreement concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the Basis of these Prescriptions. The definition is also contained in annex 7 of the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3) (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

(4)  The technically permissible mass may be greater than the maximum permissible mass prescribed by national legislation.

(5)  1 for Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 5 for Sweden, 6 for Belgium, 7 for Hungary, 8 for the Czech Republic, 9 for Spain, 10 for Yugoslavia, 11 for the United Kingdom, 12 for Austria, 13 for Luxembourg, 14 for Switzerland, 15 (vacant), 16 for Norway, 17 for Finland, 18 for Denmark, 19 for Romania, 20 for Poland, 21 for Portugal, 22 for the Russian Federation, 23 for Greece, 24 for Ireland, 25 for Croatia, 26 for Slovenia, 27 for Slovakia, 28 for Belarus, 29 for Estonia, 30 (vacant), 31 for Bosnia and Herzegovina, 32 for Latvia, 33 (vacant), 34 for Bulgaria, 35-36 (vacant), 37 for Turkey, 38-39 (vacant), 40 for The former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, 41 (vacant), 42 for the European Community (Approvals are granted by its Member States using their respective ECE symbol), 43 for Japan, 44 (vacant), 45 for Australia, 46 for Ukraine and 47 for South Africa. Subsequent numbers shall be assigned in the chronological order in which they ratify or accede to the Agreement concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the Basis of these Prescriptions, or in which they accede to the Agreement, and the numbers thus assigned shall be communicated by the Secretary-General of the United Nations to the Contracting Parties to the Agreement.

ANNEX 1

COMMUNICATION

(maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

| | issued by: | Name of administration:
  .......................................
  .......................................
  ....................................... |
| --- | --- | --- |

Image

issued by:

Name of administration:

.......................................

.......................................

.......................................

| concerning: | APPROVAL GRANTED |
| --- | --- |
| | APPROVAL EXTENDED |
| | APPROVAL REFUSED |
| | APPROVAL WITHDRAWN |
| | PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED |

concerning:

APPROVAL GRANTED

APPROVAL EXTENDED

APPROVAL REFUSED

APPROVAL WITHDRAWN

PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

of a type of mechanical coupling device or component pursuant to Regulation No 55

Approval No .................. Extension No ..................

| 1. | name or mark of the device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

1.

name or mark of the device or component: ...

| 2. | Manufacturer's name for the type of device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

2.

Manufacturer's name for the type of device or component: ...

| 3. | Manufacturer's name and address: ... |
| --- | --- |

3.

Manufacturer's name and address: ...

| 4. | If applicable, name and address of the manufacturer's representative: ... |
| --- | --- |

4.

If applicable, name and address of the manufacturer's representative: ...

| 5. | Alternative supplier's names or trade marks applied to the device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

5.

Alternative supplier's names or trade marks applied to the device or component: ...

| 6. | Name and address of company or body taking responsibility for the conformity of production: ... |
| --- | --- |

6.

Name and address of company or body taking responsibility for the conformity of production: ...

| 7. | Submitted for approval on: ... |
| --- | --- |

7.

Submitted for approval on: ...

| 8. | Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests: ... |
| --- | --- |

8.

Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests: ...

| 9. | Brief description: ... |
| --- | --- |

9.

Brief description: ...

| 9.1. | Type and class of device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

9.1.

Type and class of device or component: ...

| 9.2. | Characteristic values: ... |
| --- | --- |

9.2.

Characteristic values: ...

| 9.2.1. | Primary values: ...
  D ... kN Dc ... kN S ... kg U ... tonnes V ... kN
  Alternative values:
  D ... kN Dc ... kN S ... kg U ... tonnes V ... kN |
| --- | --- |

9.2.1.

Primary values: ...

D ... kN Dc ... kN S ... kg U ... tonnes V ... kN

Alternative values:

D ... kN Dc ... kN S ... kg U ... tonnes V ... kN

| 9.3. | For Class A mechanical coupling devices or components, including towing brackets:
  Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible vehicle mass: ... kg
  Distribution of maximum permissible vehicle mass between the axles: ...
  Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible towable trailer mass: ... kg
  Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible static mass on coupling ball: ... kg.
  Maximum mass of the vehicle, with bodywork, in running order, including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and spare wheel (if supplied) but not including driver: ... kg
  Loading condition under which the tow ball height of a mechanical coupling device fitted to category M1 vehicles is to be measured — see paragraph 2 of annex 7, appendix 1: ... |
| --- | --- |

9.3.

For Class A mechanical coupling devices or components, including towing brackets:

Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible vehicle mass: ... kg

Distribution of maximum permissible vehicle mass between the axles: ...

Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible towable trailer mass: ... kg

Vehicle manufacturer's maximum permissible static mass on coupling ball: ... kg.

Maximum mass of the vehicle, with bodywork, in running order, including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and spare wheel (if supplied) but not including driver: ... kg

Loading condition under which the tow ball height of a mechanical coupling device fitted to category M1 vehicles is to be measured — see paragraph 2 of annex 7, appendix 1: ...

| 10. | Instructions for the attachment of the coupling device or component type to the vehicle and photographs or drawings of the mounting points given by the vehicle manufacturer: ... |
| --- | --- |

10.

Instructions for the attachment of the coupling device or component type to the vehicle and photographs or drawings of the mounting points given by the vehicle manufacturer: ...

| 11. | Information on the fitting of any special reinforcing brackets or plates or spacing components necessary for the attachment of the coupling device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

11.

Information on the fitting of any special reinforcing brackets or plates or spacing components necessary for the attachment of the coupling device or component: ...

| 12. | Additional information where the use of the coupling device or component is restricted to special types of vehicles — see annex 5, paragraph 3.4. ... |
| --- | --- |

12.

Additional information where the use of the coupling device or component is restricted to special types of vehicles — see annex 5, paragraph 3.4. ...

| 13. | For Class K hook type couplings, details of the drawbar eyes suitable for use with the particular hook type. ... |
| --- | --- |

13.

For Class K hook type couplings, details of the drawbar eyes suitable for use with the particular hook type. ...

| 14. | Date of test report: ... |
| --- | --- |

14.

Date of test report: ...

| 15. | Number of test report: ... |
| --- | --- |

15.

Number of test report: ...

| 16. | Approval mark position: ... |
| --- | --- |

16.

Approval mark position: ...

| 17. | Reason(s) for extension of approval: ... |
| --- | --- |

17.

Reason(s) for extension of approval: ...

| 18. | Approval granted/extended/refused/withdrawn: 2/ |
| --- | --- |

18.

Approval granted/extended/refused/withdrawn: 2/

| 19. | Place: ... |
| --- | --- |

19.

Place: ...

| 20. | Date: ... |
| --- | --- |

20.

Date: ...

| 21. | Signature: ... |
| --- | --- |

21.

Signature: ...

| 22. | The list of documents deposited with the Administration Service which has granted approval is annexed to this communication and may be obtained on request.
  ...
  ... |
| --- | --- |

22.

The list of documents deposited with the Administration Service which has granted approval is annexed to this communication and may be obtained on request.

...

...

ANNEX 2

COMMUNICATION

(maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

| | issued by: | Name of administration:
  .......................................
  .......................................
  ....................................... |
| --- | --- | --- |

Image

issued by:

Name of administration:

.......................................

.......................................

.......................................

| concerning: | APPROVAL GRANTED |
| --- | --- |
| | APPROVAL EXTENDED |
| | APPROVAL REFUSED |
| | APPROVAL WITHDRAWN |
| | PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED |

concerning:

APPROVAL GRANTED

APPROVAL EXTENDED

APPROVAL REFUSED

APPROVAL WITHDRAWN

PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

of a vehicle type with regard to the fitting of a mechanical coupling device or component pursuant to Regulation No 55

Approval No .................. Extension No ..................

| 1. | Trade name or mark of vehicle: ... |
| --- | --- |

1.

Trade name or mark of vehicle: ...

| 2. | Vehicle type: ... |
| --- | --- |

2.

Vehicle type: ...

| 3. | Manufacturer's name and address: ... |
| --- | --- |

3.

Manufacturer's name and address: ...

| 4. | If applicable, name and address of the manufacturer's representative: ... |
| --- | --- |

4.

If applicable, name and address of the manufacturer's representative: ...

| 5. | Vehicle category, for example, M1, N1: ... |
| --- | --- |

5.

Vehicle category, for example, M1, N1: ...

| 6. | Maximum permissible vehicle mass: ... kg
  Distribution of maximum permissible vehicle mass between the axles: ...
  Maximum permissible towable trailer mass: ... kg
  Maximum permissible static mass on coupling ball: ... kg
  Maximum mass of the vehicle, with bodywork, in running order, including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and spare wheel (if supplied) but not including driver: ... kg |
| --- | --- |

6.

Maximum permissible vehicle mass: ... kg

Distribution of maximum permissible vehicle mass between the axles: ...

Maximum permissible towable trailer mass: ... kg

Maximum permissible static mass on coupling ball: ... kg

Maximum mass of the vehicle, with bodywork, in running order, including coolant, oils, fuel, tools and spare wheel (if supplied) but not including driver: ... kg

| 7. | D ... kN Dc ... kN S ... kg U ... tonnes V ... kN |
| --- | --- |

7.

D ... kN Dc ... kN S ... kg U ... tonnes V ... kN

| 8. | Instructions for the attachment of the coupling device or component type to the vehicle and photographs or drawings of the mounting points: ... |
| --- | --- |

8.

Instructions for the attachment of the coupling device or component type to the vehicle and photographs or drawings of the mounting points: ...

| 9. | Information on the fitting of any special reinforcing brackets or plates or spacing components necessary for the attachment of the coupling device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

9.

Information on the fitting of any special reinforcing brackets or plates or spacing components necessary for the attachment of the coupling device or component: ...

| 10. | Trade name or mark of the mechanical coupling device or component and the approval number: ... |
| --- | --- |

10.

Trade name or mark of the mechanical coupling device or component and the approval number: ...

| 11. | Class of coupling device or component: ... |
| --- | --- |

11.

Class of coupling device or component: ...

| 12. | Submitted for approval on: ... |
| --- | --- |

12.

Submitted for approval on: ...

| 13. | Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests: ... |
| --- | --- |

13.

Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests: ...

| 14. | Date of test report: ... |
| --- | --- |

14.

Date of test report: ...

| 15. | Number of test report: ... |
| --- | --- |

15.

Number of test report: ...

| 16. | Approval mark position: ... |
| --- | --- |

16.

Approval mark position: ...

| 17. | Reason(s) for extension of approval: ... |
| --- | --- |

17.

Reason(s) for extension of approval: ...

| 18. | Approval granted/extended/refused/withdrawn: ... |
| --- | --- |

18.

Approval granted/extended/refused/withdrawn: ...

| 19. | Place: ... |
| --- | --- |

19.

Place: ...

| 20. | Date: ... |
| --- | --- |

20.

Date: ...

| 21. | Signature: ... |
| --- | --- |

21.

Signature: ...

| 22. | The list of documents deposited with the Administration Service which has granted approval is annexed to this communication and may be obtained on request.
  ...
  ... |
| --- | --- |

22.

The list of documents deposited with the Administration Service which has granted approval is annexed to this communication and may be obtained on request.

...

...

ANNEX 3

EXAMPLE OF AN ARRANGEMENT OF THE APPROVAL MARK

Image

The mechanical coupling device or component or vehicle bearing the approval mark shown above is a device or component approved in the Netherlands (E4), under approval number 2439, meeting the requirements of the 01 series of amendments to this Regulation.

Note: The approval number and additional symbols shall be placed close to the circle and either above or below the letter ‘E’ or to the right or left of that letter. The digits of the approval number shall be on the same side of the letter ‘E’ and face in the same direction. The use of Roman numerals as approval numbers should be avoided so as to prevent any confusion with other symbols.

ANNEX 4

EXAMPLES OF ARRANGEMENTS OF MARKING OF THE CHARACTERISTIC VALUES

| 1. | All mechanical coupling devices or components shall be marked with the class of the device or component. In addition there shall be marking to indicate the capacity in terms of characteristic values as defined in paragraph 2.11 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.

All mechanical coupling devices or components shall be marked with the class of the device or component. In addition there shall be marking to indicate the capacity in terms of characteristic values as defined in paragraph 2.11 of this Regulation.

| 1.1. | The height of all letters and numbers shall be not less than those of the approval number, that is a/3 where a is 8 mm. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

The height of all letters and numbers shall be not less than those of the approval number, that is a/3 where a is 8 mm.

| 1.2. | The characteristic values applicable to each device or component which are to be marked are as shown in the table below — see also paragraph 7.3 of this Regulation:
  TABLE 1
  Relevant characteristics values to be marked on coupling devices or components











  Description of mechanical coupling device or component | Relevant characteristic values to be marked |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Class | D | Dc | S | U | V |
| Coupling balls and towing brackets — see annex 5, para. 1 of this Regulation | ★ | ★ | | ★ | | |
| Coupling heads | ★ | ★ | | ★ | | |
| Drawbar couplings | ★ | ★ | ★ | ★ | | ★ |
| Drawbar eyes | ★ | ★ | ★ | ★ | | ★ |
| Drawbars | ★ | ★ | ★ | ★ | | ★ |
| Drawbeams | ★ | ★ | ★ | ★ | | ★ |
| Fifth wheel couplings | ★ | ★ | | | ★ | |
| Fifth wheel pins | ★ | ★ | | | | |
| Fifth wheel mounting plates | ★ | ★ | | | ★ | |
| Hook type couplings | ★ | ★ | ★ | ★ | | ★ |

1.2.

The characteristic values applicable to each device or component which are to be marked are as shown in the table below — see also paragraph 7.3 of this Regulation:

TABLE 1

Relevant characteristics values to be marked on coupling devices or components

Description of mechanical coupling device or component

Relevant characteristic values to be marked

Class

D

Dc

S

U

V

Coupling balls and towing brackets — see annex 5, para. 1 of this Regulation

★

★

★

Coupling heads

★

★

★

Drawbar couplings

★

★

★

★

★

Drawbar eyes

★

★

★

★

★

Drawbars

★

★

★

★

★

Drawbeams

★

★

★

★

★

Fifth wheel couplings

★

★

★

Fifth wheel pins

★

★

Fifth wheel mounting plates

★

★

★

Hook type couplings

★

★

★

★

★

| Examples: | C50—X D130 Dc90 S1000 V35 would identify a non‐standard drawbar coupling of Class C50—X with a maximum D value of 130 kN, a maximum permitted Dc value of 90 kN, a maximum permitted static vertical imposed mass of 1 000 kg and a maximum permitted V value of 35 kN.
  A50—X D20 S120 would identify a standard towing bracket with ball coupling of Class A50—X with a maximum D value of 20 kN and a maximum permitted static vertical imposed mass of 120 kg. |
| --- | --- |

Examples:

C50—X D130 Dc90 S1000 V35 would identify a non‐standard drawbar coupling of Class C50—X with a maximum D value of 130 kN, a maximum permitted Dc value of 90 kN, a maximum permitted static vertical imposed mass of 1 000 kg and a maximum permitted V value of 35 kN.

A50—X D20 S120 would identify a standard towing bracket with ball coupling of Class A50—X with a maximum D value of 20 kN and a maximum permitted static vertical imposed mass of 120 kg.

ANNEX 5

REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICES OR COMPONENTS

1.   COUPLING BALLS AND TOWING BRACKETS

The requirements stated in paragraphs 1.1 to 1.5 of this annex are applicable to all coupling balls and towing brackets of Class A. Paragraph 1.6 details additional requirements which must be fulfilled by standard 50 mm diameter coupling balls with flange type bolted fixings.

| 1.1. | Coupling balls of Class A shall conform to Figure 2 in external shape and external dimensions. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

Coupling balls of Class A shall conform to Figure 2 in external shape and external dimensions.

Figure 2

Coupling ball of Class A

Image

| 1.2. | The shape and dimensions of towing brackets shall meet the requirements of the vehicle manufacturer concerning the attachment points and additional mounting devices or components if necessary. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

The shape and dimensions of towing brackets shall meet the requirements of the vehicle manufacturer concerning the attachment points and additional mounting devices or components if necessary.

| 1.3. | Removable coupling balls: |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

Removable coupling balls:

| 1.3.1. | In the case of removable coupling balls or components which are not fixed by bolts, for example Class A50-X, the point of connection and the locking arrangement shall be designed for positive mechanical engagement. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.1.

In the case of removable coupling balls or components which are not fixed by bolts, for example Class A50-X, the point of connection and the locking arrangement shall be designed for positive mechanical engagement.

| 1.3.2. | In the case of a removable coupling ball or component which may be separately approved for use with a variety of towing brackets for different vehicle applications, for example Class A50-X, the clearance space when such a coupling ball is fitted to the towing bracket shall be that prescribed in annex 7, Figure 25. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.2.

In the case of a removable coupling ball or component which may be separately approved for use with a variety of towing brackets for different vehicle applications, for example Class A50-X, the clearance space when such a coupling ball is fitted to the towing bracket shall be that prescribed in annex 7, Figure 25.

| 1.4. | Coupling balls and towing devices shall be able to satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.1. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

Coupling balls and towing devices shall be able to satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.1.

| 1.5. | Manufacturers of towing brackets shall incorporate attachment points to which either secondary couplings or devices necessary to enable the trailer to be stopped automatically in the event of separation of the main coupling, may be attached. This requirement is necessary to enable the vehicle to comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.2.2.9 of UNECE Regulation No 13 — Uniform Provisions concerning the approval of vehicles of categories M, N and O with regard to braking. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

Manufacturers of towing brackets shall incorporate attachment points to which either secondary couplings or devices necessary to enable the trailer to be stopped automatically in the event of separation of the main coupling, may be attached. This requirement is necessary to enable the vehicle to comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.2.2.9 of UNECE Regulation No 13 — Uniform Provisions concerning the approval of vehicles of categories M, N and O with regard to braking.

| 1.5.1. | The attachment points for a secondary coupling and/or breakaway cable shall be positioned such that when in use, the secondary coupling or breakaway cable does not restrict the normal articulation of the coupling or interfere with the normal inertia braking system operation. A single attachment point shall be positioned within 100 mm of a vertical plane passing through the centre of articulation of the coupling. If this is not practicable, two attachment points shall be provided, one on each side of the vertical centre line and equidistant from the centre line by a maximum of 250 mm. The attachment point(s) shall be as rearward and as high as practicable. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.1.

The attachment points for a secondary coupling and/or breakaway cable shall be positioned such that when in use, the secondary coupling or breakaway cable does not restrict the normal articulation of the coupling or interfere with the normal inertia braking system operation. A single attachment point shall be positioned within 100 mm of a vertical plane passing through the centre of articulation of the coupling. If this is not practicable, two attachment points shall be provided, one on each side of the vertical centre line and equidistant from the centre line by a maximum of 250 mm. The attachment point(s) shall be as rearward and as high as practicable.

| 1.6. | Special requirements for standard coupling balls and flange type towing brackets of Classes A50-1 to A50-5 inclusive: |
| --- | --- |

1.6.

Special requirements for standard coupling balls and flange type towing brackets of Classes A50-1 to A50-5 inclusive:

| 1.6.1. | Dimensions of Class A50-1 coupling balls and flange type towing brackets shall be as given in Figure 3 and Table 2. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.1.

Dimensions of Class A50-1 coupling balls and flange type towing brackets shall be as given in Figure 3 and Table 2.

| 1.6.2. | Dimensions of Class A50-2, A50-3, A50-4 and A50-5 coupling balls and flange type towing brackets shall be as given in Figure 4 and Table 2. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.2.

Dimensions of Class A50-2, A50-3, A50-4 and A50-5 coupling balls and flange type towing brackets shall be as given in Figure 4 and Table 2.

| 1.6.3. | Coupling balls and flange type towing brackets of the classes A50-1 to A50-5 inclusive, shall be suitable and tested for the characteristic values given in Table 3. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.3.

Coupling balls and flange type towing brackets of the classes A50-1 to A50-5 inclusive, shall be suitable and tested for the characteristic values given in Table 3.

Figure 3

Dimensions of standard flange type ball couplings of Class A50-1

(see Table 2)

Image

Figure 4

Dimensions of standard flange type ball couplings of Class A50-2 to A50-5

(see Table 2)

Image

Table 2

Dimensions of standard flange type ball couplings (mm), see Figures 3 and 4.

| Class | A50-1 | A50-2, A50-4 | A50-3, A50-5 | Comments |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| e1 | 90 | 83 | 120 | ±0,5 |
| e2 | | 56 | 55 | ±0,5 |
| d2 | 17 | 10,5 | 15 | H13 |
| f | 130 | 110 | 155 | +6,0 -0 |
| g | 50 | 85 | 90 | +6,0 -0 |
| c | 15 | 15 | 15 | Maximum |
| l | 55 | 110 | 120 | ±5,0 |
| h | 70 | 80 | 80 | ±5,0 |

Class

A50-1

A50-2, A50-4

A50-3, A50-5

Comments

e1

90

83

120

±0,5

e2

56

55

±0,5

d2

17

10,5

15

H13

f

130

110

155

+6,0 -0

g

50

85

90

+6,0 -0

c

15

15

15

Maximum

l

55

110

120

±5,0

h

70

80

80

±5,0

Table 3

Characteristic values for standard flange type ball couplings

| Class | A50-1 | A50-2 | A50-3 | A50-3 | A50-5 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| D | 17 | 20 | 30 | 20 | 30 |
| S | 120 | 120 | 120 | 150 | 150 |

Class

A50-1

A50-2

A50-3

A50-3

A50-5

D

17

20

30

20

30

S

120

120

120

150

150

| D | = | Maximum D value (kN) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| S | = | Maximum static mass (kg) |

D

=

Maximum D value (kN)

S

=

Maximum static mass (kg)

| 1.7. | Manufacturers of coupling balls and towing brackets intended for fitment in the after-market and which do not have any association with the relevant vehicle manufacturer shall be aware of the requirements for articulation of the coupling given in paragraph 2 of this annex and shall comply with the appropriate requirements in annex 7 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.7.

Manufacturers of coupling balls and towing brackets intended for fitment in the after-market and which do not have any association with the relevant vehicle manufacturer shall be aware of the requirements for articulation of the coupling given in paragraph 2 of this annex and shall comply with the appropriate requirements in annex 7 to this Regulation.

2.   COUPLING HEADS

| 2.1. | Coupling heads of Class B50 shall be designed so that they can be used safely with the coupling balls described in paragraph 1 of this annex and thereby retain the prescribed characteristics.
  Coupling heads shall be designed in such a way that safe coupling is ensured, also taking into account the wear of the coupling devices. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

Coupling heads of Class B50 shall be designed so that they can be used safely with the coupling balls described in paragraph 1 of this annex and thereby retain the prescribed characteristics.

Coupling heads shall be designed in such a way that safe coupling is ensured, also taking into account the wear of the coupling devices.

| 2.2. | Coupling heads shall be able to satisfy the tests laid down in annex 6, paragraph 3.2. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

Coupling heads shall be able to satisfy the tests laid down in annex 6, paragraph 3.2.

| 2.3. | Any additional device (e.g. braking, stabiliser, etc.) shall not have any adverse effect on the mechanical connection. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

Any additional device (e.g. braking, stabiliser, etc.) shall not have any adverse effect on the mechanical connection.

| 2.4. | When not attached to the vehicle, horizontal rotation of the coupling head shall be at least 90o to each side of the centre line of the coupling ball and mounting described in paragraph 1 of this annex. Simultaneously, there shall be an angle of free vertical movement 20o above and below the horizontal. Also, in conjunction with the horizontal angle of rotation of 90o it shall be possible for there to be 25o of roll in both directions about the horizontal axis. The following articulation shall be possible at all angles of horizontal rotation:






  (i) | vertical pitch ±15o with axial roll ±25o |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.4.

When not attached to the vehicle, horizontal rotation of the coupling head shall be at least 90o to each side of the centre line of the coupling ball and mounting described in paragraph 1 of this annex. Simultaneously, there shall be an angle of free vertical movement 20o above and below the horizontal. Also, in conjunction with the horizontal angle of rotation of 90o it shall be possible for there to be 25o of roll in both directions about the horizontal axis. The following articulation shall be possible at all angles of horizontal rotation:

(i)

vertical pitch ±15o with axial roll ±25o

| (ii) | axial roll ±10o with vertical pitch ±20o |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

axial roll ±10o with vertical pitch ±20o

3.   DRAWBAR COUPLINGS

The requirements of paragraphs 3.1 to 3.6 of this annex are applicable to all drawbar couplings of Class C50. Additional requirements which must be fulfilled by standard drawbar couplings of Classes C50-1 to C50-6 are given in paragraph 3.7.

| 3.1. | Performance requirements — All drawbar couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests stated in annex 6, paragraph 3.3. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

Performance requirements — All drawbar couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests stated in annex 6, paragraph 3.3.

| 3.2. | Suitable drawbar eyes — Class C50 drawbar couplings shall be compatible with all Class D50 drawbar eyes and couplings with the specified characteristics. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

Suitable drawbar eyes — Class C50 drawbar couplings shall be compatible with all Class D50 drawbar eyes and couplings with the specified characteristics.

| 3.3. | Jaw
  Class C50 drawbar couplings shall have a jaw which is designed such that the appropriate drawbar eye is guided into the coupling.
  If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, can pivot about the vertical axis, it shall establish itself automatically in the normal position and with the coupling pin open, be effectively restrained in this position to give satisfactory guidance for the drawbar eye during the coupling procedure.
  If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, can pivot about the horizontal transverse axis, the joint providing the rotation capability shall be restrained in its normal position by a locking torque. The torque shall be sufficient to prevent a force of 200 N acting vertically upwards on the top of the jaw producing any deflection of the joint from its normal position. The locking torque shall be greater than that created by operation of the hand lever described in paragraph 3.6 of this annex. It shall be possible to bring the jaw to its normal position manually. A jaw that pivots about the horizontal transverse axis is only approved for bearing mass, S, of up to 50 kg and a V-value of up to 5 kN.
  If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, is pivoted about the longitudinal axis, the rotation shall be restrained by a locking torque of at least 100 Nm.
  The minimum required size of the jaw depends on the D value of the coupling:






  D value ≤ 18 kN | — width 150 mm, height 100 mm |
| --- | --- | --- |
| D value > 18 kN ≤ 25 kN | — width 280 mm, height 170 mm |
| D value > 25 kN | — width 360 mm, height 200 mm |

3.3.

Jaw

Class C50 drawbar couplings shall have a jaw which is designed such that the appropriate drawbar eye is guided into the coupling.

If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, can pivot about the vertical axis, it shall establish itself automatically in the normal position and with the coupling pin open, be effectively restrained in this position to give satisfactory guidance for the drawbar eye during the coupling procedure.

If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, can pivot about the horizontal transverse axis, the joint providing the rotation capability shall be restrained in its normal position by a locking torque. The torque shall be sufficient to prevent a force of 200 N acting vertically upwards on the top of the jaw producing any deflection of the joint from its normal position. The locking torque shall be greater than that created by operation of the hand lever described in paragraph 3.6 of this annex. It shall be possible to bring the jaw to its normal position manually. A jaw that pivots about the horizontal transverse axis is only approved for bearing mass, S, of up to 50 kg and a V-value of up to 5 kN.

If the jaw, or a part supporting the jaw, is pivoted about the longitudinal axis, the rotation shall be restrained by a locking torque of at least 100 Nm.

The minimum required size of the jaw depends on the D value of the coupling:

D value ≤ 18 kN

— width 150 mm, height 100 mm

D value > 18 kN ≤ 25 kN

— width 280 mm, height 170 mm

D value > 25 kN

— width 360 mm, height 200 mm

The external corners of the jaw may be radiused.

Smaller jaws are permitted for Class C50-X drawbar couplings if their use is restricted to centre axle trailers up to 3,5 tonnes maximum permissible mass or if the use of a jaw from the above table is impossible due to technical reasons and if, furthermore, there are special circumstances such as visual aids for ensuring safe execution of the automatic coupling procedure and if the field of application is restricted in the approval according to information given by the coupling manufacturer in the communication form shown in annex 1.

| 3.4. | Minimum articulation of the coupled drawbar eye
  The drawbar eye, when coupled to a drawbar coupling but not fitted to a vehicle, shall have the degrees of articulation given below. If part of the articulation is provided by a special joint (Class C50-X drawbar couplings only), the field of application, given in the communication form shown in annex 1, shall be restricted to the cases stated in annex 7, paragraph 1.3.8. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.

Minimum articulation of the coupled drawbar eye

The drawbar eye, when coupled to a drawbar coupling but not fitted to a vehicle, shall have the degrees of articulation given below. If part of the articulation is provided by a special joint (Class C50-X drawbar couplings only), the field of application, given in the communication form shown in annex 1, shall be restricted to the cases stated in annex 7, paragraph 1.3.8.

| 3.4.1. | ±90o horizontally about the vertical axis from the longitudinal axis of the vehicle — see Figure 5. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.1.

±90o horizontally about the vertical axis from the longitudinal axis of the vehicle — see Figure 5.

Figure 5

Horizontal rotation of the coupled drawbar eye

Image

| 3.4.2. | ±20o vertically about the transverse axis from the horizontal plane of the vehicle — see Figure 6. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.2.

±20o vertically about the transverse axis from the horizontal plane of the vehicle — see Figure 6.

Figure 6

Vertical rotation of the coupled drawbar eye

Image

| 3.4.3. | ±25o axial rotation about the longitudinal axis from the horizontal plane of the vehicle — see Figure 7. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.3.

±25o axial rotation about the longitudinal axis from the horizontal plane of the vehicle — see Figure 7.

Figure 7

Axial rotation of the coupled drawbar eye

Image

| 3.5. | Locking to prevent inadvertent uncoupling:
  In the closed position the coupling pin shall be locked by two positive mechanical engagement locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.
  The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be clearly indicated externally by a mechanical device. It shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, in the dark.
  The mechanical indication device shall indicate the engagement of both locking devices (an AND condition).
  However, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one locking device to be indicated if, in this situation, engagement of the second locking device is an inherent feature of the design. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.

Locking to prevent inadvertent uncoupling:

In the closed position the coupling pin shall be locked by two positive mechanical engagement locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.

The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be clearly indicated externally by a mechanical device. It shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, in the dark.

The mechanical indication device shall indicate the engagement of both locking devices (an AND condition).

However, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one locking device to be indicated if, in this situation, engagement of the second locking device is an inherent feature of the design.

| 3.6. | Hand levers
  Hand levers shall be of a design suitable for easy use with the end rounded off. The coupling shall not have any sharp edges or points of possible pinching near the hand lever which could result in injury during operation of the coupling. The force needed to release the coupling, measured without the drawbar eye, shall not exceed 250 N perpendicular to the hand lever along the line of operation. |
| --- | --- |

3.6.

Hand levers

Hand levers shall be of a design suitable for easy use with the end rounded off. The coupling shall not have any sharp edges or points of possible pinching near the hand lever which could result in injury during operation of the coupling. The force needed to release the coupling, measured without the drawbar eye, shall not exceed 250 N perpendicular to the hand lever along the line of operation.

| 3.7. | Special requirements for standard drawbar couplings of Class C50-1 to C50-6: |
| --- | --- |

3.7.

Special requirements for standard drawbar couplings of Class C50-1 to C50-6:

| 3.7.1. | The swivel motion of the drawbar eye about the transverse axis must be achieved through the spherical shape of the coupling pin (and not by means of a joint); |
| --- | --- |

3.7.1.

The swivel motion of the drawbar eye about the transverse axis must be achieved through the spherical shape of the coupling pin (and not by means of a joint);

| 3.7.2. | Tensile and compressive shock loads along the longitudinal axis due to the clearance between the coupling pin and the drawbar eye shall be attenuated by spring and/or damping devices (except C50-1). |
| --- | --- |

3.7.2.

Tensile and compressive shock loads along the longitudinal axis due to the clearance between the coupling pin and the drawbar eye shall be attenuated by spring and/or damping devices (except C50-1).

| 3.7.3. | The dimensions shall be as given in Figure 8 and Table 4. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.3.

The dimensions shall be as given in Figure 8 and Table 4.

| 3.7.4. | The couplings shall be suitable and tested for the characteristic values given in Table 5. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.4.

The couplings shall be suitable and tested for the characteristic values given in Table 5.

| 3.7.5. | The coupling shall be opened by means of a hand lever at the coupling (no remote control). |
| --- | --- |

3.7.5.

The coupling shall be opened by means of a hand lever at the coupling (no remote control).

Figure 8

Dimensions of standard drawbar couplings (mm),

(see Table 4)

Image

Table 4

Dimensions of standard drawbar couplings (mm), see Figure 8

| Class | C50-1 | C50-2 | C50-3 | C50-4 | C50-5 | C50-6, C50-7 | Remarks |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| e1 | 83 | 83 | 120 | 140 | 160 | 160 | ±0,5 |
| e2 | 56 | 56 | 55 | 80 | 100 | 100 | ±0,5 |
| d1 | | 54 | 74 | 84 | 94 | 94 | max. |
| d2 | 10,5 | 10,5 | 15 | 17 | 21 | 21 | H13 |
| f | 110 | 110 | 155 | 180 | 140 | 140 | ±3,0 |
| g | 85 | 85 | 90 | 120 | 140 | 140 | ±3,0 |
| a | 100 | 170 | 200 | 200 | 200 | 200 | ±20,0 - 0 |
| b | 150 | 280 | 360 | 360 | 360 | 360 | ±20,0 - 0 |
| c | 20 | 20 | 24 | 30 | 30 | 30 | max. |
| h | 150 | 190 | 265 | 265 | 265 | 265 | max. |
| l1 | | 150 | 250 | 300 | 300 | 300 | max. |
| l2 | 150 | 300 | 330 | 330 | 330 | 330 | max. |
| l3 | 100 | 160 | 180 | 180 | 180 | 180 | ±20,0 |
| T | | 15 | 20 | 35 | 35 | 35 | max. |

Class

C50-1

C50-2

C50-3

C50-4

C50-5

C50-6, C50-7

Remarks

e1

83

83

120

140

160

160

±0,5

e2

56

56

55

80

100

100

±0,5

d1

54

74

84

94

94

max.

d2

10,5

10,5

15

17

21

21

H13

f

110

110

155

180

140

140

±3,0

g

85

85

90

120

140

140

±3,0

a

100

170

200

200

200

200

±20,0 - 0

b

150

280

360

360

360

360

±20,0 - 0

c

20

20

24

30

30

30

max.

h

150

190

265

265

265

265

max.

l1

150

250

300

300

300

max.

l2

150

300

330

330

330

330

max.

l3

100

160

180

180

180

180

±20,0

T

15

20

35

35

35

max.

Table 5

Characteristic values for standard drawbar couplings

| Class | C50-1 | C50-2 | C50-3 | C50-4 | C50-5 | C50-6 | C50-7 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| D | 18 | 25 | 70 | 100 | 130 | 190 | 190 |
| Dc | 18 | 25 | 50 | 70 | 90 | 120 | 130 |
| S | 200 | 250 | 650 | 900 | 1000 | 1000 | 1000 |
| V | 12 | 10 | 18 | 25 | 35 | 50 | 75 |

Class

C50-1

C50-2

C50-3

C50-4

C50-5

C50-6

C50-7

D

18

25

70

100

130

190

190

Dc

18

25

50

70

90

120

130

S

200

250

650

900

1000

1000

1000

V

12

10

18

25

35

50

75

| D | = | maximum D value (kN) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Dc | = | maximum D value (kN) for centre axle trailer applications |
| S | = | maximum static vertical load on coupling (kg) |
| V | = | maximum V value (kN) |

D

=

maximum D value (kN)

Dc

=

maximum D value (kN) for centre axle trailer applications

S

=

maximum static vertical load on coupling (kg)

V

=

maximum V value (kN)

4.   DRAWBAR EYES

| 4.1. | General requirements for drawbar eyes of Class D50:
  All drawbar eyes of Class D50 shall be able to satisfy the test stated in annex 6, paragraph 3.4.
  Class D50 drawbar eyes are intended for use with C50 drawbar couplings. Drawbar eyes shall not be able to rotate axially (because the respective couplings can rotate).
  If Class D50 drawbar eyes are fitted with sleeves, they shall comply with the dimensions shown in Figure 9 (not permitted for Class D50-C) or Figure 10.
  The sleeves must not be welded into the drawbar eyes.
  Class D50 drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions given in paragraph 4.2. The form of shank for drawbar eyes of Class D50-X is not specified but for a distance of 210 mm from the centre of the eye the height “h” and the width “b” shall be within the limits given in Table 6. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.

General requirements for drawbar eyes of Class D50:

All drawbar eyes of Class D50 shall be able to satisfy the test stated in annex 6, paragraph 3.4.

Class D50 drawbar eyes are intended for use with C50 drawbar couplings. Drawbar eyes shall not be able to rotate axially (because the respective couplings can rotate).

If Class D50 drawbar eyes are fitted with sleeves, they shall comply with the dimensions shown in Figure 9 (not permitted for Class D50-C) or Figure 10.

The sleeves must not be welded into the drawbar eyes.

Class D50 drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions given in paragraph 4.2. The form of shank for drawbar eyes of Class D50-X is not specified but for a distance of 210 mm from the centre of the eye the height “h” and the width “b” shall be within the limits given in Table 6.

Figure 9

Slotted sleeve for Class D50 drawbar eyes

Image

Figure 10

Non-slotted sleeve for Class D50-C drawbar eyes

Image

Table 6

Dimensions for drawbar eyes D50-A and D50-X, see Figure 11

| Class | h (mm) | b (mm) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| D50-A | 65 +2/-1 | 60 +2/-1 |
| D50-X | 80 max. | 62 max. |

Class

h (mm)

b (mm)

D50-A

65 +2/-1

60 +2/-1

D50-X

80 max.

62 max.

Table 7

Characteristic values for standard drawbar eyes

| Class | D | Dc | S | V |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| D50-A | 130 | 90 | 1 000 | 30 |
| D50-B | 130 | 90 | 1 000 | 25 |
| D50-C | 190 | 120 | 1 000 | 50 |
| D50-D | 190 | 130 | 1 000 | 75 |

Class

D

Dc

S

V

D50-A

130

90

1 000

30

D50-B

130

90

1 000

25

D50-C

190

120

1 000

50

D50-D

190

130

1 000

75

| 4.2. | Special requirements for Class D50 drawbar eyes: |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

Special requirements for Class D50 drawbar eyes:

| 4.2.1. | Class D50-A and D50-X drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 11. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.1.

Class D50-A and D50-X drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 11.

Figure 11

Dimensions of Classes D50-A and D50-X drawbar eyes,

(see Table 6)

Image

| 4.2.2. | Class D50-B drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 12. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.2.

Class D50-B drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 12.

Figure 12

Dimensions of Class D50-B drawbar eyes,

(see other dimensions in Figure 11)

Image

| 4.2.3. | Classes D50-C and D50-D drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 13. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.3.

Classes D50-C and D50-D drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions illustrated in Figure 13.

Figure 13

Dimensions of Classes D50-C and D50-D drawbar eyes,

(see other dimensions in Figure 11)

Image

| 4.2.4. | Classes D50-C and D50-D drawbar eyes shall be fitted with non slotted sleeves shown in Figure 10. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.4.

Classes D50-C and D50-D drawbar eyes shall be fitted with non slotted sleeves shown in Figure 10.

| 4.3. | Load values for standard drawbar eyes.
  Standard drawbar eyes and the means of attachment shall be suitable for, and tested for, the load values stated in Table 7. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.

Load values for standard drawbar eyes.

Standard drawbar eyes and the means of attachment shall be suitable for, and tested for, the load values stated in Table 7.

| 4.4. | General requirements for Class L toroidal drawbar eyes: |
| --- | --- |

4.4.

General requirements for Class L toroidal drawbar eyes:

| 4.4.1. | Class L toroidal drawbar eyes are intended for use with Class K hook type couplings |
| --- | --- |

4.4.1.

Class L toroidal drawbar eyes are intended for use with Class K hook type couplings

| 4.4.2. | When used with a Class K hook type coupling they shall meet the requirements for articulation given in paragraph 10.2 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.2.

When used with a Class K hook type coupling they shall meet the requirements for articulation given in paragraph 10.2 of this annex.

| 4.4.3. | Class L toroidal drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions given in Figure 14 and Table 8 |
| --- | --- |

4.4.3.

Class L toroidal drawbar eyes shall have the dimensions given in Figure 14 and Table 8

Figure 14

Dimensions of Class L toroidal drawbar eyes

(see Table 8)

Image

| 4.4.4. | Class L toroidal drawbar eyes shall satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.4 and shall be suitable for the characteristic values given in Table 9.
  Table 8
  Dimensions of Class L toroidal drawbar eyes — see Figure 14 (Dimensions in mm)











  Class | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 | remarks |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| a | 68
  +1,6/-0,0 | 76,2
  ±0,8 | 76,2
  ±0,8 | 76,2
  ±0,8 | 1 000 | |
| b | 41,2
  ±0,8 | 41,2
  ±0,8 | 41,2
  ±0,8 | 41,2
  ±0,8 | 41,2
  ±0,8 | |
| c | 70 | 65 | 65 | 65 | 70 | min. |

4.4.4.

Class L toroidal drawbar eyes shall satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.4 and shall be suitable for the characteristic values given in Table 9.

Table 8

Dimensions of Class L toroidal drawbar eyes — see Figure 14 (Dimensions in mm)

Class

L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

remarks

a

68

+1,6/-0,0

76,2

±0,8

76,2

±0,8

76,2

±0,8

1 000

b

41,2

±0,8

41,2

±0,8

41,2

±0,8

41,2

±0,8

41,2

±0,8

c

70

65

65

65

70

min.

Table 9

Characteristic values for Class L toroidal drawbar eyes

| Class | L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | L5 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| D kN | 30 | 70 | 100 | 130 | 180 |
| Dc kN | 27 | 54 | 70 | 90 | 120 |
| S kg | 200 | 700 | 950 | 1 000 | 1 000 |
| V kN | 12 | 18 | 25 | 35 | 50 |

Class

L1

L2

L3

L4

L5

D kN

30

70

100

130

180

Dc kN

27

54

70

90

120

S kg

200

700

950

1 000

1 000

V kN

12

18

25

35

50

5.   DRAWBARS

| 5.1. | Drawbars of class E shall satisfy the tests prescribed in annex 6, paragraph 3.3. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

Drawbars of class E shall satisfy the tests prescribed in annex 6, paragraph 3.3.

| 5.2. | In order to provide a connection to the towing vehicle, the drawbars can be fitted either with coupling heads as in paragraph 2 or drawbar eyes as in paragraph 4 of this annex. The coupling heads and drawbar eyes can be attached by screwing, bolting or welding. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.

In order to provide a connection to the towing vehicle, the drawbars can be fitted either with coupling heads as in paragraph 2 or drawbar eyes as in paragraph 4 of this annex. The coupling heads and drawbar eyes can be attached by screwing, bolting or welding.

| 5.3. | Height adjusting devices for hinged drawbars. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.

Height adjusting devices for hinged drawbars.

| 5.3.1. | Hinged drawbars shall be fitted with devices for adjusting the drawbar to the height of the coupling device or jaw. These devices shall be designed so that the drawbar can be adjusted by one person without tools or any other aids. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.1.

Hinged drawbars shall be fitted with devices for adjusting the drawbar to the height of the coupling device or jaw. These devices shall be designed so that the drawbar can be adjusted by one person without tools or any other aids.

| 5.3.2. | Height adjusting devices shall be able to adjust the drawbar eyes or ball couplings from the horizontal above the ground at least 300 mm upwards and downwards. Within this range the drawbar shall be adjustable steplessly, or in maximum steps of 50 mm measured at the drawbar eye or ball coupling. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.2.

Height adjusting devices shall be able to adjust the drawbar eyes or ball couplings from the horizontal above the ground at least 300 mm upwards and downwards. Within this range the drawbar shall be adjustable steplessly, or in maximum steps of 50 mm measured at the drawbar eye or ball coupling.

| 5.3.3. | Height adjusting devices shall not interfere with the easy movement of the drawbar after coupling. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.3.

Height adjusting devices shall not interfere with the easy movement of the drawbar after coupling.

| 5.3.4. | The height adjusting devices shall not interfere with the action of any inertia, overrun type, brake. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.4.

The height adjusting devices shall not interfere with the action of any inertia, overrun type, brake.

| 5.4. | In the case of drawbars combined with inertia, overrun, brakes, the distance between the centre of the drawbar eye and the end of the free shank of the drawbar eye shall not be less than 200 mm in the brake application position. With the shank of the drawbar eye fully inserted the distance shall not be less than 150 mm. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.

In the case of drawbars combined with inertia, overrun, brakes, the distance between the centre of the drawbar eye and the end of the free shank of the drawbar eye shall not be less than 200 mm in the brake application position. With the shank of the drawbar eye fully inserted the distance shall not be less than 150 mm.

| 5.5. | Drawbars for use on centre axle trailers shall possess at least half the moment of resistance against lateral forces as against vertical forces. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.

Drawbars for use on centre axle trailers shall possess at least half the moment of resistance against lateral forces as against vertical forces.

6.   DRAWBEAMS

| 6.1. | Drawbeams of Class F shall satisfy the tests prescribed in annex 6, paragraph 3.3. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.

Drawbeams of Class F shall satisfy the tests prescribed in annex 6, paragraph 3.3.

| 6.2. | The drilling pattern for mounting of Class C standard drawbar couplings shall be in accordance with Figure 15 and Table 10 below. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.

The drilling pattern for mounting of Class C standard drawbar couplings shall be in accordance with Figure 15 and Table 10 below.

| 6.3. | Drawbeams shall not be welded to the chassis, bodywork or other part of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.

Drawbeams shall not be welded to the chassis, bodywork or other part of the vehicle.

Figure 15

Mounting dimensions for standard drawbar couplings

(see Table 10)

Image

Table 10

Mounting dimensions for standard drawbar couplings (mm) — see Figure 15

| Class | C50-1 | C50-2 | C50-3 | C50-4 | C50-5 | C50-6, C50-7 | Remarks |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| e1 | 83 | 83 | 120 | 140 | 160 | 160 | ±0,5 |
| e2 | 56 | 56 | 55 | 80 | 100 | 100 | ±0,5 |
| d1 | | 55 | 75 | 85 | 95 | 95 | +1,0/-0,5 |
| d2 | 10,5 | 10,5 | 15 | 17 | 21 | 21 | H13 |
| T | | 15 | 20 | 35 | 35 | 35 | max. |
| F | 120 | 120 | 165 | 190 | 210 | 210 | min. |
| G | 195 | 95 | 100 | 130 | 150 | 150 | min. |
| L1 | | 200 | 300 | 400 | 400 | 400 | min. |

Class

C50-1

C50-2

C50-3

C50-4

C50-5

C50-6, C50-7

Remarks

e1

83

83

120

140

160

160

±0,5

e2

56

56

55

80

100

100

±0,5

d1

55

75

85

95

95

+1,0/-0,5

d2

10,5

10,5

15

17

21

21

H13

T

15

20

35

35

35

max.

F

120

120

165

190

210

210

min.

G

195

95

100

130

150

150

min.

L1

200

300

400

400

400

min.

7.   FIFTH WHEEL COUPLINGS AND STEERING WEDGES

The requirements of paragraphs 7.1 to 7.7 are applicable to all fifth wheel couplings of Class G50.

Additional requirements which shall be fulfilled by standard coupling devices are given in paragraph 7.9.

Steering wedges shall satisfy the requirements listed in paragraph 7.8.

| 7.1. | Suitable fifth wheel coupling pins
  Class G50 fifth wheel couplings shall be designed so that they can be used with Class H50 coupling pins and, together, provide the specified characteristics. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.

Suitable fifth wheel coupling pins

Class G50 fifth wheel couplings shall be designed so that they can be used with Class H50 coupling pins and, together, provide the specified characteristics.

| 7.2. | Guides
  Fifth wheel couplings shall be equipped with a guide which ensures safe and correct engagement of the coupling pin. The entry width of the guide for standard 50 mm diameter fifth wheel couplings shall be at least 350 mm (see Figure 16).
  For small, non-standard, fifth wheel couplings of Class G50-X and having a maximum “D” value of 25 kN, the entry width shall be at least 250 mm. |
| --- | --- |

7.2.

Guides

Fifth wheel couplings shall be equipped with a guide which ensures safe and correct engagement of the coupling pin. The entry width of the guide for standard 50 mm diameter fifth wheel couplings shall be at least 350 mm (see Figure 16).

For small, non-standard, fifth wheel couplings of Class G50-X and having a maximum “D” value of 25 kN, the entry width shall be at least 250 mm.

Figure 16

Dimensions of standard fifth wheel couplings

(see Table 11)

Image

Figure 16a

Mounting holes tolerances for class J mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings

(see para. 9.1. of this annex)

Image

Table 11

Dimensions of standard fifth wheel couplings (mm)

(see Figure 16)

| Class | G50-1 | G50-2 | G50-3 | G50-4 | G50-5 | G50-6 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| H | 140-159 | 160-179 | 180199 | 200-219 | 220-239 | 240-260 |

Class

G50-1

G50-2

G50-3

G50-4

G50-5

G50-6

H

140-159

160-179

180199

200-219

220-239

240-260

| 7.3. | Minimum articulation of the fifth wheel coupling
  With the coupling pin engaged, without the fifth wheel coupling being attached to a vehicle or mounting plate, but taking into account the effect of the mounting bolts, the coupling shall permit, simultaneously, the following minimum values of articulation of the coupling pin: |
| --- | --- |

7.3.

Minimum articulation of the fifth wheel coupling

With the coupling pin engaged, without the fifth wheel coupling being attached to a vehicle or mounting plate, but taking into account the effect of the mounting bolts, the coupling shall permit, simultaneously, the following minimum values of articulation of the coupling pin:

| 7.3.1. | ±90o about the vertical axis (not applicable to fifth wheel couplings with positive steering); |
| --- | --- |

7.3.1.

±90o about the vertical axis (not applicable to fifth wheel couplings with positive steering);

| 7.3.2. | ±12o about the horizontal axis transverse to the direction of travel. This angle does not necessarily cover off-road use. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.2.

±12o about the horizontal axis transverse to the direction of travel. This angle does not necessarily cover off-road use.

| 7.3.3. | Axial rotation about the longitudinal axis of up to ±3o is permitted. However, on a fully oscillating fifth wheel coupling, this angle may be exceeded, providing that the locking mechanism enables the restriction of the rotation to ±3o maximum. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.3.

Axial rotation about the longitudinal axis of up to ±3o is permitted. However, on a fully oscillating fifth wheel coupling, this angle may be exceeded, providing that the locking mechanism enables the restriction of the rotation to ±3o maximum.

| 7.4. | Locking devices to prevent uncoupling of fifth wheel couplings
  The fifth wheel coupling shall be locked in the coupled position by two positive mechanical locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.
  The primary locking device shall operate automatically but the secondary locking device may either be automatic or be engaged manually. The secondary locking device may be designed to work in conjunction with the primary device and provide an additional positive mechanical lock for the primary device. It shall only be possible to engage the secondary locking device if the primary device is properly engaged.
  It shall not be possible for the locking devices to be released inadvertently. Release shall require intentional action by the driver or operator of the vehicle.
  The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be indicated visually by a mechanical device and it shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, to allow the position to be checked during darkness. The indication device shall indicate the engagement of both primary and secondary locking devices, however, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one device to be indicated if, in this case, the engagement of the other device is a simultaneous and inherent feature of the design. |
| --- | --- |

7.4.

Locking devices to prevent uncoupling of fifth wheel couplings

The fifth wheel coupling shall be locked in the coupled position by two positive mechanical locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.

The primary locking device shall operate automatically but the secondary locking device may either be automatic or be engaged manually. The secondary locking device may be designed to work in conjunction with the primary device and provide an additional positive mechanical lock for the primary device. It shall only be possible to engage the secondary locking device if the primary device is properly engaged.

It shall not be possible for the locking devices to be released inadvertently. Release shall require intentional action by the driver or operator of the vehicle.

The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be indicated visually by a mechanical device and it shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, to allow the position to be checked during darkness. The indication device shall indicate the engagement of both primary and secondary locking devices, however, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one device to be indicated if, in this case, the engagement of the other device is a simultaneous and inherent feature of the design.

| 7.5. | Operating devices or release mechanisms
  In the closed position the operating devices or release mechanisms shall be prevented from being operated inadvertently or accidentally. The locking system shall be such as to require positive, conscious action to release the locking device in order to operate coupling release mechanism. |
| --- | --- |

7.5.

Operating devices or release mechanisms

In the closed position the operating devices or release mechanisms shall be prevented from being operated inadvertently or accidentally. The locking system shall be such as to require positive, conscious action to release the locking device in order to operate coupling release mechanism.

| 7.6. | Surface finish
  The surfaces of the coupling plate and coupling lock shall be functionally satisfactory and be carefully machined, forged, cast or pressed. |
| --- | --- |

7.6.

Surface finish

The surfaces of the coupling plate and coupling lock shall be functionally satisfactory and be carefully machined, forged, cast or pressed.

| 7.7. | Load requirements
  All fifth wheel couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 4.7. |
| --- | --- |

7.7.

Load requirements

All fifth wheel couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 4.7.

| 7.8. | Steering wedges |
| --- | --- |

7.8.

Steering wedges

| 7.8.1. | The dimensions of steering wedges for the positive steering of semitrailers shall be as in Figure 17. |
| --- | --- |

7.8.1.

The dimensions of steering wedges for the positive steering of semitrailers shall be as in Figure 17.

Figure 17

Dimensions of spring-mounted steering wedges

Image

| 7.8.2. | The steering wedge shall allow safe and correct coupling and shall be spring-mounted. The strength of the spring shall be selected so that it is possible to couple an unloaded semitrailer and so that, with the semitrailer fully loaded the steering wedge is firmly in contact with the flanks of the coupling during use. Uncoupling of the fifth wheel shall be possible with the semitrailer both loaded and unloaded. |
| --- | --- |

7.8.2.

The steering wedge shall allow safe and correct coupling and shall be spring-mounted. The strength of the spring shall be selected so that it is possible to couple an unloaded semitrailer and so that, with the semitrailer fully loaded the steering wedge is firmly in contact with the flanks of the coupling during use. Uncoupling of the fifth wheel shall be possible with the semitrailer both loaded and unloaded.

| 7.9. | Special requirements for standard fifth wheel couplings: |
| --- | --- |

7.9.

Special requirements for standard fifth wheel couplings:

| 7.9.1. | the dimensions shall be as shown in Figure 16 and Table 11. |
| --- | --- |

7.9.1.

the dimensions shall be as shown in Figure 16 and Table 11.

| 7.9.2. | they shall be suitable for, and tested for, a D value of 150 kN and a U value of 20 tonnes. |
| --- | --- |

7.9.2.

they shall be suitable for, and tested for, a D value of 150 kN and a U value of 20 tonnes.

| 7.9.3. | release shall be possible by a hand lever mounted directly on the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

7.9.3.

release shall be possible by a hand lever mounted directly on the coupling.

| 7.9.4. | they shall be suitable for the positive steering of semitrailers by means of steering wedges — see paragraph 7.8. |
| --- | --- |

7.9.4.

they shall be suitable for the positive steering of semitrailers by means of steering wedges — see paragraph 7.8.

8.   FIFTH WHEEL COUPLING PINS

| 8.1. | Fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H50 (ISO 337) shall have the dimensions shown in Figure 18 |
| --- | --- |

8.1.

Fifth wheel coupling pins of Class H50 (ISO 337) shall have the dimensions shown in Figure 18

Figure 18

Dimensions of Class H50 fifth wheel coupling pins

Image

| 8.2. | The coupling pins shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 3.9. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.

The coupling pins shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 3.9.

9.   MOUNTING PLATES

| 9.1. | Class J mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings shall have circular mounting holes positioned as shown in Figure 16a if they are intended for standard fifth wheel couplings. However, the mounting holes shall be 17 mm + 2,0 mm/-0,0 mm diameter. The holes shall be circular, NOT slotted (see Figure 16a). |
| --- | --- |

9.1.

Class J mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings shall have circular mounting holes positioned as shown in Figure 16a if they are intended for standard fifth wheel couplings. However, the mounting holes shall be 17 mm + 2,0 mm/-0,0 mm diameter. The holes shall be circular, NOT slotted (see Figure 16a).

| 9.2. | Mounting plates for standard fifth wheel couplings shall be suitable for the positive steering of semitrailers (with steering wedges). Mounting plates for non-standard fifth wheel couplings which are unsuitable for positive steering shall be marked appropriately. |
| --- | --- |

9.2.

Mounting plates for standard fifth wheel couplings shall be suitable for the positive steering of semitrailers (with steering wedges). Mounting plates for non-standard fifth wheel couplings which are unsuitable for positive steering shall be marked appropriately.

| 9.3. | Mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 3.8. |
| --- | --- |

9.3.

Mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings shall be able to satisfy the tests described in annex 6, paragraph 3.8.

10.   HOOK TYPE COUPLINGS

| 10.1. | General requirements for Class K hook type couplings: |
| --- | --- |

10.1.

General requirements for Class K hook type couplings:

| 10.1.1. | All Class K hook type couplings shall satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.5 and shall be suitable for the characteristic values given in Table 13 |
| --- | --- |

10.1.1.

All Class K hook type couplings shall satisfy the tests given in annex 6, paragraph 3.5 and shall be suitable for the characteristic values given in Table 13

| 10.1.2. | Class K hook type couplings shall have the dimensions given in Figure 19 and Table 12. Class K1 to K4 are non-automatic couplings for use only on trailers not exceeding 3,5 tonnes maximum permissible mass and Class KA1 to KA3 are automatic couplings. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.2.

Class K hook type couplings shall have the dimensions given in Figure 19 and Table 12. Class K1 to K4 are non-automatic couplings for use only on trailers not exceeding 3,5 tonnes maximum permissible mass and Class KA1 to KA3 are automatic couplings.

Figure 19

Dimensions and articulation of Class K hook type couplings

Image

| 10.1.3. | A hook type coupling shall only be used with a toroidal drawbar eye and when used with a Class L toroidal drawbar eye the Class K coupling shall have the degrees of articulation given in paragraph 10.2 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.3.

A hook type coupling shall only be used with a toroidal drawbar eye and when used with a Class L toroidal drawbar eye the Class K coupling shall have the degrees of articulation given in paragraph 10.2 of this annex.

| 10.1.4. | A Class K hook type coupling shall be used with a toroidal eye giving a minimum clearance, or free movement, of 3 mm and a maximum clearance of 5 mm when new. Suitable drawbar eyes shall be declared by the coupling manufacturer on the Communication form shown in annex 1. |
| --- | --- |

10.1.4.

A Class K hook type coupling shall be used with a toroidal eye giving a minimum clearance, or free movement, of 3 mm and a maximum clearance of 5 mm when new. Suitable drawbar eyes shall be declared by the coupling manufacturer on the Communication form shown in annex 1.

| 10.2. | A Class K coupling when used with a Class L toroidal eye, but not fitted to a vehicle, shall have the following non-simultaneous angles of articulation — see also Figure 19: |
| --- | --- |

10.2.

A Class K coupling when used with a Class L toroidal eye, but not fitted to a vehicle, shall have the following non-simultaneous angles of articulation — see also Figure 19:

| 10.2.1. | ±90o horizontally about the vertical axis of the coupling; |
| --- | --- |

10.2.1.

±90o horizontally about the vertical axis of the coupling;

| 10.2.2. | ±40o vertically about the horizontal transverse axis of the coupling; |
| --- | --- |

10.2.2.

±40o vertically about the horizontal transverse axis of the coupling;

| 10.2.3. | ±20o axial rotation about the horizontal longitudinal centre line of the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

10.2.3.

±20o axial rotation about the horizontal longitudinal centre line of the coupling.

| 10.3. | Automatic Class K hook type couplings shall have a jaw designed such that the drawbar eye is guided into the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

10.3.

Automatic Class K hook type couplings shall have a jaw designed such that the drawbar eye is guided into the coupling.

| 10.4. | Locking to prevent inadvertent uncoupling:
  In the closed position the coupling shall be locked by two positive mechanical engagement locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.
  The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be clearly indicated externally by a mechanical device. It shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, in the dark.
  The mechanical indication device shall indicate the engagement of both locking devices (an AND condition).
  However, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one locking device to be indicated if, in this situation, engagement of the second locking device is an inherent feature of the design. |
| --- | --- |

10.4.

Locking to prevent inadvertent uncoupling:

In the closed position the coupling shall be locked by two positive mechanical engagement locking devices each of which shall remain effective should the other fail.

The closed and locked position of the coupling shall be clearly indicated externally by a mechanical device. It shall be possible to verify the position of the indicator by feel, for example, in the dark.

The mechanical indication device shall indicate the engagement of both locking devices (an AND condition).

However, it is sufficient for the engagement of only one locking device to be indicated if, in this situation, engagement of the second locking device is an inherent feature of the design.

| 10.5. | Hand levers
  Hand levers shall be of a design suitable for easy use with the end rounded off. The coupling shall not have any sharp edges or points of possible pinching near the hand lever which could result in injury during operation of the coupling. The force needed to release the coupling, measured without the drawbar eye, shall not exceed 250 N perpendicular to the hand lever along the line of operation.
  Table 12
  Dimensions for Class K hook type couplings — see Figure 19













  Class | K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | KA1 | KA2 | KA3 | Remarks |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| e1 | | 83 | 83 | 120 | 120 | 140 | 160 | ±0,5 |
| e2 | | 56 | 56 | 55 | 55 | 80 | 100 | ±0,5 |
| e3 | 90 | | | | | | | ±0,5 |
| d2 | 17 | 10,5 | 10,5 | 15 | 15 | 17 | 21 | H13 |
| c | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | min. |
| f | 130 | 175 | 175 | 180 | 180 | 200 | 200 | max. |
| g | 100 | 100 | 100 | 120 | 120 | 140 | 200 | max. |
| a | 45 | 45 | 45 | 45 | 45 | 45 | 45 | ±1,6 - 0 |
| L1 | 120 | 120 | 120 | 120 | 250 | 300 | 300 | max. |
| L2 | 74 | 74 | 63 | 74 | 90 | 90 | 90 | max. |
| L3 | 110 | 130 | 130 | 150 | 150 | 200 | 200 | max. |

10.5.

Hand levers

Hand levers shall be of a design suitable for easy use with the end rounded off. The coupling shall not have any sharp edges or points of possible pinching near the hand lever which could result in injury during operation of the coupling. The force needed to release the coupling, measured without the drawbar eye, shall not exceed 250 N perpendicular to the hand lever along the line of operation.

Table 12

Dimensions for Class K hook type couplings — see Figure 19

Class

K1

K2

K3

K4

KA1

KA2

KA3

Remarks

e1

83

83

120

120

140

160

±0,5

e2

56

56

55

55

80

100

±0,5

e3

90

±0,5

d2

17

10,5

10,5

15

15

17

21

H13

c

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

min.

f

130

175

175

180

180

200

200

max.

g

100

100

100

120

120

140

200

max.

a

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

±1,6 - 0

L1

120

120

120

120

250

300

300

max.

L2

74

74

63

74

90

90

90

max.

L3

110

130

130

150

150

200

200

max.

Table 13

Characteristic values for Class K hook type couplings

| Class | K1 | K2 | K3 | K4 | KA1 | KA2 | KA3 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| D kN | 17 | 20 | 20 | 25 | 70 | 100 | 130 |
| Dc kN | | | 17 | 20 | 54 | 70 | 90 |
| S kg | 120 | 120 | 200 | 250 | 700 | 900 | 1000 |
| V kN | | | 10 | 10 | 18 | 25 | 35 |

Class

K1

K2

K3

K4

KA1

KA2

KA3

D kN

17

20

20

25

70

100

130

Dc kN

17

20

54

70

90

S kg

120

120

200

250

700

900

1000

V kN

10

10

18

25

35

11.   DEDICATED DRAWBAR TYPE COUPLINGS — CLASS T

| 11.1. | Class T dedicated drawbar type couplings are intended for use on specific vehicle combinations, for example, car transporters. These vehicles have special structures and may need particular and unusual location of the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

11.1.

Class T dedicated drawbar type couplings are intended for use on specific vehicle combinations, for example, car transporters. These vehicles have special structures and may need particular and unusual location of the coupling.

| 11.2. | Class T couplings shall be restricted to use with centre axle trailers and this restriction shall be notified on the Communication form shown in annex 1. |
| --- | --- |

11.2.

Class T couplings shall be restricted to use with centre axle trailers and this restriction shall be notified on the Communication form shown in annex 1.

| 11.3. | Class T couplings shall be approved as a matched pair and it shall not be possible to separate the coupling other than in a workshop using tools which are not normally carried on the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

11.3.

Class T couplings shall be approved as a matched pair and it shall not be possible to separate the coupling other than in a workshop using tools which are not normally carried on the vehicle.

| 11.4. | Class T couplings shall not be automatic in operation. |
| --- | --- |

11.4.

Class T couplings shall not be automatic in operation.

| 11.5. | Class T couplings shall satisfy the relevant test requirements given in annex 6, paragraph 3.3., except paragraph 3.3.4. |
| --- | --- |

11.5.

Class T couplings shall satisfy the relevant test requirements given in annex 6, paragraph 3.3., except paragraph 3.3.4.

| 11.6. | The following minimum and simultaneous angles of articulation shall be possible with the coupling not fitted to a vehicle but assembled, and in the same normal position as when fitted to a vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

11.6.

The following minimum and simultaneous angles of articulation shall be possible with the coupling not fitted to a vehicle but assembled, and in the same normal position as when fitted to a vehicle;

| 11.6.1. | ±90o horizontally about the vertical axis; |
| --- | --- |

11.6.1.

±90o horizontally about the vertical axis;

| 11.6.2. | ±8o vertically about the horizontal transverse axis; |
| --- | --- |

11.6.2.

±8o vertically about the horizontal transverse axis;

| 11.6.3. | ±3o axial rotation about the horizontal longitudinal axis. |
| --- | --- |

11.6.3.

±3o axial rotation about the horizontal longitudinal axis.

12.   DEVICES FOR REMOTE INDICATION AND REMOTE CONTROL

| 12.1. | General requirements
  Devices for remote indication and remote control are permitted only on automatic coupling devices of Classes C50-X and G50-X.
  Devices for remote indication and remote control shall not interfere with the minimum free movement of the coupled drawbar eye or coupled semitrailer. They shall be permanently fitted to the vehicle.
  All the devices for remote indication or remote control fall within the scope of testing and approval of the coupling device together with all parts of the operating devices and transmission devices. |
| --- | --- |

12.1.

General requirements

Devices for remote indication and remote control are permitted only on automatic coupling devices of Classes C50-X and G50-X.

Devices for remote indication and remote control shall not interfere with the minimum free movement of the coupled drawbar eye or coupled semitrailer. They shall be permanently fitted to the vehicle.

All the devices for remote indication or remote control fall within the scope of testing and approval of the coupling device together with all parts of the operating devices and transmission devices.

| 12.2. | Remote indication |
| --- | --- |

12.2.

Remote indication

| 12.2.1. | For an automatic coupling procedure, remote indication devices shall indicate the closed and doubly locked position of the coupling in an optical manner according to paragraph 12.2.2. Additionally the open position may be indicated as in paragraph 12.2.3.
  The remote indication device shall be automatically activated and reset during every opening and closing of the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.1.

For an automatic coupling procedure, remote indication devices shall indicate the closed and doubly locked position of the coupling in an optical manner according to paragraph 12.2.2. Additionally the open position may be indicated as in paragraph 12.2.3.

The remote indication device shall be automatically activated and reset during every opening and closing of the coupling.

| 12.2.2. | The change from the open to the closed and doubly locked position shall be indicated by a green optical signal. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.2.

The change from the open to the closed and doubly locked position shall be indicated by a green optical signal.

| 12.2.3. | If the open and/or unlocked position is indicated, a red optical signal shall be used. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.3.

If the open and/or unlocked position is indicated, a red optical signal shall be used.

| 12.2.4. | In the case of indicating the completion of the automatic coupling procedure, the remote indicator shall ensure that the coupling pin has reached the doubly locked end position. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.4.

In the case of indicating the completion of the automatic coupling procedure, the remote indicator shall ensure that the coupling pin has reached the doubly locked end position.

| 12.2.5. | The appearance of any fault in the remote indication system shall not indicate a closed and locked position during the coupling procedure if the end position has not been reached. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.5.

The appearance of any fault in the remote indication system shall not indicate a closed and locked position during the coupling procedure if the end position has not been reached.

| 12.2.6. | The disengagement of one of the two locking devices shall cause the green optical signal to extinguish and the red optical signal (if fitted) to show. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.6.

The disengagement of one of the two locking devices shall cause the green optical signal to extinguish and the red optical signal (if fitted) to show.

| 12.2.7. | The mechanical indicators fitted directly to the coupling device shall be retained. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.7.

The mechanical indicators fitted directly to the coupling device shall be retained.

| 12.2.8. | In order to avoid distracting the driver during normal driving, there shall be a provision for switching off the remote indication device but this shall be automatically reactivated when the coupling is next opened and closed — see paragraph 12.2.1. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.8.

In order to avoid distracting the driver during normal driving, there shall be a provision for switching off the remote indication device but this shall be automatically reactivated when the coupling is next opened and closed — see paragraph 12.2.1.

| 12.2.9. | The operating controls and indicators of the remote indication devices shall be mounted within the driver's field of vision and be permanently and clearly identified. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.9.

The operating controls and indicators of the remote indication devices shall be mounted within the driver's field of vision and be permanently and clearly identified.

| 12.3. | Remote control |
| --- | --- |

12.3.

Remote control

| 12.3.1. | If a remote control device, as defined in paragraph 2.8 of this Regulation, is employed, there shall also be a remote indication device as described in paragraph 12.2 which shall at least indicate the open condition of the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.1.

If a remote control device, as defined in paragraph 2.8 of this Regulation, is employed, there shall also be a remote indication device as described in paragraph 12.2 which shall at least indicate the open condition of the coupling.

| 12.3.2. | There shall be a dedicated switch (i.e. master switch, lever or valve) to enable the coupling to be opened or closed by means of the remote control device. If this master switch is not located in the driving cab it shall not be in a position where it is freely accessible to unauthorised persons or it shall be lockable. The actual operation of the coupling from the driving cab may only be possible when inadvertent operation has been precluded, for example by an operation requiring the use of two hands.
  It shall be possible to ascertain whether opening of the coupling under remote control has been completed or not. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.2.

There shall be a dedicated switch (i.e. master switch, lever or valve) to enable the coupling to be opened or closed by means of the remote control device. If this master switch is not located in the driving cab it shall not be in a position where it is freely accessible to unauthorised persons or it shall be lockable. The actual operation of the coupling from the driving cab may only be possible when inadvertent operation has been precluded, for example by an operation requiring the use of two hands.

It shall be possible to ascertain whether opening of the coupling under remote control has been completed or not.

| 12.3.3. | If remote control involves the coupling being opened by external force, the condition under which the external force acts on the coupling shall be indicated appropriately to the driver. This is not necessary if the external force is only operative while the remote control is operating. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.3.

If remote control involves the coupling being opened by external force, the condition under which the external force acts on the coupling shall be indicated appropriately to the driver. This is not necessary if the external force is only operative while the remote control is operating.

| 12.3.4. | If the actuating device for opening the coupling under remote control is mounted externally on the vehicle it shall be possible to oversee the area between the coupled vehicles, but it shall not be necessary, however, to enter this area in order to operate it. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.4.

If the actuating device for opening the coupling under remote control is mounted externally on the vehicle it shall be possible to oversee the area between the coupled vehicles, but it shall not be necessary, however, to enter this area in order to operate it.

| 12.3.5. | Any single error in operation or the occurrence of any single fault in the system shall not result in accidental opening of the coupling during normal road use. Any faults in the system shall be indicated directly or be immediately obvious at the next operation e.g. by a malfunction. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.5.

Any single error in operation or the occurrence of any single fault in the system shall not result in accidental opening of the coupling during normal road use. Any faults in the system shall be indicated directly or be immediately obvious at the next operation e.g. by a malfunction.

| 12.3.6. | In the event of a failure of the remote control it shall be possible, in an emergency, to open the coupling in at least one other way. If this requires the use of a tool then this shall be included in vehicle's tool kit. The requirements of paragraph 3.6 of this annex are not applicable to hand levers used exclusively for opening the coupling in an emergency. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.6.

In the event of a failure of the remote control it shall be possible, in an emergency, to open the coupling in at least one other way. If this requires the use of a tool then this shall be included in vehicle's tool kit. The requirements of paragraph 3.6 of this annex are not applicable to hand levers used exclusively for opening the coupling in an emergency.

| 12.3.7. | The operating controls and indicators for the remote control devices shall be permanently and clearly identified. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.7.

The operating controls and indicators for the remote control devices shall be permanently and clearly identified.

ANNEX 6

TESTING OF MECHANICAL COUPLING DEVICES OR COMPONENTS

1.   GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

| 1.1. | Samples of coupling devices shall be tested for both strength and function. Physical testing shall be carried out wherever possible but unless stated otherwise the type approval authority or technical service may waive a physical strength test if the simple design of a component makes a theoretical check possible. Theoretical checks may be carried out to determine worst case conditions. In all cases, theoretical checks shall ensure the same quality of results as with dynamic or static testing. In cases of doubt it is the results of physical testing that are overriding.
  See also paragraph 4.8 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

Samples of coupling devices shall be tested for both strength and function. Physical testing shall be carried out wherever possible but unless stated otherwise the type approval authority or technical service may waive a physical strength test if the simple design of a component makes a theoretical check possible. Theoretical checks may be carried out to determine worst case conditions. In all cases, theoretical checks shall ensure the same quality of results as with dynamic or static testing. In cases of doubt it is the results of physical testing that are overriding.

See also paragraph 4.8 of this Regulation.

| 1.2. | With coupling devices the strength shall be verified by a dynamic test (endurance test). In certain cases additional static tests may be necessary (see paragraph 3 of this annex). |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

With coupling devices the strength shall be verified by a dynamic test (endurance test). In certain cases additional static tests may be necessary (see paragraph 3 of this annex).

| 1.3. | The dynamic test shall be performed with approximately sinusoidal load (alternating and/or pulsating) with a number of stress cycles appropriate to the material. No cracks or fractures shall occur. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

The dynamic test shall be performed with approximately sinusoidal load (alternating and/or pulsating) with a number of stress cycles appropriate to the material. No cracks or fractures shall occur.

| 1.4. | Only slight permanent deformation is permitted with the static tests prescribed. Unless stated otherwise the permanent, plastic, deformation after releasing shall not be more than 10 % of the maximum deformation measured during the test. In the case where measurement of deformation during the test puts the tester at risk then, provided that the same parameter is checked during other tests, such as the dynamic test, then this part of the static test may be omitted. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

Only slight permanent deformation is permitted with the static tests prescribed. Unless stated otherwise the permanent, plastic, deformation after releasing shall not be more than 10 % of the maximum deformation measured during the test. In the case where measurement of deformation during the test puts the tester at risk then, provided that the same parameter is checked during other tests, such as the dynamic test, then this part of the static test may be omitted.

| 1.5. | The loading assumptions in the dynamic tests are based on the horizontal force component in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle and the vertical force component. Horizontal force components transverse to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, and moments, are not taken into account provided they are of only minor significance.
  If the design of the coupling device or its attachment to the vehicle or the attachment of additional systems (such as stabilisers, close coupling devices, etc.) generate additional forces or moments, additional tests may be required by the type approval authority or technical service.
  The horizontal force component in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle is represented by a theoretically determined reference force, the D or Dc value. The vertical force component, where applicable, is represented by the static vertical bearing load, S, at the point of coupling and the assumed vertical load, V, or by the static vertical bearing load, U, in the case of fifth wheel couplings. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

The loading assumptions in the dynamic tests are based on the horizontal force component in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle and the vertical force component. Horizontal force components transverse to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, and moments, are not taken into account provided they are of only minor significance.

If the design of the coupling device or its attachment to the vehicle or the attachment of additional systems (such as stabilisers, close coupling devices, etc.) generate additional forces or moments, additional tests may be required by the type approval authority or technical service.

The horizontal force component in the longitudinal axis of the vehicle is represented by a theoretically determined reference force, the D or Dc value. The vertical force component, where applicable, is represented by the static vertical bearing load, S, at the point of coupling and the assumed vertical load, V, or by the static vertical bearing load, U, in the case of fifth wheel couplings.

| 1.6. | The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U, on which the tests are based and which are defined in paragraph 2.11. of this Regulation, shall be taken from the manufacturer's information given in the application for type approval — see communication form shown in annexes 1 and 2. |
| --- | --- |

1.6.

The characteristic values D, Dc, S, V and U, on which the tests are based and which are defined in paragraph 2.11. of this Regulation, shall be taken from the manufacturer's information given in the application for type approval — see communication form shown in annexes 1 and 2.

| 1.7. | Any positive locking device, which is retained in position by spring force, shall remain in its secured position when subjected to a force applied in the least favourable direction and equivalent to three times the mass of the locking mechanism. |
| --- | --- |

1.7.

Any positive locking device, which is retained in position by spring force, shall remain in its secured position when subjected to a force applied in the least favourable direction and equivalent to three times the mass of the locking mechanism.

2.   TEST PROCEDURES

| 2.1. | For the dynamic tests and static tests, the sample shall be placed in a suitable rig with a means of force application, such that it is not subjected to any additional forces or moments apart from the specified test force. In the case of alternating tests, the direction of force application shall not deviate by more than ±1o from the specified direction. In the case of pulsating and static tests, the angle shall be set for the maximum test force. This will normally require a joint at the point of force application (i.e. the point of coupling) and a second joint an adequate distance away. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

For the dynamic tests and static tests, the sample shall be placed in a suitable rig with a means of force application, such that it is not subjected to any additional forces or moments apart from the specified test force. In the case of alternating tests, the direction of force application shall not deviate by more than ±1o from the specified direction. In the case of pulsating and static tests, the angle shall be set for the maximum test force. This will normally require a joint at the point of force application (i.e. the point of coupling) and a second joint an adequate distance away.

| 2.2. | The test frequency shall not exceed 35 Hz. The selected frequency shall be well separated from resonance frequencies of the test set up including the tested device. With asynchronous testing the frequencies of the two force components shall be between approximately 1 per cent and a maximum of 3 per cent apart. For coupling devices made from steel the number of stress cycles is 2 × 106. For devices made from materials other than steel a higher number of cycles may be necessary. The dye‐penetration method of crack testing or an equivalent method shall be used to determine any cracking during test. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

The test frequency shall not exceed 35 Hz. The selected frequency shall be well separated from resonance frequencies of the test set up including the tested device. With asynchronous testing the frequencies of the two force components shall be between approximately 1 per cent and a maximum of 3 per cent apart. For coupling devices made from steel the number of stress cycles is 2 × 106. For devices made from materials other than steel a higher number of cycles may be necessary. The dye‐penetration method of crack testing or an equivalent method shall be used to determine any cracking during test.

| 2.3. | With pulsating tests, the test force varies between the maximum test force and a lower, minimum, test force, which may not be greater than 5 per cent of the maximum test force unless otherwise stated in the specific testing procedure. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

With pulsating tests, the test force varies between the maximum test force and a lower, minimum, test force, which may not be greater than 5 per cent of the maximum test force unless otherwise stated in the specific testing procedure.

| 2.4. | With static tests, other than the special tests required by paragraph 3.2.3 of this annex, the test force shall be applied smoothly and quickly and be maintained for at least 60 seconds. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

With static tests, other than the special tests required by paragraph 3.2.3 of this annex, the test force shall be applied smoothly and quickly and be maintained for at least 60 seconds.

| 2.5. | The coupling devices or component on test should normally be mounted as rigidly as possible on a test rig in the actual position in which they will be used on the vehicle. The fixing devices should be those specified by the manufacturer or applicant and should be those intended for the attachment of the coupling device or component to the vehicle and/or shall have identical mechanical characteristics. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

The coupling devices or component on test should normally be mounted as rigidly as possible on a test rig in the actual position in which they will be used on the vehicle. The fixing devices should be those specified by the manufacturer or applicant and should be those intended for the attachment of the coupling device or component to the vehicle and/or shall have identical mechanical characteristics.

| 2.6. | Coupling devices or components shall be tested in the form used on the road. However, at the discretion of the manufacturer, and in agreement with the technical service, flexible components may be neutralised if this is necessary for the test procedure and if this will not have any unrealistic influence on the test result.
  Flexible components which are overheated during these accelerated test procedures may be replaced during the test. The test loads may be applied by means of special slack‐free devices. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

Coupling devices or components shall be tested in the form used on the road. However, at the discretion of the manufacturer, and in agreement with the technical service, flexible components may be neutralised if this is necessary for the test procedure and if this will not have any unrealistic influence on the test result.

Flexible components which are overheated during these accelerated test procedures may be replaced during the test. The test loads may be applied by means of special slack‐free devices.

3.   SPECIFIC TESTING REQUIREMENTS

| 3.1. | Coupling balls and towing brackets |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

Coupling balls and towing brackets

| 3.1.1. | Mechanical coupling devices with coupling balls may be of the following types:






  (i) | one‐piece coupling balls including devices with noninterchangeable detachable balls (see Figures 20a and 20b), |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.1.1.

Mechanical coupling devices with coupling balls may be of the following types:

(i)

one‐piece coupling balls including devices with noninterchangeable detachable balls (see Figures 20a and 20b),

| (ii) | coupling balls, comprising a number of parts which can be dismantled (see Figures 20c, 20d and 20e), |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

coupling balls, comprising a number of parts which can be dismantled (see Figures 20c, 20d and 20e),

| (iii) | towing brackets without ball fitted (see Figure 20f). |
| --- | --- |

(iii)

towing brackets without ball fitted (see Figure 20f).

Figure 20

Arrangements of ball type towing brackets

Image

| 3.1.2. | The basic test is a dynamic endurance test. The test sample comprises the coupling ball, the ball neck and the mountings necessary for attaching the assembly to the vehicle. The coupling ball and towing bracket shall be rigidly mounted to a test rig, capable of producing an alternating force, in the actual position in which it is intended for use. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

The basic test is a dynamic endurance test. The test sample comprises the coupling ball, the ball neck and the mountings necessary for attaching the assembly to the vehicle. The coupling ball and towing bracket shall be rigidly mounted to a test rig, capable of producing an alternating force, in the actual position in which it is intended for use.

| 3.1.3. | The positions of the fixing points for attaching the coupling ball and towing bracket are specified by the vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 5.3.2 of this Regulation). |
| --- | --- |

3.1.3.

The positions of the fixing points for attaching the coupling ball and towing bracket are specified by the vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 5.3.2 of this Regulation).

| 3.1.4. | The devices submitted for test shall be provided with all parts and design details which may have an influence on the strength criteria (for example electrical socket plate, any marking, etc.). The test sample shall include all parts up to the anchorage points or fitting points to the vehicle. The geometric location of the coupling ball and the fixing points of the coupling device related to the reference line shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer and shall be shown in the test report. All relative positions of the anchorage points with respect to the reference line, for which the towing vehicle manufacturer shall provide all the necessary information to the towing device manufacturer, shall be repeated on the test bed. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.4.

The devices submitted for test shall be provided with all parts and design details which may have an influence on the strength criteria (for example electrical socket plate, any marking, etc.). The test sample shall include all parts up to the anchorage points or fitting points to the vehicle. The geometric location of the coupling ball and the fixing points of the coupling device related to the reference line shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer and shall be shown in the test report. All relative positions of the anchorage points with respect to the reference line, for which the towing vehicle manufacturer shall provide all the necessary information to the towing device manufacturer, shall be repeated on the test bed.

| 3.1.5. | The sample mounted on the test rig shall be subjected to an alternating stress test applied at an angle to the ball as shown in Figure 21 or 22.
  The direction of the angle of test shall be determined by the vertical relationship between a horizontal reference line passing through the centre of the ball and a horizontal line passing through the fixing point of the coupling device which is the highest of the nearest, when measured in a horizontal plane, to a transverse vertical plane passing through the centre of the ball. If the fixing point line is above the horizontal reference line, the test shall be carried out at an angle of α = + 15o ±1o and if it is below then the test shall be carried out at an angle of α = - 15o ±1o (see Figure 21). The fixing points to be considered in determining the angle of test shall be those declared by the vehicle manufacturer and which transmit the major towing forces to the structure of the towing vehicle.
  This angle is chosen in order to take account of the vertical static and dynamic load and is only applicable for a permitted static vertical load not exceeding:
  S = 120 × D [N]
  Where the static vertical load exceeds that calculated above, the angle shall, in both conditions, be increased to 20o.
  The dynamic test shall be performed with the following test force:
  Fhs res = ±0.6 D |
| --- | --- |

3.1.5.

The sample mounted on the test rig shall be subjected to an alternating stress test applied at an angle to the ball as shown in Figure 21 or 22.

The direction of the angle of test shall be determined by the vertical relationship between a horizontal reference line passing through the centre of the ball and a horizontal line passing through the fixing point of the coupling device which is the highest of the nearest, when measured in a horizontal plane, to a transverse vertical plane passing through the centre of the ball. If the fixing point line is above the horizontal reference line, the test shall be carried out at an angle of α = + 15o ±1o and if it is below then the test shall be carried out at an angle of α = - 15o ±1o (see Figure 21). The fixing points to be considered in determining the angle of test shall be those declared by the vehicle manufacturer and which transmit the major towing forces to the structure of the towing vehicle.

This angle is chosen in order to take account of the vertical static and dynamic load and is only applicable for a permitted static vertical load not exceeding:

S = 120 × D [N]

Where the static vertical load exceeds that calculated above, the angle shall, in both conditions, be increased to 20o.

The dynamic test shall be performed with the following test force:

Fhs res = ±0.6 D

| 3.1.6. | The test procedure is applicable to the different types of coupling devices (see paragraph 3.1.1 of this annex) as follows: |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.

The test procedure is applicable to the different types of coupling devices (see paragraph 3.1.1 of this annex) as follows:

| 3.1.6.1. | one piece coupling balls including devices with non‐interchangeable detachable balls (see Figures 20a and 20b). |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.1.

one piece coupling balls including devices with non‐interchangeable detachable balls (see Figures 20a and 20b).

| 3.1.6.1.1. | the strength test for the devices shown in Figures 20a and 20b shall be carried out according to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.1.1.

the strength test for the devices shown in Figures 20a and 20b shall be carried out according to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5;

Figure 21

Angles of application of test force

Image

Figure 22

Angles of application of test force

Image

| 3.1.6.2. | coupling balls, comprising parts which can be dismantled.
  The following categories are defined:






  (a) | towing bracket and ball (see Figure 20c), |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.1.6.2.

coupling balls, comprising parts which can be dismantled.

The following categories are defined:

(a)

towing bracket and ball (see Figure 20c),

| (b) | towing bracket and ball on integral support (see Figure 20d), |
| --- | --- |

(b)

towing bracket and ball on integral support (see Figure 20d),

| (c) | towing bracket with detachable ball (see Figure 20e), |
| --- | --- |

(c)

towing bracket with detachable ball (see Figure 20e),

| (d) | towing bracket without ball (see Figure 20f). |
| --- | --- |

(d)

towing bracket without ball (see Figure 20f).

| 3.1.6.2.1. | The strength test for the devices shown in Figures 20c to 20f shall be carried out according to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5. Dimensions e and f, shall have a manufacturing tolerance of ±5 mm, and shall be stated in the test report.
  The test of the towing bracket (see Figure 20f) shall be carried out with a mounted ball (on support). Account will be taken only of the result of the test on the towing bracket between the fixing points and the mounting surface of the ball support.
  The dimensions e and f shall have a manufacturing tolerance of ±5 mm and shall be specified by the coupling device manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.2.1.

The strength test for the devices shown in Figures 20c to 20f shall be carried out according to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5. Dimensions e and f, shall have a manufacturing tolerance of ±5 mm, and shall be stated in the test report.

The test of the towing bracket (see Figure 20f) shall be carried out with a mounted ball (on support). Account will be taken only of the result of the test on the towing bracket between the fixing points and the mounting surface of the ball support.

The dimensions e and f shall have a manufacturing tolerance of ±5 mm and shall be specified by the coupling device manufacturer.

| 3.1.6.3. | Coupling devices with variable dimensions e and f for demountable and interchangeable coupling balls — see Figure 22. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.3.

Coupling devices with variable dimensions e and f for demountable and interchangeable coupling balls — see Figure 22.

| 3.1.6.3.1. | The strength tests for such towing brackets shall be carried out to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.3.1.

The strength tests for such towing brackets shall be carried out to the requirements of paragraph 3.1.5.

| 3.1.6.3.2. | If a worst case configuration can be defined by agreement between the manufacturer and the type approval authority or technical service, then testing of this one configuration alone shall be sufficient.
  Otherwise, several ball positions shall be tested in a simplified test programme according to paragraph 3.1.6.3.3. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.6.3.2.

If a worst case configuration can be defined by agreement between the manufacturer and the type approval authority or technical service, then testing of this one configuration alone shall be sufficient.

Otherwise, several ball positions shall be tested in a simplified test programme according to paragraph 3.1.6.3.3.

| 3.1.6.3.3. | In a simplified test programme, the value for f shall be between a defined value of fmin and a value of fmax which does not exceed 100 mm. The ball shall be at a distance, emax, of 130 mm from the support. To cover all possible positions of the ball, in the field given by the horizontal distance from the mounting surface and the vertical range of f (fmin to fmax), two devices are to be tested:






  (i) | one with a ball in the upper (fmax) position, and |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.1.6.3.3.

In a simplified test programme, the value for f shall be between a defined value of fmin and a value of fmax which does not exceed 100 mm. The ball shall be at a distance, emax, of 130 mm from the support. To cover all possible positions of the ball, in the field given by the horizontal distance from the mounting surface and the vertical range of f (fmin to fmax), two devices are to be tested:

(i)

one with a ball in the upper (fmax) position, and

| (ii) | one with a ball in the lower (fmin) position. |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

one with a ball in the lower (fmin) position.

The angle of application of the test force will vary, positive or negative, depending on the relationship of the ball centre horizontal reference line to the parallel line passing through the highest and nearest coupling device fixing point. The angles to be used are shown in Figure 22.

| 3.1.7. | In the case where detachable ball units are retained using fixing arrangements other than screwed fittings, for example, spring clips, and where the positive mechanical engagement aspect of the arrangement is not tested during the dynamic test, then the arrangement shall be subject to a static test applied to the ball or to the positive mechanical engagement arrangement in an appropriate direction. Where the positive mechanical engagement arrangement retains the ball unit vertically, the static test shall be to apply an upwards vertical force to the ball equivalent to the “D” value. Where the positive mechanical engagement arrangement retains the ball unit by means of a transverse horizontal design, the static test shall be to apply a force in this direction equivalent to 0,25 D. There shall not be any failure of the positive mechanical engagement device or any distortion likely to have an adverse effect on its function. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.7.

In the case where detachable ball units are retained using fixing arrangements other than screwed fittings, for example, spring clips, and where the positive mechanical engagement aspect of the arrangement is not tested during the dynamic test, then the arrangement shall be subject to a static test applied to the ball or to the positive mechanical engagement arrangement in an appropriate direction. Where the positive mechanical engagement arrangement retains the ball unit vertically, the static test shall be to apply an upwards vertical force to the ball equivalent to the “D” value. Where the positive mechanical engagement arrangement retains the ball unit by means of a transverse horizontal design, the static test shall be to apply a force in this direction equivalent to 0,25 D. There shall not be any failure of the positive mechanical engagement device or any distortion likely to have an adverse effect on its function.

| 3.1.8. | The attachment points for the secondary coupling referred to in annex 5, paragraph 1.5 shall withstand a horizontal static force equivalent to 2D with a maximum of 15 kN. Where there is a separate attachment point for a breakaway cable this shall withstand a horizontal static force equivalent to D. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.8.

The attachment points for the secondary coupling referred to in annex 5, paragraph 1.5 shall withstand a horizontal static force equivalent to 2D with a maximum of 15 kN. Where there is a separate attachment point for a breakaway cable this shall withstand a horizontal static force equivalent to D.

| 3.2. | Coupling heads |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

Coupling heads

| 3.2.1. | The basic test is an endurance test using an alternating test force followed by a static test (lifting test) on the same test sample. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

The basic test is an endurance test using an alternating test force followed by a static test (lifting test) on the same test sample.

| 3.2.2. | The dynamic test shall be performed with a Class A coupling ball of appropriate strength. On the test rig the coupling ball and coupling head shall be arranged as instructed by the manufacturer and orientated in a way corresponding to the relative positions in normal use. There should be no possibility of extra forces in addition to the test force acting on the specimen. The test force shall be applied along a line passing through the centre of the ball and inclined downwards to the rear at 15o (see Figure 23). An endurance test must be performed on a test specimen with the following test force:
  Fhs res w = ±0,6 D
  Where the maximum permissible static vertical mass, S, exceeds 120 D, then the angle of test shall be increased to 20o. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

The dynamic test shall be performed with a Class A coupling ball of appropriate strength. On the test rig the coupling ball and coupling head shall be arranged as instructed by the manufacturer and orientated in a way corresponding to the relative positions in normal use. There should be no possibility of extra forces in addition to the test force acting on the specimen. The test force shall be applied along a line passing through the centre of the ball and inclined downwards to the rear at 15o (see Figure 23). An endurance test must be performed on a test specimen with the following test force:

Fhs res w = ±0,6 D

Where the maximum permissible static vertical mass, S, exceeds 120 D, then the angle of test shall be increased to 20o.

Figure 23

Dynamic test

Image

| 3.2.3. | A static separation test shall also be performed. The coupling ball used for the test shall have a diameter of 49,00 to 49,13 mm in order to represent a worn coupling ball. The separation force, Fa, shall be applied perpendicular to both the transverse and longitudinal centre line axes of the coupling head and shall be increased smoothly and quickly to a value of:
  Fa = g(C+ S/1 000)kN
  and be held for 10 seconds.
  The coupling head shall not separate from the ball nor shall any component of the coupling head exhibit any permanent distortion which could have an adverse effect on its functional capability. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

A static separation test shall also be performed. The coupling ball used for the test shall have a diameter of 49,00 to 49,13 mm in order to represent a worn coupling ball. The separation force, Fa, shall be applied perpendicular to both the transverse and longitudinal centre line axes of the coupling head and shall be increased smoothly and quickly to a value of:

Fa = g(C+ S/1 000)kN

and be held for 10 seconds.

The coupling head shall not separate from the ball nor shall any component of the coupling head exhibit any permanent distortion which could have an adverse effect on its functional capability.

| 3.3. | Drawbar couplings and drawbeams |
| --- | --- |

3.3.

Drawbar couplings and drawbeams

| 3.3.1. | An endurance test shall be performed on a test sample. The coupling device shall be equipped with all the fixings needed to attach it to the vehicle. Any intermediate devices fitted between the drawbar couplings and the vehicle frame (i.e. drawbeams) shall be tested with the same forces as the coupling. When testing drawbeams intended for standard drawbar couplings, the vertical load shall be applied at a longitudinal distance from the vertical plane of the fixing points that is equal to the position of the corresponding standard coupling. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.1.

An endurance test shall be performed on a test sample. The coupling device shall be equipped with all the fixings needed to attach it to the vehicle. Any intermediate devices fitted between the drawbar couplings and the vehicle frame (i.e. drawbeams) shall be tested with the same forces as the coupling. When testing drawbeams intended for standard drawbar couplings, the vertical load shall be applied at a longitudinal distance from the vertical plane of the fixing points that is equal to the position of the corresponding standard coupling.

| 3.3.2. | Drawbar couplings for hinged drawbars (S=0)
  The dynamic test shall be performed with a horizontal alternating force of Fhw = ±0,6 D acting in a line parallel to the ground and in the longitudinal median plane of the towing vehicle passing through the centre of the coupling pin. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.2.

Drawbar couplings for hinged drawbars (S=0)

The dynamic test shall be performed with a horizontal alternating force of Fhw = ±0,6 D acting in a line parallel to the ground and in the longitudinal median plane of the towing vehicle passing through the centre of the coupling pin.

| 3.3.3. | Drawbar couplings for use with centre‐axle trailers (S>0). |
| --- | --- |

3.3.3.

Drawbar couplings for use with centre‐axle trailers (S>0).

| 3.3.3.1. | Centre axle trailer masses up to and including 3,5 tonnes:
  Drawbar couplings for use with centre axle trailers up to and including a mass of 3,5 tonnes shall be tested in the same way as coupling balls and towing brackets described in 3.1 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.3.1.

Centre axle trailer masses up to and including 3,5 tonnes:

Drawbar couplings for use with centre axle trailers up to and including a mass of 3,5 tonnes shall be tested in the same way as coupling balls and towing brackets described in 3.1 of this annex.

| 3.3.3.2. | Centre axle trailer masses exceeding 3,5 tonnes:
  The test forces are applied to the specimen in both horizontal and vertical directions in an asynchronous endurance test. The horizontal line of action shall be equivalent to being parallel to the ground and along the longitudinal median plane of the towing vehicle and pass through the centre of the coupling pin. The vertical line of action shall be perpendicular to the horizontal line of action and shall act along the longitudinal centre line of the coupling pin.
  The fixing arrangements for the drawbar coupling and the drawbar eye on the test rig shall be those intended for its attachment to the vehicle in accordance with the manufacturer's fitting instructions.
  The following test forces shall be applied:
  Table 14
  Test forces







  Test Force | Mean value (kN) | Amplitude (kN) |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Horizontal Force | 0 | ±0,6 Dc (see note) |
| Vertical Force | S x g/1 000 | ±0,6 V (see note) |
| Note: In the case of Class T dedicated drawbar couplings these values shall be reduced to ±0,5Dc and ±0,5V. |

3.3.3.2.

Centre axle trailer masses exceeding 3,5 tonnes:

The test forces are applied to the specimen in both horizontal and vertical directions in an asynchronous endurance test. The horizontal line of action shall be equivalent to being parallel to the ground and along the longitudinal median plane of the towing vehicle and pass through the centre of the coupling pin. The vertical line of action shall be perpendicular to the horizontal line of action and shall act along the longitudinal centre line of the coupling pin.

The fixing arrangements for the drawbar coupling and the drawbar eye on the test rig shall be those intended for its attachment to the vehicle in accordance with the manufacturer's fitting instructions.

The following test forces shall be applied:

Table 14

Test forces

Test Force

Mean value (kN)

Amplitude (kN)

Horizontal Force

0

±0,6 Dc (see note)

Vertical Force

S x g/1 000

±0,6 V (see note)

Note: In the case of Class T dedicated drawbar couplings these values shall be reduced to ±0,5Dc and ±0,5V.

The vertical and the horizontal components shall be sinusoidal in shape and shall be applied asynchronously, where the difference of their frequencies shall be between 1 per cent and 3 per cent.

| 3.3.4. | Static test on coupling pin locking device
  With drawbar couplings it is also necessary to test the closure and any locking devices by means of a static force of 0,25 D acting in the direction of opening. The test shall not cause the closure to open and it shall not cause any damage. A test force of 0,1 D is sufficient in the case of cylindrical coupling pins. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.4.

Static test on coupling pin locking device

With drawbar couplings it is also necessary to test the closure and any locking devices by means of a static force of 0,25 D acting in the direction of opening. The test shall not cause the closure to open and it shall not cause any damage. A test force of 0,1 D is sufficient in the case of cylindrical coupling pins.

| 3.4. | Drawbar eyes |
| --- | --- |

3.4.

Drawbar eyes

| 3.4.1. | Drawbar eyes shall be subjected to the same dynamic testing as drawbar couplings. Drawbar eyes used solely for trailers having hinged drawbars allowing free vertical movement shall be subjected to an alternating force as described in paragraph 3.3.2. Drawbar eyes also intended for use on centre axle trailers shall be tested in the same way as ball coupling heads (paragraph 3.2) for trailer masses C up to and including 3,5 tonnes and in the same way as drawbar couplings (paragraph 3.3.3.2.) for centre axle trailers with a mass, C, exceeding 3,5 tonnes. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.1.

Drawbar eyes shall be subjected to the same dynamic testing as drawbar couplings. Drawbar eyes used solely for trailers having hinged drawbars allowing free vertical movement shall be subjected to an alternating force as described in paragraph 3.3.2. Drawbar eyes also intended for use on centre axle trailers shall be tested in the same way as ball coupling heads (paragraph 3.2) for trailer masses C up to and including 3,5 tonnes and in the same way as drawbar couplings (paragraph 3.3.3.2.) for centre axle trailers with a mass, C, exceeding 3,5 tonnes.

| 3.4.2. | Toroidal eyes of Class L shall be tested in the same manner as standard drawbar eyes. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.2.

Toroidal eyes of Class L shall be tested in the same manner as standard drawbar eyes.

| 3.4.3. | The testing of drawbar eyes shall be conducted in such a manner that the alternating force also acts on the parts used for attaching the drawbar eye to the drawbar. All flexible intermediate components shall be clamped. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.3.

The testing of drawbar eyes shall be conducted in such a manner that the alternating force also acts on the parts used for attaching the drawbar eye to the drawbar. All flexible intermediate components shall be clamped.

| 3.5. | Hook type couplings |
| --- | --- |

3.5.

Hook type couplings

| 3.5.1. | Class K hook type couplings shall satisfy the dynamic test given in paragraph 3.5.2 of this annex. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.1.

Class K hook type couplings shall satisfy the dynamic test given in paragraph 3.5.2 of this annex.

| 3.5.2. | Dynamic test: |
| --- | --- |

3.5.2.

Dynamic test:

| 3.5.2.1. | The dynamic test shall be a pulsating test using a Class L toroidal eye and with the coupling mounted as it would be on a vehicle and with all of the necessary parts for vehicle installation. However, any flexible components may be neutralised with the agreement of the type approval authority or technical service; |
| --- | --- |

3.5.2.1.

The dynamic test shall be a pulsating test using a Class L toroidal eye and with the coupling mounted as it would be on a vehicle and with all of the necessary parts for vehicle installation. However, any flexible components may be neutralised with the agreement of the type approval authority or technical service;

| 3.5.2.2. | For hook type couplings intended for use with hinged drawbar trailers, where the imposed vertical load on the coupling, S, is zero, the test force shall be applied in a horizontal direction simulating a tensile force on the hook and varying between 0,05 D and 1,00 D; |
| --- | --- |

3.5.2.2.

For hook type couplings intended for use with hinged drawbar trailers, where the imposed vertical load on the coupling, S, is zero, the test force shall be applied in a horizontal direction simulating a tensile force on the hook and varying between 0,05 D and 1,00 D;

| 3.5.2.3. | For hook type couplings intended for use with centre axle trailers the test force shall represent the resultant of the horizontal and vertical forces on the coupling and shall be applied along an angle, -α, that is, from top front to bottom rear (see Figure 21), and equivalent to the calculated angle of the resultant between the horizontal and vertical forces on the coupling.
  The force, Fhs res shall be calculated as:

  Fhs res
  = sq . rt(Fh

  2 + Fs

  2) ,
  where Fh
  = Dc
  and Fs
  = (9,81S)/1 000 + 0,8V |
| --- | --- |

3.5.2.3.

For hook type couplings intended for use with centre axle trailers the test force shall represent the resultant of the horizontal and vertical forces on the coupling and shall be applied along an angle, -α, that is, from top front to bottom rear (see Figure 21), and equivalent to the calculated angle of the resultant between the horizontal and vertical forces on the coupling.

The force, Fhs res shall be calculated as:

Fhs res
  = sq . rt(Fh

  2 + Fs

  2) ,

where Fh
  = Dc
  and Fs
  = (9,81S)/1 000 + 0,8V

| 3.5.2.4. | The applied force shall vary between and . 0,05Fhs res
  1,00Fhs res |
| --- | --- |

3.5.2.4.

The applied force shall vary between and . 0,05Fhs res
  1,00Fhs res

| 3.5.3. | Static test on coupling locking device With hook type couplings it is also necessary to test the closure and any locking devices by means of a static force of 0,25 D acting in the direction of opening. The test shall not cause the closure to open and it shall not cause any damage. |
| --- | --- |

3.5.3.

Static test on coupling locking device With hook type couplings it is also necessary to test the closure and any locking devices by means of a static force of 0,25 D acting in the direction of opening. The test shall not cause the closure to open and it shall not cause any damage.

| 3.6. | Drawbars |
| --- | --- |

3.6.

Drawbars

| 3.6.1. | Drawbars shall be tested in the same way as drawbar eyes (see paragraph 3.4.). The type approval authority or technical service may waive an endurance test if the simple design of a component makes a theoretical check of its strength possible. The design forces for the theoretical verification of the drawbar of centre axle trailers with a mass, C, of up to and including 3,5 tonnes shall be taken from ISO 7641/1: 1983. The design forces for the theoretical verification of drawbars for centre axle trailers having a mass, C, over 3,5 tonnes shall be calculated as follows:
  Fsp = (g × S/1 000) + V
  where the force amplitude V is that given in paragraph 2.11.4 of this Regulation.
  The permissible stresses based on the design masses for trailers having a total mass, C, over 3,5 tonnes shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983. For bent drawbars (e.g. swan neck) and for the drawbars of full trailers, the horizontal force component Fhp = 1,0 × D shall be taken into consideration. |
| --- | --- |

3.6.1.

Drawbars shall be tested in the same way as drawbar eyes (see paragraph 3.4.). The type approval authority or technical service may waive an endurance test if the simple design of a component makes a theoretical check of its strength possible. The design forces for the theoretical verification of the drawbar of centre axle trailers with a mass, C, of up to and including 3,5 tonnes shall be taken from ISO 7641/1: 1983. The design forces for the theoretical verification of drawbars for centre axle trailers having a mass, C, over 3,5 tonnes shall be calculated as follows:

Fsp = (g × S/1 000) + V

where the force amplitude V is that given in paragraph 2.11.4 of this Regulation.

The permissible stresses based on the design masses for trailers having a total mass, C, over 3,5 tonnes shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983. For bent drawbars (e.g. swan neck) and for the drawbars of full trailers, the horizontal force component Fhp = 1,0 × D shall be taken into consideration.

| 3.6.2. | For drawbars for full trailers with free movement in the vertical plane, in addition to the endurance test or theoretical verification of strength, the resistance to buckling shall be verified either by a theoretical calculation with a design force of 3,0 × D or by a buckling test with a force of 3,0 × D. The permissible stresses in the case of calculation shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983. |
| --- | --- |

3.6.2.

For drawbars for full trailers with free movement in the vertical plane, in addition to the endurance test or theoretical verification of strength, the resistance to buckling shall be verified either by a theoretical calculation with a design force of 3,0 × D or by a buckling test with a force of 3,0 × D. The permissible stresses in the case of calculation shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983.

| 3.6.3. | In the case of steered axles, the resistance to bending shall be verified by theoretical calculations or by a bending test. A horizontal, lateral static force shall be applied in the centre of the coupling point. The magnitude of this force shall be chosen so that a moment of 0,6 × Av × g (kNm) is exerted about the front axle centre. The permissible stresses shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983.
  However, in the case where the steered axles form a twin, tandem, axle front carriage (steered bogie) the moment shall be increased to 0,95 × Av × g (kNm) |
| --- | --- |

3.6.3.

In the case of steered axles, the resistance to bending shall be verified by theoretical calculations or by a bending test. A horizontal, lateral static force shall be applied in the centre of the coupling point. The magnitude of this force shall be chosen so that a moment of 0,6 × Av × g (kNm) is exerted about the front axle centre. The permissible stresses shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ISO 7641/1: 1983.

However, in the case where the steered axles form a twin, tandem, axle front carriage (steered bogie) the moment shall be increased to 0,95 × Av × g (kNm)

| 3.7. | Fifth wheel couplings |
| --- | --- |

3.7.

Fifth wheel couplings

| 3.7.1. | The basic strength tests are a dynamic test and a static test (lifting test). Fifth wheel couplings intended for the positive steering of semitrailers shall be subject to an additional static test (bending test). For the purpose of the tests the fifth wheel coupling shall be equipped with all the fixings needed to attach it to the vehicle. The method of mounting shall be identical to that employed on the vehicle itself. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.1.

The basic strength tests are a dynamic test and a static test (lifting test). Fifth wheel couplings intended for the positive steering of semitrailers shall be subject to an additional static test (bending test). For the purpose of the tests the fifth wheel coupling shall be equipped with all the fixings needed to attach it to the vehicle. The method of mounting shall be identical to that employed on the vehicle itself. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing.

| 3.7.2. | Static tests |
| --- | --- |

3.7.2.

Static tests

| 3.7.2.1. | Standard fifth wheel couplings designed for a steering wedge or similar device for the positive steering of semitrailers (see paragraph 2.7 of this Regulation) shall be tested for adequate strength by means of a static bending test within the working range of the steering device with the simultaneous application of fifth wheel load. The maximum permitted imposed vertical load, U, for the fifth wheel shall be applied vertically to the coupling in its operating position by means of a rigid plate of sufficient size to cover the coupling completely.
  The resultant of the applied load shall pass through the centre of the horizontal joint of the fifth wheel coupling.
  Simultaneously, a horizontal lateral force, representing the force needed for positive steering of the semitrailer, shall be applied to the flanks of the guide for the coupling pin. The magnitude of this force and the direction in which it acts shall be chosen so that a moment of 0,75m × D is exerted about the centre of the coupling pin by means of a force acting on a lever arm 0,5 m ± 0,1 m long. Permanent, plastic deformation up to 0,5 per cent of all nominal dimensions is permitted. There shall not be any cracking. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.2.1.

Standard fifth wheel couplings designed for a steering wedge or similar device for the positive steering of semitrailers (see paragraph 2.7 of this Regulation) shall be tested for adequate strength by means of a static bending test within the working range of the steering device with the simultaneous application of fifth wheel load. The maximum permitted imposed vertical load, U, for the fifth wheel shall be applied vertically to the coupling in its operating position by means of a rigid plate of sufficient size to cover the coupling completely.

The resultant of the applied load shall pass through the centre of the horizontal joint of the fifth wheel coupling.

Simultaneously, a horizontal lateral force, representing the force needed for positive steering of the semitrailer, shall be applied to the flanks of the guide for the coupling pin. The magnitude of this force and the direction in which it acts shall be chosen so that a moment of 0,75m × D is exerted about the centre of the coupling pin by means of a force acting on a lever arm 0,5 m ± 0,1 m long. Permanent, plastic deformation up to 0,5 per cent of all nominal dimensions is permitted. There shall not be any cracking.

| 3.7.2.2. | A static lifting test shall be performed on all fifth wheel couplings. Up to a lifting force of Fa = g.U there shall not be any major permanent bending of the coupling plate over more than 0,2 per cent of its width.
  In the case of Class G50 standard fifth wheel couplings and comparable couplings for the same coupling pin diameter, there shall not be any separation of the coupling pin from the coupling with a lifting force of Fa = g × 2,5 U. In the case of non‐standard couplings using a pin diameter greater than 50 mm, for example 90 mm pin diameter couplings, the lifting force shall be: Fa = g × 1,6 U with a minimum value of 500 kN.
  The force shall be applied by means of a lever bearing on the coupling plate at one end and being raised at the other end at a distance of 1,0 to 1,5 m from the centre of the coupling pin — see Figure 24.
  The lever arm shall be at 90o to the direction of entry of the coupling pin into the coupling. If the worst case is obvious, this worst case has to be tested. If the worst case is not easy to determine, the type approval authority or technical service shall decide which side to test. Only one test is necessary. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.2.2.

A static lifting test shall be performed on all fifth wheel couplings. Up to a lifting force of Fa = g.U there shall not be any major permanent bending of the coupling plate over more than 0,2 per cent of its width.

In the case of Class G50 standard fifth wheel couplings and comparable couplings for the same coupling pin diameter, there shall not be any separation of the coupling pin from the coupling with a lifting force of Fa = g × 2,5 U. In the case of non‐standard couplings using a pin diameter greater than 50 mm, for example 90 mm pin diameter couplings, the lifting force shall be: Fa = g × 1,6 U with a minimum value of 500 kN.

The force shall be applied by means of a lever bearing on the coupling plate at one end and being raised at the other end at a distance of 1,0 to 1,5 m from the centre of the coupling pin — see Figure 24.

The lever arm shall be at 90o to the direction of entry of the coupling pin into the coupling. If the worst case is obvious, this worst case has to be tested. If the worst case is not easy to determine, the type approval authority or technical service shall decide which side to test. Only one test is necessary.

Figure 24

Lifting test on fifth wheel couplings

Image

| 3.7.3. | Dynamic test
  The fifth wheel coupling shall be subjected to alternating stress on a test rig (asynchronous dynamic test) with horizontal alternating and vertical pulsating forces acting simultaneously. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.3.

Dynamic test

The fifth wheel coupling shall be subjected to alternating stress on a test rig (asynchronous dynamic test) with horizontal alternating and vertical pulsating forces acting simultaneously.

| 3.7.3.1. | In the case of fifth wheel couplings not intended for the positive steering of semitrailers, the following forces shall be used:






  Horizontal: | Fhw = ±0,6 × D |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Vertical: | Fso = g × 1,2 U
  Fsu = g × 0,4 U |

3.7.3.1.

In the case of fifth wheel couplings not intended for the positive steering of semitrailers, the following forces shall be used:

Horizontal:

Fhw = ±0,6 × D

Vertical:

Fso = g × 1,2 U

Fsu = g × 0,4 U

These two forces shall be applied in the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle with the lines of action of both forces Fso and Fsu passing through the centre of the joint of the coupling.

The vertical force Fs alternates between the limits +g × 1,2 U and +g × 0,4 U and the horizontal force between ±0,6 D.

| 3.7.3.2. | In the case of fifth wheel couplings intended for the positive steering of semitrailers the following forces shall be used:
  Horizontal: Fhw = ±0,675 D
  Vertical: Fso and Fsu as in paragraph 3.7.3.1.
  The lines of action of the forces are as given in paragraph 3.7.3.1. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.3.2.

In the case of fifth wheel couplings intended for the positive steering of semitrailers the following forces shall be used:

Horizontal: Fhw = ±0,675 D

Vertical: Fso and Fsu as in paragraph 3.7.3.1.

The lines of action of the forces are as given in paragraph 3.7.3.1.

| 3.7.3.3. | For the dynamic test of fifth wheel couplings, a suitable lubricating material shall be placed between the coupling plate and the trailer plate so that the maximum coefficient of friction, μ ≤ 0,15. |
| --- | --- |

3.7.3.3.

For the dynamic test of fifth wheel couplings, a suitable lubricating material shall be placed between the coupling plate and the trailer plate so that the maximum coefficient of friction, μ ≤ 0,15.

| 3.8. | Mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings
  The dynamic test for fifth wheel couplings described in paragraph 3.7.3 and the static tests described in paragraph 3.7.2 shall also be applied to mounting plates. With mounting plates, it is sufficient to perform the lifting test on one side only. The test shall be based on the maximum designated installation height for the coupling, the maximum designated width and the minimum designated length of the mounting plate design. It is not necessary to carry out this test if the mounting plate in question is identical to one which has already undergone this test except that it is narrower and/or longer and the total height is lower. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing. |
| --- | --- |

3.8.

Mounting plates for fifth wheel couplings

The dynamic test for fifth wheel couplings described in paragraph 3.7.3 and the static tests described in paragraph 3.7.2 shall also be applied to mounting plates. With mounting plates, it is sufficient to perform the lifting test on one side only. The test shall be based on the maximum designated installation height for the coupling, the maximum designated width and the minimum designated length of the mounting plate design. It is not necessary to carry out this test if the mounting plate in question is identical to one which has already undergone this test except that it is narrower and/or longer and the total height is lower. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing.

| 3.9. | Fifth wheel coupling pins of semitrailers |
| --- | --- |

3.9.

Fifth wheel coupling pins of semitrailers

| 3.9.1. | A dynamic test with alternating stress shall be performed on a sample mounted on a test rig. The testing of the coupling pin shall not be combined with the testing of the fifth wheel coupling. The test shall be conducted so that the force is also applied to the fixings needed for attaching the coupling pin to the semitrailer. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing. |
| --- | --- |

3.9.1.

A dynamic test with alternating stress shall be performed on a sample mounted on a test rig. The testing of the coupling pin shall not be combined with the testing of the fifth wheel coupling. The test shall be conducted so that the force is also applied to the fixings needed for attaching the coupling pin to the semitrailer. It is not permissible to use a calculation method as an alternative to physical testing.

| 3.9.2. | A dynamic test with an alternating horizontal force of Fhw = ±0,6 D shall be applied to the coupling pin in the operating position.
  The line of action of the force shall pass through the centre of the smallest diameter of the cylindrical part of the coupling pin having a diameter of 50,8 mm for Class H50 (see annex 5, Figure 18). |
| --- | --- |

3.9.2.

A dynamic test with an alternating horizontal force of Fhw = ±0,6 D shall be applied to the coupling pin in the operating position.

The line of action of the force shall pass through the centre of the smallest diameter of the cylindrical part of the coupling pin having a diameter of 50,8 mm for Class H50 (see annex 5, Figure 18).

ANNEX 7

INSTALLATION AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

1.   INSTALLATION AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

| 1.1. | Attachment of coupling balls and towing brackets |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

Attachment of coupling balls and towing brackets

| 1.1.1. | Coupling balls and towing brackets shall be attached to vehicles of categories M1, M2 (below 3,5 t maximum permissible mass) and N1
   (1) in a manner which conforms to the clearance and height dimensions given in Figure 25. The height shall be measured at the vehicle loading conditions given in appendix 1 to this annex.
  The height requirement shall not apply in the case of category G off‐road vehicles as defined in annex 7 of the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3)(document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2). |
| --- | --- |

1.1.1.

Coupling balls and towing brackets shall be attached to vehicles of categories M1, M2 (below 3,5 t maximum permissible mass) and N1
   (1) in a manner which conforms to the clearance and height dimensions given in Figure 25. The height shall be measured at the vehicle loading conditions given in appendix 1 to this annex.

The height requirement shall not apply in the case of category G off‐road vehicles as defined in annex 7 of the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3)(document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

| 1.1.1.1. | The clearance space shown in Figures 25a and 25b may be occupied by non‐demountable equipment, such as a spare wheel, provided that the distance from the centre of the ball to a vertical plane at the extreme rearmost point of the equipment does not exceed 300 mm. The equipment shall be mounted to allow adequate access for coupling and uncoupling without risk of injury to the user and without affecting articulation of the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.1.1.

The clearance space shown in Figures 25a and 25b may be occupied by non‐demountable equipment, such as a spare wheel, provided that the distance from the centre of the ball to a vertical plane at the extreme rearmost point of the equipment does not exceed 300 mm. The equipment shall be mounted to allow adequate access for coupling and uncoupling without risk of injury to the user and without affecting articulation of the coupling.

| 1.1.2. | For coupling balls and towing brackets the vehicle manufacturer shall supply mounting instructions and state whether any reinforcement of the fixing area is necessary. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.2.

For coupling balls and towing brackets the vehicle manufacturer shall supply mounting instructions and state whether any reinforcement of the fixing area is necessary.

| 1.1.3. | It shall be possible to couple and uncouple ball couplings when the longitudinal axis of the ball coupling in relation to the centre line of the coupling ball and mounting:
  is rotated horizontally 60o to right or left, (β = 60o, see Figure 25);
  is rotated vertically 10o up or down (α = 10o, see Figure 25);
  is rotated axially 10o to right or left. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.3.

It shall be possible to couple and uncouple ball couplings when the longitudinal axis of the ball coupling in relation to the centre line of the coupling ball and mounting:

is rotated horizontally 60o to right or left, (β = 60o, see Figure 25);

is rotated vertically 10o up or down (α = 10o, see Figure 25);

is rotated axially 10o to right or left.

Figure 25(a)

Clearance space for, and height of, coupling ball — side view

Image

Figure 25(b)

Clearance space for coupling ball — plan view

Image

| 1.1.4. | When the trailer is not coupled to the towing vehicle, the mounted towing bracket and coupling ball shall not obscure the mounting space provided for the rear registration plate or affect the visibility of the rear registration/licence plate of the towing vehicle. If the coupling ball or other items do obscure the rear registration plate they shall be removable or repositionable without the use of tools except, for example, an easily operated (i.e. an effort not exceeding 20 Nm) release key which is carried in the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.4.

When the trailer is not coupled to the towing vehicle, the mounted towing bracket and coupling ball shall not obscure the mounting space provided for the rear registration plate or affect the visibility of the rear registration/licence plate of the towing vehicle. If the coupling ball or other items do obscure the rear registration plate they shall be removable or repositionable without the use of tools except, for example, an easily operated (i.e. an effort not exceeding 20 Nm) release key which is carried in the vehicle.

| 1.2. | Attachment of coupling heads |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

Attachment of coupling heads

| 1.2.1. | Class B coupling heads are permitted for trailers of maximum mass up to and including 3,5 tonnes. With the trailer horizontal and carrying the maximum permitted axle load, coupling heads shall be fitted so that the centre line of the spherical area into which the ball fits is 430 ±35 mm above the horizontal plane on which the wheels of the trailer rest.
  In the case of caravans and goods trailers, the horizontal position is regarded as when the floor or loading surface is horizontal. In the case of trailers without such a reference surface (e.g. boat trailers or similar) the trailer manufacturer shall give an appropriate reference line defining the horizontal position. The height requirement shall apply only to trailers intended to be attached to vehicles mentioned in paragraph 1.1.1. of this annex.
  In all cases the horizontal position shall be determined to within ±1o. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.1.

Class B coupling heads are permitted for trailers of maximum mass up to and including 3,5 tonnes. With the trailer horizontal and carrying the maximum permitted axle load, coupling heads shall be fitted so that the centre line of the spherical area into which the ball fits is 430 ±35 mm above the horizontal plane on which the wheels of the trailer rest.

In the case of caravans and goods trailers, the horizontal position is regarded as when the floor or loading surface is horizontal. In the case of trailers without such a reference surface (e.g. boat trailers or similar) the trailer manufacturer shall give an appropriate reference line defining the horizontal position. The height requirement shall apply only to trailers intended to be attached to vehicles mentioned in paragraph 1.1.1. of this annex.

In all cases the horizontal position shall be determined to within ±1o.

| 1.2.2. | It shall be possible to operate the coupling heads safely within the free space of the coupling ball given in Figures 25a and 25b, up to angles of α = 25o and β = 60o. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.2.

It shall be possible to operate the coupling heads safely within the free space of the coupling ball given in Figures 25a and 25b, up to angles of α = 25o and β = 60o.

| 1.3. | Attachment of drawbar couplings and mounting blocks |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

Attachment of drawbar couplings and mounting blocks

| 1.3.1. | Mounting dimensions for standard drawbar couplings:
  In the case of types of standard drawbar couplings the mounting dimensions on the vehicle given in Figure 15 and Table 10 must be met. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.1.

Mounting dimensions for standard drawbar couplings:

In the case of types of standard drawbar couplings the mounting dimensions on the vehicle given in Figure 15 and Table 10 must be met.

| 1.3.2. | Need for remote controlled couplings
  If one or more of the following requirements regarding easy and safe operation (paragraph 1.3.3.), accessibility (paragraph 1.3.5.) or clearance for the hand lever (paragraph 1.3.6.) cannot be met, a coupling with a remote control device as described in annex 5, paragraph 12.3. shall be used. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.2.

Need for remote controlled couplings

If one or more of the following requirements regarding easy and safe operation (paragraph 1.3.3.), accessibility (paragraph 1.3.5.) or clearance for the hand lever (paragraph 1.3.6.) cannot be met, a coupling with a remote control device as described in annex 5, paragraph 12.3. shall be used.

| 1.3.3. | Easy and safe coupling operation
  Drawbar couplings shall be mounted on the vehicle in such a manner that they are easy and safe to operate.
  In addition to the functions of opening (and closing, if applicable) this also includes checking the position of the indicator for the closed and locked positions of the coupling pin (by sight and touch).
  In the area in which the person operating the coupling has to stand, there shall not be any points of possible danger such as sharp edges, corners, etc. inherent in the design unless these are protected so that injury is unlikely.
  The way of escape from this area shall not be restricted or barred on either side by any objects attached to either the coupling or the vehicles.
  Any underrun protection device shall not prevent the person adopting a suitable position to operate the coupling. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.3.

Easy and safe coupling operation

Drawbar couplings shall be mounted on the vehicle in such a manner that they are easy and safe to operate.

In addition to the functions of opening (and closing, if applicable) this also includes checking the position of the indicator for the closed and locked positions of the coupling pin (by sight and touch).

In the area in which the person operating the coupling has to stand, there shall not be any points of possible danger such as sharp edges, corners, etc. inherent in the design unless these are protected so that injury is unlikely.

The way of escape from this area shall not be restricted or barred on either side by any objects attached to either the coupling or the vehicles.

Any underrun protection device shall not prevent the person adopting a suitable position to operate the coupling.

| 1.3.4. | Minimum angle for coupling up and uncoupling
  Coupling and uncoupling of the drawbar eye shall be possible when the longitudinal axis of the drawbar eye in relation to the centre line of the jaw is simultaneously rotated:
  50o horizontally to right or left;
  6o vertically up or down.
  6o axially to right or left.
  This requirement shall also apply to Class K hook type couplings. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.4.

Minimum angle for coupling up and uncoupling

Coupling and uncoupling of the drawbar eye shall be possible when the longitudinal axis of the drawbar eye in relation to the centre line of the jaw is simultaneously rotated:

50o horizontally to right or left;

6o vertically up or down.

6o axially to right or left.

This requirement shall also apply to Class K hook type couplings.

| 1.3.5. | Accessibility
  The distance between the centre of the coupling pin and the edge of the bodywork of the vehicle shall not exceed 550 mm. Where the distance exceeds 420 mm, the coupling shall be fitted with an actuation mechanism which will allow safe operation at a maximum distance of 420 mm from the outer board of the bodywork.
  The distance of 550 mm may be exceeded as follows, provided that technical necessity can be demonstrated and that easy and safe actuation of the drawbar coupling is not adversely affected:






  (i) | to a distance of up to 650 mm for vehicles with tipping bodies or rear‐mounted equipment; |
| --- | --- | --- |

1.3.5.

Accessibility

The distance between the centre of the coupling pin and the edge of the bodywork of the vehicle shall not exceed 550 mm. Where the distance exceeds 420 mm, the coupling shall be fitted with an actuation mechanism which will allow safe operation at a maximum distance of 420 mm from the outer board of the bodywork.

The distance of 550 mm may be exceeded as follows, provided that technical necessity can be demonstrated and that easy and safe actuation of the drawbar coupling is not adversely affected:

(i)

to a distance of up to 650 mm for vehicles with tipping bodies or rear‐mounted equipment;

| (ii) | to a distance of up to 1,320 mm if the unobstructed height is at least 1,150 mm; |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

to a distance of up to 1,320 mm if the unobstructed height is at least 1,150 mm;

| (iii) | in the case of car transporters with at least two loading levels when the trailer vehicle is not separated from the towing vehicle in normal transport operation. |
| --- | --- |

(iii)

in the case of car transporters with at least two loading levels when the trailer vehicle is not separated from the towing vehicle in normal transport operation.

| 1.3.6. | Clearance for the hand lever
  In order to permit safe operation of drawbar couplings there shall be adequate free space around the hand lever.
  The clearance illustrated in Figure 26 is regarded as sufficient.
  If different types of standard drawbar couplings are intended to be fitted to the vehicle, the clearance shall be such that the conditions are also satisfied for the largest size of coupling of the appropriate class given in annex 5, paragraph 3. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.6.

Clearance for the hand lever

In order to permit safe operation of drawbar couplings there shall be adequate free space around the hand lever.

The clearance illustrated in Figure 26 is regarded as sufficient.

If different types of standard drawbar couplings are intended to be fitted to the vehicle, the clearance shall be such that the conditions are also satisfied for the largest size of coupling of the appropriate class given in annex 5, paragraph 3.

Figure 26

Hand lever clearance

Image

The clearance dimensions are also applicable as appropriate for drawbar couplings having hand levers pointing downwards or of a different design.

The clearance shall also be maintained within the specified minimum angle for coupling up and uncoupling given in paragraph 1.3.4 of this annex.

| 1.3.7. | Clearance for free movement of drawbar coupling
  The drawbar coupling attached to the vehicle shall have a minimum clear gap of 10 mm from every other part of the vehicle taking into account all possible geometrical positions given in annex 5, paragraph 3.
  If different types of standard drawbar couplings are intended to be fitted to the vehicle type, the clearance shall be such that the conditions are also satisfied for the largest possible coupling of the appropriate class stated in annex 5, paragraph 3. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.7.

Clearance for free movement of drawbar coupling

The drawbar coupling attached to the vehicle shall have a minimum clear gap of 10 mm from every other part of the vehicle taking into account all possible geometrical positions given in annex 5, paragraph 3.

If different types of standard drawbar couplings are intended to be fitted to the vehicle type, the clearance shall be such that the conditions are also satisfied for the largest possible coupling of the appropriate class stated in annex 5, paragraph 3.

| 1.3.8. | Acceptability of drawbar couplings with a special joint for vertical rotation — see annex 5, paragraph 3.4.
  Couplings having a cylindrical pin and which achieve vertical rotation for the coupled drawbar eye by means of a special joint will only be permitted when technical necessity can be demonstrated. This may be the case, for example, on rear tippers when the coupling head shall be hinged, or with the couplings of heavy transporters when for strength reasons the use of a cylindrical coupling pin is necessary. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.8.

Acceptability of drawbar couplings with a special joint for vertical rotation — see annex 5, paragraph 3.4.

Couplings having a cylindrical pin and which achieve vertical rotation for the coupled drawbar eye by means of a special joint will only be permitted when technical necessity can be demonstrated. This may be the case, for example, on rear tippers when the coupling head shall be hinged, or with the couplings of heavy transporters when for strength reasons the use of a cylindrical coupling pin is necessary.

| 1.4. | Attachment of drawbar eyes and drawbars on trailers. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

Attachment of drawbar eyes and drawbars on trailers.

| 1.4.1. | Drawbars for centre axle trailers shall have a support device which is adjustable in height if bearing mass at the drawbar eye on the trailer exceeds 50 kg, when the trailer is uniformly loaded to its technically permissible maximum mass. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.1.

Drawbars for centre axle trailers shall have a support device which is adjustable in height if bearing mass at the drawbar eye on the trailer exceeds 50 kg, when the trailer is uniformly loaded to its technically permissible maximum mass.

| 1.4.2. | When attaching drawbar eyes and drawbar to centre‐axle trailers with a maximum mass, C, of more than 3,5 tonnes and more than one axle, the trailers shall be equipped with device for axle load sharing. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.2.

When attaching drawbar eyes and drawbar to centre‐axle trailers with a maximum mass, C, of more than 3,5 tonnes and more than one axle, the trailers shall be equipped with device for axle load sharing.

| 1.4.3. | Hinged drawbars shall be clear of the ground. They shall not fall below a height of 200 mm from the ground when released from the horizontal position. See also annex 5, paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.3.

Hinged drawbars shall be clear of the ground. They shall not fall below a height of 200 mm from the ground when released from the horizontal position. See also annex 5, paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4.

| 1.5. | Attachment of fifth wheel couplings, mounting plates and coupling pins on vehicles. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

Attachment of fifth wheel couplings, mounting plates and coupling pins on vehicles.

| 1.5.1. | Class G50 fifth wheel couplings shall not be mounted directly on the vehicle frame unless permitted by the vehicle manufacturer. They shall be fixed to the frame by means of a mounting plate and the installation instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer and coupling manufacturer shall be followed. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.1.

Class G50 fifth wheel couplings shall not be mounted directly on the vehicle frame unless permitted by the vehicle manufacturer. They shall be fixed to the frame by means of a mounting plate and the installation instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer and coupling manufacturer shall be followed.

| 1.5.2. | Semitrailers shall be equipped with landing gear or any other equipment which allows uncoupling and parking of the semitrailer. If semitrailers are equipped so that the connection of the coupling devices, the electrical systems and braking systems can be effected automatically, the trailer shall have landing gear which retracts from the ground automatically after the semitrailer has been coupled up.
  These requirements shall not apply in the case of semitrailers designed for special operations where they are normally only separated in a workshop or when loading and unloading in specifically designed operating areas. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.2.

Semitrailers shall be equipped with landing gear or any other equipment which allows uncoupling and parking of the semitrailer. If semitrailers are equipped so that the connection of the coupling devices, the electrical systems and braking systems can be effected automatically, the trailer shall have landing gear which retracts from the ground automatically after the semitrailer has been coupled up.

These requirements shall not apply in the case of semitrailers designed for special operations where they are normally only separated in a workshop or when loading and unloading in specifically designed operating areas.

| 1.5.3. | The fixing of the fifth wheel coupling pin to the mounting plate on the semitrailer shall be as instructed by the vehicle manufacturer or the manufacturer of the fifth wheel coupling pin. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.3.

The fixing of the fifth wheel coupling pin to the mounting plate on the semitrailer shall be as instructed by the vehicle manufacturer or the manufacturer of the fifth wheel coupling pin.

| 1.5.4. | If a semitrailer is equipped with a steering wedge it shall meet the requirements as described in annex 5, paragraph 7.8. |
| --- | --- |

1.5.4.

If a semitrailer is equipped with a steering wedge it shall meet the requirements as described in annex 5, paragraph 7.8.

2.   REMOTE INDICATION AND CONTROL

| 2.1. | When installing remote indication and control devices any relevant requirements given in annex 5, paragraph 12 shall be taken into account. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

When installing remote indication and control devices any relevant requirements given in annex 5, paragraph 12 shall be taken into account.

---

(1)  See definitions in Regulation No 13 annexed to the 1958 Agreement concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of these Prescriptions. The definition is also contained in annex 7 of the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3) (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

ANNEX 7

Appendix 1

LOADING CONDITIONS FOR MEASUREMENT OF COUPLING BALL HEIGHT

| 1. | The height shall be as specified in annex 7, paragraph 1.1.1. |
| --- | --- |

1.

The height shall be as specified in annex 7, paragraph 1.1.1.

| 2. | In the case of M1 category vehicles (1) the vehicle mass at which this height shall be measured shall be declared by the vehicle manufacturer and shall be given in the Communication form (annex 2). The mass shall be either the maximum permissible mass, distributed between the axles as declared by the vehicle manufacturer or the mass given by loading the vehicle in accordance with paragraph 2.1 of this appendix. |
| --- | --- |

2.

In the case of M1 category vehicles (1) the vehicle mass at which this height shall be measured shall be declared by the vehicle manufacturer and shall be given in the Communication form (annex 2). The mass shall be either the maximum permissible mass, distributed between the axles as declared by the vehicle manufacturer or the mass given by loading the vehicle in accordance with paragraph 2.1 of this appendix.

| 2.1. | The maximum figure for the mass in running order as declared by the towing vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 6. of the Communication form, annex 2); plus |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

The maximum figure for the mass in running order as declared by the towing vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 6. of the Communication form, annex 2); plus

| 2.1.1. | two masses, each of 68 kg, positioned in the outer seating position of each row of seats, with the seats in the rearmost adjustable position for normal driving and travel, and with the masses located: |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.

two masses, each of 68 kg, positioned in the outer seating position of each row of seats, with the seats in the rearmost adjustable position for normal driving and travel, and with the masses located:

| 2.1.1.1. | for original equipment coupling devices and components submitted for approval by the vehicle manufacturer, approximately at a point located at 100 mm in front of the “R” point for adjustable seats and 50 mm in front of the “R” point for other seats, the “R” point being determined according to Regulation No 14 paragraph 5.1.1.2.; or |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.1.

for original equipment coupling devices and components submitted for approval by the vehicle manufacturer, approximately at a point located at 100 mm in front of the “R” point for adjustable seats and 50 mm in front of the “R” point for other seats, the “R” point being determined according to Regulation No 14 paragraph 5.1.1.2.; or

| 2.1.1.2. | for coupling devices and components submitted for approval by an independent manufacturer and intended for replacement market fitting, approximately at the position of a seated person; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.2.

for coupling devices and components submitted for approval by an independent manufacturer and intended for replacement market fitting, approximately at the position of a seated person;

| 2.1.2. | In addition, for each mass of 68 kg, an additional mass of 7 kg allowance for personal luggage shall be distributed evenly in the luggage area of the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.2.

In addition, for each mass of 68 kg, an additional mass of 7 kg allowance for personal luggage shall be distributed evenly in the luggage area of the vehicle;

| 3. | In the case of N1 category vehicles (2), the vehicle mass at which this height shall be measured shall be: |
| --- | --- |

3.

In the case of N1 category vehicles (2), the vehicle mass at which this height shall be measured shall be:

| 3.1. | The maximum permissible mass, distributed between the axles as declared by the towing vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 6. of the Communication form, annex 2). |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

The maximum permissible mass, distributed between the axles as declared by the towing vehicle manufacturer (see paragraph 6. of the Communication form, annex 2).

---

(1)  As defined in the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), annex 7 (Document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

(2)  As defined in the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), annex 7 (Document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2).

---

Popravek

| 4.7.2006 | SL | Uradni list Evropske unije | L 181/111 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

4.7.2006

SL

Uradni list Evropske unije

L 181/111

---

Popravek Uredbe Sveta (ES) št. 1175/2005 z dne 18. julija 2005 o uvedbi dokončne protidampinške dajatve in o dokončnem pobiranju začasne dajatve, uvedene na uvoz barijevega karbonata s poreklom iz Ljudske republike Kitajske

(
  Uradni list Evropske unije L 189 z dne 21. julija 2005
  )

Stran 17, uvodna izjava 20, stran 21, uvodna izjava 47 in stran 22, člen 1(2):

besedilo:

”Zaozhuang Yongli Chemical Co.”

se glasi:

”Zaozhuang Yongli Chemical Co. Ltd.”.

---